Books Corner

Official Group and Channel

Silent features:-
● Best/Premium books are available.
● Best material for exam cracking.
● Doubts solving live.
● We provide sample papers of all subjects.
● And many more things.

● Link of Channel:-
Click here
• Link of Discussion Group:-
Click here
Note: These all channels are of Telegram only.

•Join fast•
 CHAPTTRWISE OucanoN DANx
MASTmRMIND
101
Objective TYPE QUESTIONs

a0. Which ofthe followlng ls

not a physlcal change?
Multiple Choice Questions a. Bolling of water to glve water
(NCERTEXEMx
vapour
reactlon b. Meltlng of lce to glve
following processes a chemlcal water
Q1. In which of the c. DIssolutlon of salt in
vater
has taken place? d. Combustlon of Liquefled Petroleurn
a. Ice melts into watcr Ans. (d) Combustlon of Liquefied
Gas (LPG)
in sunlght Petroleum Gas (LPG)
b. A wct shirt got dried
fornied over iron rod kept in alr a9. Whlch one of the following involve a chemicalresct
cA brown layer is
actlom
d Sugar getting
dissolvcd in water a. Evaporation of water
formed over iron rod kept alr
in b. Storing of nitrogen gas
Ans. () A brown layer is substancc under pressure
the identity of initlal c. Keeping petrol In a Chlna dish In open
Q2. In which of the following, (CBSE 2020)
remains unchangcd? dHeating magneslum wire in the presence
temperature of afr
afr at
a. Curding of milk crystallisation
Formation of crystals by protess of Ans. (d) Heating magneslum
b. wire In the presence of
cFermentation of grapes air at he
emperature
d. Digestion offood :Evaporation of water,. storing
crystals by process of crystallisation of nitrogen gas
Ans. (6) Formation of
crystallisation, no new substance is pressure and keeping petrolin a China dish in open dope
In the process of Involve a chemical reaction. es
formed. onlya bigger substance is
obtained. Therefore, it is a
phvsical [Link] identity of initial substance remalns: Heating magnesium wire in atr
the presence ofair
unchanged itemperature a chemical reaction.
involves at hg
Q3. Which of the following condition help
us to determine that Mgls)+0g) 2Mgo(s)
a chemical reaction has taken place? Q10. When a magnesium ribbon is
b. Formation of precipitate
burnt in air, the ashformedi
a. Evolution of gas colour.
n

All of these
c Change in colour d.
i ä.black b: yellow C. white dgrey
Ans. (d) All of these Ans. (¢) white
Q4. Magnesium ribbon is rubbed before burning because it has Q11. To indicate the presence of gaseous
a coating of: reactant or produe
a. basic magnesium oxide : we use the symbol:
a. (Product g)or (Reactant)(g)
b. basic magnesium carbonate
i b.(Product) or (Reactant)
c.(Product) 4f or (Reactant)
c basic magnesium sulphide
d. basic magnesium chloride
Ans. (b) basic magnesium carbonate d. Both (a) and (b)

Q5. If magnesium is gently heated, it forms: Ans. (d) Both (a) and (b)
a. magnesium oxide
b. magnesium sulfide KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
Cmagnesium nitrite d. magnesium carbonate
Ans. (a) magnesium oxide The gaseous reactants and products in any chemicalreaction
Magnesium + Oxygen Magnesium oxide
canbe demonstrated using the symbol (g) or "T:
Q6. Reaction of 'magnesium' with air is: The liquid, aqueous and solid states ofreactants and products
a. Exothermic reaction b. Endothermic reaction are represented by the notations, (). (aa) and (5) respectively
cReversible reaction d. Substitution reaction
Ans. (a) Exothermic reaction a12. Which one of the following processes involve chemial
The reaction is exothermic because magnesium oxide. is reactions? (NCERT EXEMPLAR
formed with the evolution of a lot of heat., a. Storing of oxygeñ gas under pressure in a gas cylinder
Q7. Which of the following is a physical change?i s b. Liquefaction of air
a. Formation of curd from milk C. Keeping petrol in a china dish in
the open
b. Ripening of fruits d. Heating copper wire in presenc of air at high temperatre
c. Getting salt from sea water
Ans. (d) Heating' copper wire "in presence of air at
d. Burning of wood hg
temperature
Ans. () Getting salt from sea water
Q13. In which of the following' chemical equations, the
KNOWLEDGE BOCSTER
.abbreviations representthe correct states ofthe reactant
The changes, which can
give back the reactantsbyphysicat means and products involved at reaction temperature?
are called physical changes. (NCERTEXEMPLAR
The process [Link]
evaporation of sea water is a process salt by| a.24200+00- 2H0g)
of crystallisation which is a
reversible process
dissolving in water.
and will convert again
in salt solution by b.2Hg)+0,02H0()
Hence, getting of
salt from sea water is .C.2H>9)+0,g)-> 2H0(0
physical change. a d.2H>lg)+O,g)>2H0olg)
Ans. () 2H29) + O2g)-> 2H00)
 11
Science Class10 | Tem 1

014. Consider the reaction: Na(s) +0, (g) -> Na, Ofs). Moles of 23. balanced chemical equation is in accordance witn:
A
sodium needed to balance equation would be: a. Avogadro's law
b. 2 b: law of multiple proportion
1
a. C.3 d. 4
Ans. (d) 4 c. law of conservation of mass
4Na(5)+0lg)2Na o(s) d. law of gaseous volumes

a 15. Consider the reaction: S(s)+ 0,g)-> so,. State of SO, in Ans. (c)law of conservation of mass
this reaction is: Q 24. The equation
+
a. liquid b. solid [Link] d. All of these Cu+XHNO,>Cu(NO,)2 +YNO, 2H,0
Ans. (gaseous The values of X and Yare:
a 16. Consider the reaction: P(s)+0, lg)->P,O1 s). Moles of a. 3 and 5 8 and 6, c4 and2
b. d.7and 1
0,g) needed to balance the equation will be: Ans. (c) 4 and 2
b.3 Cu(NO)2 +2N02 +2H
a.l c.5 d.7 Cu+4HNO
() CO, and
Ans. 5
a 25. Ethane (CH,) on complete combustion gave
4P(s) 50,0)P,O ols) accordance with the
water. It shows that the results are in
coefficient of
law of conservation of mass. Then, the
T!PPractice a number of questions based on balancing chemical oxygen is equal to:
5/2 C.2 d.7/2
equations. 3..
Ans. (d) 7/2
2c02 +3Ho
a 17. Consider the reaction: Na(s)+0,(0)> Na,a Moles of
oxygen needed to balance the equation are:
CH0
in a properly
b. 2 C.3 d.4
Q 26. Which of the following feature(s) is involved
a.1
written chemical equation?
Ans. (a)1
a. Temperature is required
4Na(5)+0,lg)-> 2Na,0(s)
b. It should be balanced
018. Consider reaction: AL(s) +0,0)>Al,O, (s). Moles of Al(s)
c. It should have information regarding physical states
needed to balance equation are: d. All of the above
a.1 b. 2 c.3 d. 4
Ans. (d) All of the above
Ans. (d) 4
27. The values of a, b and c so that the following
chemical
4Als)+30, 2AlO3(s)
PbSO4. As per the equation becomes balanced are:
Q 19. PbS reacts with ozone (0,) and forms
balanced equation, molecules of ozone required for
every aH +bO cH,O
a.a-2, b=1c=2 b. a =1, b =1,c=2
one molecule of PbS is/are:
C.2 C.a 1.b =2,c=1 .d.a =2, b=2.C=1
a. 4 b. 3 nrd.1
Ans. (a) 4
Ans. (a) a =2, b=1.c=2
PbS+403 4Pb50,
2H2 +02 2H,0

a 20.
a 28. The values of a, b and c so that the following chemical
In the following equations:
xis: reaction becomes balanced are:
Na, CO+x HCI 2NaCl+CO, +H,0, the value of +cH
b. 2 C.3 d. 4 aFe+bH,0>Fe,0,
a.1 b. a =2, b =4,C =2
a. a=4, b=2,c=2
Ans. (b) 2
=3. b=4, C=4 d. a 3, b=2, c=4
Na,COg +2HCI2NaCl+CO +H0 C.a
a reaction are known Ans. (c) a =3, b = 4, c=4
Q 21. The new substances produced in
3Fe+4H,0>Fe04 +4HO
as
products
a.
[Link] -T!P- a
C. chemical equations
d. reactants should never change the formula of an element or
We

Ans. (a) products Compound to balance an equation.

0 22. In writing chemical equations,

inclusion of state symbols
29. Which information is not conveyed by a balanced chemical
shall be done while:
reactants and products are equation?
a, correct chemical formulae of a. Physical states of reactants and products
written b. Symbols and formulae of all the substances involved in a
b. the equation is being
balanced to fulfill the law of
Conservation of mass particular reaction
C. the equation has been
balanced Number of atoms/molecules of the reactants and
C.

d. the chemical formulae of products

and reactants have products formed
quick balancing d. Whethera particular reaction is actually feasible or not
been changed to bring about
Ans. (c) the equation has been
balanced Ans. (d) Whether a particular reaction is actually feasible or not
 MIND CHAPTERWISE OuESTION BANK
12 I MASTER
a 30. Which of the following are combination reactions? Q38. Which ofthe following
(NCERTEXEMPLAR)
are exothermic processes?
(NCERTEXEMPU
(i) Reaction of water
() 2KCIO,2KCI+ 30, (ii) Dilution of an acid
with quick lime
(i) Mgo+ H,0 Mg(OH)2
(ii) Evaporation of water
(ii) 4Al+30, 2Al,05 (iv) Sublimation of camphor
(crystals)
(iv) Zn + Feso ZnSO, + Fe a. () and () b. (i) and (ii)
a. (i) and (ii) b.(i)and (v) c.() and (iv) d. (ii) and (iv)
(iv)
c.(i) and d. () and (i) Ans. (a) () and (i)
Ans. (d) and (i)
Gi)
a39. Which of the following reactions involves
Q31. A substance 'X is used in white-washing and is obtained by of two elements? the combin
binatio
heating limestone in the absence of air. Identify *'. a.Ca0+CO2>CaCO b. 4Na+02 2Na,0
a. Ca0Cl2 [Link](OH)2 c.Ca0 [Link]
Ans. (6) Ca(OH)2
c.50202 S0 d. NH +HCl NH,CL

Slaked lime [Ca(OH),] is used for white washing walls. Ans. (b) 4Na+O2-2Na,0
Q32. What is the other name for quick lime? Except (b) all other reactions
involve compounds
a. Calcium hydroxide b. Calcium oxide elements. and n

c. Carbon dioxide d. Sodium oxide 40. Which of the following reaction is characterised
yellow colour of product? bythe
Ans. (b) Calcium oxide
Q 33. What is the chemical name for slaked lime? [Link](s)+ HS04 ZnS04 +H2
,Calcium carbonate b. Calcium oxide [Link]+H,50, Na50, +H0 +CO2
cCalcium hydroxide d. Carbon monoxide c.2Pb,04 6Pbo(s)+0z(g)

Q34. In a .
Ans. (c) Calcium hydroxide
reaction two or more substances combine to
form a new single substance.
d.2KCIOg

Ans. (c) 2Pb,0

2KCl+30-(g)
6Pbo(s)+02(g)
a. combination b. redox When red lead oxide (Pb0,) is heated, it gives
yellow colour
c. displacement d. decomposition of lead-oxjde (Pbo).
Ans. (a) combination 2Pb 0. 6Pbo(s)+ Og)
products are called
a. electrolysis
.
0 35. Reactions in which heat is given out along with the
reactions.
b. endothermic
Q 41.
(Yellow)
When hydrogen sulphide gas is passed through blue
a
solution of copper sulphate, a black precipitate of copper
c. displacement d. exothermic sulphide is obtained and the sulphuric acid so formed
Ans. (d) exothermic remains in the solution. The reaction is an example of:
Q 36. The decomposition

example of ..
a. exothermic
. of vegetable matter into compost is an
eaction.
b. endothermic
a. a combination reaction
b. a displacement reaction
C.a decomposition reaction
c. both (a) and (b) d. None of these. d. a double displacement reaction
Ans. (a) exothermic Ans. (d) a double displacement reaction
Q 37. Solid calcium
oxide reacts vigorously with water to form CusO+HS
(blue)
CuS
(black)
+HS0
calcium hydroxide accompanied by double displacement
liberation of heat. This
process is called slaking of lime.
Calcium hydroxide Q42. We store silver chloride in a daik coloured bottle because
dissolves in water to form its solution
called lime water. a. it is a white solid
Which among the following is (are)
true about slaking of b. it undergoes redox reaction
lime and the solution formed? (NCERTEXEMPLAR)
(i) It is an endothermic reaction to avoid action by sunlight
c.
(i) It is an exothermic reaction d.
None of the above
(ii) The pH of the resulting solution Ans. (c) to avoid action by sunlight
will be more than
seven Q43. Which among the following statement(s) istare) truer
(iv) The pH of the resulting a long durati
Exposure of silver chloride to sunlight for(NCERTEXEMPLAR
solution will be less than seven
a. () and (i) b. (i) and turns grey due to:
(i)
c.) and (iv) d: (ii) and (iv) (0 the formation of silver by decomposition of silver chlorid
Ans. (b) (i) and (il)
(ii) sublimation of silver chloride
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
(ii) decomposition of chlorine gas from silver chloride
It is an exothermic
reaction as large amount of (iv) oxidation of silver chloride
this reaction. Clacium hydroxide heat is released in
is basic in nature andtherefore a. () only b. (1) and (i
has a pH above 7. c. (i) and (ii) d. (v) only
Ans. (a) (i) only
 Science | Class 10 | Term 1 13
Which of the following is a Q 52. Electrolysis of water is called. decomposition
44. thermal decomposition
reaction? reactlon.
a.2H02H2 +02 a. thermal b. endothermic
b.2AgCl 2Ag +Cl c. photochemlcal d. electrolytic
cH9)+C,(9)> 2HCUMg) Ans. (d) electrolytic
d.ZnCOZn0 +CO2 a53. Electrolysis of water is a decomposition reaction. The mole
Ans. (d) ZnCO3
+CO ZnO ratio of hydrogen and oxygen gases liberated during
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER electrolysis of water is:
a. 1:1 b.2:1 C. 4:1 d.1:2
When a decomposition reaction is carried out by heating,it is called
thermal decomposition. Ans. (b) 2:1
Q 54. Pb+CuCl > PbCl, +Cu
a45. In an electrolytic cell where electrolysis is carried, anode has: This reaction is an example of
a. positive charge a, combination b. displacement

[Link] charge C. decomposition d. double displacement

c. connected to negative terminal of the battery Ans. (b) displacement
d. None of the above Q 55. What happens when copper rod is dipped in iron sulphate
Ans.(a) positive charge solution?
Q 46. In the decomposition of lead (11) nitrate to give lead () a. Copper displaces iron
oxide, nitrogen dioxide and oxygen gas, the coefficient of colour of copper sulphate solution is obtained
b. Blue
nitrogen dioxide (in the balanced equation) is: c reaction takes place
No
a. 1 b. 2 C.3 d.4 d. Reaction is exothermic
Ans. (d) 4 Ans. (C) No reaction takes place
2Pb(NO3)(5)2Pbo(s)+ 4NO,(g) + Og) Cu will not displace iron from iron sulphate because iron is
more reactive than copper.
Q47. .. reaction occurs in the digestion offood in our body.
Q56. The following reaction is used for the preparation of
[Link] b. Displacement
c. Decomposition d. Double displacement
oxygen gas in the laboratory:
Ans. (c) Decomposition 2KCIO,() 2KCl(S)+30,g)
Catalyst
48. The chemical formula of lead nitrate is:
Which of the following statement(s) is(are) correct about
a. Pb NO3
[Link](NO)2
b.
Pb(NO)
[Link](NOg)2 the reaction? (NCERT EXEMPLAR)

Ans. () Pb{NO3)2 a. It is a decomposition reaction and endothermic in nature

b. It is a combination reaction
49. A powdered salt () in a dry test tube was heated that c. It is a decomposition reaction and accompanied by release
evolves brown fumes of nitrogen dioxide and a yellow
of heat
residue of lead oxide is also formed. The salt (0) is: d. It is a photochemical decomposition reaction and
a. MgsOg b. Pb(NO)2
exothermic in nature
c.(NH)S04 [Link]
Ans. (a) It is a decomposition reaction and endothermic in
Ans. (b) Pb{NO3)2
nature
The salt (X) is Pb{NO,) When it is heated, it evolves brown
furmes of nitrogen dioxide and a yellow residue of lead oxide Q57. When an element displaces another element from its
is also formed compound,
a. combination
a.
reaction occurs.
b. redox
2Pb(NO) 2Pb0(s)+ 4NO(g)+0(g)
Lead nitrate Lead oxide Nitrogen Oxygen [Link] d. decomposition,
dioxide
Ans. (c) displacement
a 50. When calcium carbonate is heated, it decomposes to give
nd.....
a. Ca0(s). C0,g) [Link]). H_0t)
Common Eror-
Students get confused between the definition of displacement
[Link](OH)2s), CO,lg) d. H0(g).co-(g)
and double displacement reactions.
Ans. (a) Ca0(s). COg)
CaCO(s cao(s)+cog) 58. A student added dilute HCl to a test tube containing zinc
granules and made following observations:
51. When crystals of lead nitrate are heated strongly in a dry
a. the zinc surface became dull and black
test tube
b. a gas is evolved which burns with a pop sound
crystals melt immediately
à.
c. the solution remained colourless
brown fumes appears
b.
C. white fumes appear in the tube
d. the solution becomes green in colour

d. a yellow residue is left Ans. (b) a gas is evolved which burns with a pop sound
Ans. (b) brown fumes appears Zn+2HClZnCl+H2
Emission of brown fumes of NO2 are observed Hydrogen gas burns with a pop sound.
 QuESTION BANK
MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE
14 I an iron nail in CusO
solution for few Q 64. Black and white photography uses:
a. decomposition of silver chloride
a 59. On immersing
minutes, you will observe: b. decomposition of silver bromide
place both a. and b.
c.
a. no reaction takes
fades away
b. the colour of solution
d. None of the above
coating
nails acquirea black Ans. (b) decomposition of silver bromide
c. the surface of iron
changes to green
d. the colour of solution a 65. Zn+ H,SO, (dil) Zns0, + H,t
solution changes to green
Ans. (d) the colour of Above reaction is:
Fe+CusO FeS0 +Cu a. decomposition reaction
(elue) (green)
formation of b, displacement reaction
The above disptacement
reaction leads to the
[Link] reaction
green Fe504 d. synthesis reaction
A, B and C each containing
Q 60. Three beakers labelled as Ans. (b) displacement reaction
A small amount of NaOH,
25 mL of water were taken.
anhydrous Cuso and NaCl were added to
the beakers A, B Q 66. Reactions in which energy is absorbed are known
as
and C respectively. It was observed
that there was an reactions.
contained in a. endothermic
increase in the temperature of the solutions
b. exothermic
beaker C, the c. displacement d. combination
beakers A and B, whereas in case of
of the
temperature of the solution falls. Which one Ans. (a) endothermic
following statement(s) is(are) correct? Q 67. Which among the following is/are double displacemem
process has occurred.
() In beakers A and B, exothermic reaction(s)? (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
process has occurred. +Cu
(i) In beakers A and B, endothermic i) Pb+ CuCl, -> PbCl,
(ii) In beaker C exothermic process has occurred. (i) Na,SO4 +BaCl > BasO, +2NaCl
(iv) In beaker Cendothermic process has occurred. (ii) C+0+ CO,
(NCERTEXEMPLAR)
(iv) CH 20, CO +2H,0
a. (0)
only b. (i) only a.(i) and (iv) b. (i) only
d. (i) and (ii) () and (i) d. (i) and (iv)
c) and (iv) C.

Ans. () () and (iv) Ans. (b) () only

KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER Q 68. Barium chloride on reacting with ammonium sulphate
forms barium sulphate and ammonium chloride. Which of
When heat is released (exothermic process) surrounding gets
the following correctly represents the type of the reaction
warm, ie., temperature rises. When heat is absorbed (endothermic
involved? (NCERTEXEMPLAR)
process) surrounding gets cold, ie., temperature falls.
() Displacement reaction
Q61. Which of the following is(are) an endothermic (i) Precipitation reaction
processfes)? (ii) Combination reaction
(iv) Double displacement reaction
( Dilution of sulphuric acid
á. () only b. (i) only
(i) Sublimation of dry ice
c. (iv)
only d. (i) and (iv)
(ii) Condensation of water vapours
(iv) Evaporation of water (NCERTEXEMPLAR) Ans. (d) (i) and (iv)
a. and ()
(0) b. (i) only 3BaCl(ag)+Al,(S0 )a(aq)2ACl(ag) +38a50.(s)
c ii) only d. (i) and (v) This is a double displacement reaction as ions of reactants
Ans. (d) () and (iv) are exchanged to form two new compounds. The reaction l5
also known as precipitation reaction as precipitate of barium
-T!P-
Fusion,
sulphate is being formed.
is
evaporation and sublimation are endothermic Q 69. What is observed when a solution of potassium iodide
processes whereas freezing, condensation and dilution of acid added to lead nitrate solution?
are exothermic processes. a. No reaction takes place
[Link] precipitate of lead iodide is formed
a 62. Fe,0, +2Al > AL,0, +2Fe C. yellow precipitate of Pbl2 is formed

The above reaction is an example of a: d. Pbl is soluble in water

a. combination reaction Ans. (c) yellow precipitate of Pbl2 is formed
b. double displacement 2KI(ag) + Pb(NO )lag)2KNO,fag)+ Pbl)
reaction yellow ppt.
C. decomposition
reaction a70. Precipitation reactions [Link].
d. displacement reaction
a. neutral b. basic C. soluble d. insoluble
Ans. (d) displacement reaction
Ans. (d) insoluble
a 63. White silver chloride in sunlight aqueo
turns to: 71. In the double displacement reaction between
a. grey yellow
C. remain white
b. yellow
. potassium iodide and aqueous lead nitrate, a
d red precipitate of lead iodide is formed. While performing t
Ans. (a) grey of the followin9
activity if lead nitrate is not available, which(NCERTEXEMPLAR
White silver chloride in sunlight
turns to greyi can be used in place of lead nitrate?
 Scionce Class 10| Term1| 15
a. Lead sulphate (insoluble)
a77. A substance which oxldises itself and reduces other is
[Link] acetate
known as:
[Link] nitrate [Link] ogent b. reducing ogent
d. Potassium sulphate
[Link] of these d. lone of these
Ans.
(b) Lead acetate
Ans. (b) reducing ogent
Lead sulphate being insoluble below are
ions which can combine with
in water does not give Pb*" a70. Which of the statements about the reaction
(NCERTEXERCISE)
to form Pbl. Ammonlum Incorrect?
nitrate and potasslum sulphate
therefore lead iodide o nnot be
do not possess lead lon.
formed using them. On tihe o) C(o)2Pbts)+ Co, o)
other hand, lead acetate dissoclates In () Lead Is gettlng reduced.
Pb2 ions and CH,CO0" ions to aqucous state to glive
formprecipitate of lead lodide (I) Carbon dloxlde is getting oxidised.
as follows: (U) Carbon Is getting oxidised.
2Kil(ag)+Pb{CHCOO),(aq)~ (lv) Lead oxide is gettlng reduced.
Pbl(s) +2CHCOOK
(yellow ppt) a. () and (i1) b. () and (ii)
Q72. The reaction between lead nitrate and potasslum lodide d. All of these
c.0). () and ()
present in aqueous solutions is an
example of Ans. (a) () and ()
a. decomposition reaction
b. displacement reaction
c. double displacement reaction -T!P-
Practice a number of questions based on identifying oxidising
neutralisation reaction
d. and reducing agents.
Ans. (c) double displacement reaction
Q79. Match the chemical equations given in column with their
I
Q73. When dilute sulphuric acid is added to pieces of iron
sulphide, hydrogen sulphide gas is produced and soluble appropriate type given in column I.
ferrous sulphate is formed. The type of chemical reaction Column Column
involved is:
a. decomposition reaction
(A)
C02CO2 (p) Displacement
b. combination reaction Combination
(B) AgBr Ag+Br (q)
c displacement reaction
d. double displacement reaction (C) Zn+CuSO ZnS0, +Cu Decomposition
Ans.() double displacement reaction (0) CH,CH,OHCHCHO+H, (s) Oxidation
The réactions in which two ionic compounds in the solution
react by exchange of their ions to form new compounds are a. A-(q). B-(s). c-(p). D-(¢) b.A-(¢). B-{g). C-(s). D-(p)
called double displacement reactions. cA-C). B-p). C-(s). D-(g) d. A-(q). B-{). c-(p). D-(s)
Fes(s)+ dil HS0,(aq) -FeS04(ag) + HSg) Ans. (d) A-(g), B-(¢), C-(p)., D-(S)
Iron
sulphate
Sulphuric
acid
Ferrous sulphate Hydrogen
sulphide Q [Link] is the
.. of oxygen or gain of hydrogen.
a74. The reaction in which two compounds exchange their ions a. addition b. loss
to form two new compounds is: C. gain d. both b. and c
a.a displacement reaction Ans. (b) loss
b.a decomposition reaction 081. A dilute ferrous sulphate solution was gradially added to
C an oxidation reaction
the beaker containing acidified permanganate solution.
d. a double displacement reaction The light purple colour of the solution fades and finally
Ans. (d) a double displacement reaction disappears. Which of the following is the correct
(NCERTEXEMPLAR)
a75. The reaction of sodium sulphate and barium .. chloride explanation for the observation?
results in the formation of white precipitate of a. KMnO, is an oxidising agent, it oxidises FesO
a. barium sulphate b. sodium sulphate b.Fe50, acts as an oxidising agent and oxidises KMnOs
.5odium chloride d. barium chloride c. The colour disappears due to dilution, no reaction is
Ans. (a) barium sulphate involved
Na50, (ag) +BaCl,lag)-> Bas0, (s)+2NaCl{aq) d. KMnOis an unstable compound and decomposes in
white ppt presence of Fes0, to a colourless compound
a76. Identify the substance that is oxidised and the substance Ans. (a) KMn0, is an oxidising agent, it oxidises Fe50
that is reduced in the following reaction: a 82. The following reaction is an example of a:
CuO(s)+H(g)Cu(s) +H,0() 4NH,G)+50,g)>4NO@)+ 6H,0(g)
a. CuO, H2 .H, CuO () displacement reaction (NCERTEXEMPLAR)

[Link] [Link].H0
(i) combination reaction
Ans. (6) [Link]
Reduction (i) redox reaction
Loss of Oxygen (iv) neutralisation reaction

Cuols)+ H2lg)- Cu(s)+H,0() a. () and (iv) b.(i) and (ii)

Oxidation c.() and (i) d (i) and (iv)
Addition of Oxygen Ans. () () and (ii)
 QuESTION BANK
MASTER MIND CHAPTERWISE
16 a 90. A reddish-brown coloured
ammonla, hence It ls a metal used in electrie
Oxygen displaces hydrogen of when powdered and heated strongly in an open cu
displacenment reaction. dish, its colour turns black. When hydrogen gas is nana
Reductlon over this black substance, it regain its original Col
4NH3 +502 4NO+6H0 Based on this information, the metal and black col,
loured
substances are:
Oxidation a. copper and copper nitrate

a 83. Which of the following statements about

the glven b, sllver and slver oxide

reaction are correct? [Link] and copper oxide

3Fes)+ 4H,00)>Fe,0, (6)+4H, o)

d. aluminium and aluminlum oxide

metal is getting oxidised

(i) Iron Ans. (c) copper and copper oxlde
The reddish-brown metal is copper that changes into a blart
(i) Water is getting reduced
substance, which is found to be copper oxide. The reactin
(ii) Water is acting as reducing agent (NCERTEXEMPLAR)
(iv) Water is acting as Oxidising agent taking place is:
a. (). i) and (ii) b.(ii) and (v) 2Cu(s)+0(g) 2Cuo(s)
d. (i) and (iv) Copper Oxygen Copper ()
(i) (iv)
c0. and (Redlsh-brown) (from air) oxide (black)

Ans. () 6). (i) and (iv) a [Link] copper powder is heated it gets coated with:
of:
Q84. Combination of phosphorus and oxygen is an example a. black copper oxide b. yellow copper oxide
a. oxidation b. reduction d. None of these
C. red copper oxide
C. rancidity d. None of these
Ans. (a) black copper oxide
Ans. (a) oxidation
2P-03 2Cu+02 2Cu0
4P+302
(Oxidation)
a Black
Q 92. An element X on exposure to moist air tums
4P+502 2P05 The
(Oxidation) reddish-brown and a new compound Y is formed.
substance X and Y are:
Q 85. When copper turnings are added to silver nitrate solution, b.X = Ag. Y = AgS
a blue coloured solution is formed after some time. It is
a.X=Fe. Y=Fe0a
=
because, copper: C.X=Cu, Y CuO d.X AL Y = Al03
a. oxidises silver from the solution Ans. (a) X =Fe. Y=Fe0Oa
b. forms a blue coloured complex with AgNO3 2Fe+H0+02
(X)
Fe03tH2
.is oxidised to Cu
d. is reduced to Cu2 a 93. Chemically rust is:
Ans. (c) is oxidised to Cu2 a. hydrated ferrous oxide b. only ferric oxide
Cu + 2AgNog Cu(NOg)2 +2Ag hydrated ferric oxide d. None of these
c.
Ans. () hydrated ferric oxide
Oxidation a 94. Silver article turns black when kept in the open for a few
Q 86. The addition of oxygen to a substance is called. days due to formation of:
a. reduction b. precipitation a. HS b. Ags
C combination d. oxidation c. AgSO4 d. AgS
Ans. (d) oxidation Ans. (d) AgS
Q 87. A redox reaction is one in which: a95. Match the compounds given in column
I
with ther
a. both the substance are reduced appropriate explanation given in column l
b. both the substance are oxidised
Column ll
[Link] acid is neutralised by the base Column
d. one substance is oxidised while the other is reduced (A) Ag5 (Silver sulphide) (P) Green coating
Ans. (d) one substance is oxidised while the other is reduced on copper.
a 88. When the gases sulphur dioxide and hydrogen sulphide
mix in the presence of water, the reaction is
(6) Fe0g x H0 (Hydrated (g) Black coating
ferric oxide) on silver.
S0, +2H,S 2H,0+3S Here, hydrogen sulphide is Reddish-brown
acting as: (C) BHT (Butylated hydroxy
a. an oxidising agent b. a reducing agent toluene) Coating on iron.
Ca dehydrating agent d.a catalyst Synthetic
(D) Cuco3 Cu(OH) (Basic ()
Ans. (b) a reducing agent copper carbonate) antioxidant.
Here. HS is oxidising into H,0, hence acting as a reducing
agent. a. A-(q). B-(s). C-(p). D-()
Q 89. CuO+H, >H,0+Cu, reaction is an example of: b. A-), B-(q). C-(s). D-(p)
a. redox reaction b. synthesis reaction c.A-(q). B-(r). c-(s), D-(p)
c. neutralisation d. analysis reaction d. A-(q). B-(r).C-(p). D-(s)
Ans. (a) redox reaction
Ans. (c) A-(q). B-(). C-(s). D-(p)
 Term 1| 17
Scionce Class 10
|

Q 103. Assertlon (A): Qulcklime reacts vigorously with water

a 96. Which of the following gases can be used for storage of
fresh sample of an oll for a long time? (NCERTEXEMPLAR) releaslng a large amount of heat.
[Link] dioxide or oxygen Reason (R): The above chemical reaction is an exothermic
b. Nitrogen or oxygen rcaction.
[Link] dioxide or helum Ans. (a)
d. Helium or nitrogen exothermic reactions. heat is released along with the
In

Ans. (d) Helium or nitrogen formation of products.

a
a 97. Fatty foods become rancid due to the process of: a 104. Assertion (A): Exposure of silver chloride to sunlight for
formation of silver by
a. oxidation b. corroslon long duratlon turns grey due to the
C. reduction d. hydrogenatlon
decomposition of sllver chloride.
chloride
Ans. (a) oxidation Reason (R): In this process, sublimation of silver
takes place.
Assertion and Reason Type Questions Ans. (c)
a 105. Assertion (A): Chemical reaction changes the physical and
chemical state of a substance.
Directions ([Link]. 98 to 131): In the following questions, a Reason (R): When electric current is passed through
water
statement of Assertion (A) is followed by a statement of Reason (R) (liquid), it decomposes to produce hydrogen and oxygen
Mark the correct choice as: gases.
a. Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true and Reason (R)
Ans. (b)
is the correct explanation of Asserion (A)
Q 106. Assertion. (A): When calcium carbonate is heated, it
b. Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true but Reason (R)
decomposes to give calcium oxide and carbon dioxide.
is not the correct explanation of Assertion (A)
c. Assertion (A) is true but Reason (R) is false Reason (R): The decomposition reaction takes place on
d. Assertion (A) is false but Reason (R) is true
application of heat, therefore, it is, an endothermic
reaction.
Q98. Assertion (A): The balancing of chemical equations is Ans. (b)
based on the law of conservation of mass.
Q107. Assertion (A):AgBr is used on photographic and X-ray
film.
Reason (R): Total mass of reactants is equal to total mass Reason (R): AgBr is photosensitive and changes to Ag and
of products. bromine in presence of sunlight and undergoes
Ans. (a) decomposition reaction.
a99. Assertion (A): In a balanced chemical equation, total mass Ans. (a)
ofthe reactants is equal to the total mass of the products. 108. Assertion (A): Brown fumes are produced when lead
Reason (R); Mass can neither be created nor destroyed nitrate is heated.
during a chemical change:" Reason (R): Nitrogen dioxide gas is produced as a by
product due to the decomposition of lead nitrate.
Ans. (a)
Ans. (a)
a 100. Assertion (A): The following chemical equation,
Q 109. Assertion (A):White silver chloride turns grey in sunlight.
2c,H,04c0, 3H,0 Reason (R): Decomposition of silver chloride in presence
of sunlight takes place to form silver metal and chlorine
is a balanced chemical equation. gas.
Reason (R): In a balanced chemical equation, the total;
on both sides
Ans. (a)i 1
number of atoms of each element are equal Q110. Assertion (A): When an iron rod is dipped into a solution of
of the equation. copper sulphate, copper is displaced.
Ans. (d) Reason (R): Iron is more reactive than copper.
The correct balanced chemical equation
is, T Ans. (a)
+6H,0
2C+7024C0 a 111. Assertion (A): Lead nitrate on thermal decomposition
Q 101. Assertion (A): Respiration is an exothermic reaction. gives lead oxide, brown coloured nitrogen dioxide and
glucose oxygen gas.
Reason (R): Respiration results in oxidation of Reason (R): Lead nitrate reacts with potassium iodide to
that produces heat energy. form yellow ppt. of lead iodide and the reaction is double
Ans. (a) displacement as well as precipitation reaction.
on burning in
Q 102. Assertion (A): Magnesium ribbon keeps Ans. (b)
atmosphere of nitrogen. a 112. Assertion (A): Zinc reacts with sulphuric acid to form zinc
Reason (R): Magnesium reacts with nitrogen
to form sulphate and hydrogen gas and is a displacement
combination
magnesium nitride and this reaction
is reaction.
reaction. Reason (R): Zinc reacts with oxygen to form zinc oxide.
Ans. (a) Ans. (b). a
3Mg(s)+N,lg) MgNs) Zn+HSO Zn504+H2
The reaction is exothermic so
it continues to burn. 2Zn+022Zn0
 18 1 MASTER MIND CHAPTERWISE QUESTION DANK

+ 2Fe Q 121. Assertion (A): A reducing agent is a substance

Q 113. Assertion (A): Fe,0, + 2AlAl,O, nce which
whie
The above chemical equation is an example of either accept electron. tan
displacement reaction. Reason (R):A substance which helps in oxidation is
as reducing agent. known
Reason (R): Aluminium being more reactive than iron,
displaces iron from its oxide. Ans. (d)
Ans. (a)
Fe03 +2Al Al,O3 +2Fe is a displacement reaction. CT!P-
A
reducing agent is an
Here, a highly reactive element (Al) displaces Fe from Fe0 element or compound that loses or
donates electrons in a redox reaction.
Q 114. Assertion (A): Photosynthesis is considered as an
endothermic reaction.
Q122. Assertion (A): In a reaction of copper with oxygen,
Reason (R): Energy gets released in the process of serves as a reducing agent.
copperf
ton
photosynthesis.
Ans (c) Reason (R): The substance which gains oxygen in
Photosynthesis is considered an endothermic reaction chemical reaction is a reducing agents.
because energy in the form of sunlight is absorbed by the Ans. (a)
green plants. 0 123. Assertion (A): In the following chemical equation,
Q 115. Assertion (A): In the reaction, CuO(s)+Zn (s)Zno()+ Cu(s)
Zn(s)+2H*(aq) > Zn2* (aq) + H, g) zinc acts as an Zinc is getting oxidised and copper oxide is gettin
oxidising agent and H" acts as a reducing agent. reduced. 9
Reason (R): An oxidising agent accepts electrons while a
Reason (R): The process in which oxygen is added to
reducing agent loses electrons.
Ans. (d)
substance is called oxidation whereas the process in which
oxygen is removed from a substance is called reduction
Q116. Assertion (A):2H,Stg) +0, o)25()+ 2H,O0)isa redox Ans. (a)
reaction.
Reason (R): In redox reaction, oxidation and reduction
124. Assertion (A): Rusting can be prevented by applying a
take place simultaneously. layer of oil and grease.
Ans. (a) Reason (R): The whole of iron deteriorates due to rust.
Q117. Assertion (A): The reaction during which hydrogen is lostis Ans. (b)
Q
[Link] reaction. 125. Assertion (A): Corrosion of iron is commonly known
Reason (R): Reducing agent removes hydrogen from rusting.
another substance. Reason (R): Corrosion of iron occurs in presence of moist
Ans. () air.
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER Ans. (b)
The substance which gives hydrogen for reduction is called a a 126. Assertion (A): Following reaction describes the rusting o
reducing agent. iron and is a redox reaction.
4Fe+30, 4Fe +60
0 118. Assertion (A): Mn0 + 4HCl MnCl +Cl + 2H,0, is Reason (R): The metallic iron is oxidised to Fe
a redox reaction.
Ans. (a)
Reason (R): MnO, oxidises HCl to Cl and gets reduced to
MnCl2 a 127. Assertion (A): lIron particles are painted so as to prevent

Ans. (a) them from rusting.

0119. Assertion (A): Magnesium wire burns in presence of O. Reason (R): When the surface of iron is coated with paint
Reason (R): Magnesium acts as a reducing agent. its surface does not come in contact with oxygen and
Ans. (b) moisture therefore rusting does not take place.
Ans. (a)
CT!P- Oxidation
Q 128. Assertion (A): Rusting of iron metal is the most commot
form of corrosion.
2Mg+O22Mg0 Reason (R): The effect of rusting of iron can be reversedf
The substance which gets oxidised acts as the reducing agent.
they are left open in sunlight.
a 120. Assertion (A): In the reaction, Ans. (
Zn(s)+Cus0,(aq)ZnS0, (aq)+ Culs) Q 129. Assertion (A): Chips manufacturers usually flush bags
Zn is a reductant but itself get oxidised. chips with gas such as nitrogen to prevent the chipstro
Reason (R): In a redox reaction, oxidant is reduced by getting oxidised.
and hep
accepting electrons and reductant is oxidised by losing Reason (R): This increases the taste of the chips
electrons. in their digestion.
Ans. (a) Ans. ()
 0 130 Assertion (A): Food
materials are often packed in air tight
t teScience Class 10| Term
11 19
Q 131. Assertion (A): The food items containing oil and fat are
container.
flushed with nitrogen.
Reason (R): Oxidation, resulting Reason (R): Oil and fat become rancid on oxidation which
in rancidity, is prevented.
Ans. (a) has the bad taste and smell.
Ans. (a)

Case Based QUESTIONS

Case Study 1
Q5. In which of the following reactions, high amount of heat
In a chemical reaction, reactants energy will be evolved?
products. The conversion of reactantsare converted into a. Electrolysls of water
chemical reaction is often accompaniedinto products in a
by some features Dissolution of NH,Cl in water
b.
which can be observed easily.
These easily observed Burning of L.P.G
c.
features which take place as a result of chemical reaction d. Decomposition of AgBr in the presence of light
are known as characteristics of chemical reactions.
Some Ans. (c) Burning of L.P.G.
important characteristics of chemical reactions are: On burning of LP.G. large amount of heat is evolved.
4) Evolution of heat (ii) Formation of precipitate
(iii) Change in colour (iv) Change in temperature Case Study 2
(v) Change in state
Chemical equation is a method of representing a
Any one of these general characteristics can tell us chemical reaction with the help of symbols and formulae
whether a chemical reaction has taken place or not. of the substances involved in it. In a chemical equation,
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of the substances which combine or react are called
the following questions: reactants and new substances produced are called products.
01. Reaction of magnesium with air is/an: A chemical equation is a short hand method of
a. exothermic reaction representing a chemical reaction. A balanced chemical
b. endothermic reaction equation has equal number of atoms of different elements
C. reversible reaction in the reactants and products side. An unbalanced
d. substitution reaction chemical equation has unequal number of atoms of one or
Ans. (a) exothermic reaction
more elements in reactants and products. Formulae of
elements and compounds are not changed to balance an
02. In the following reaction,. equation.
Ca2 (ag)+20H (aq)Ca(OH),() Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
precipitate of calcium hydroxide will be of: the following questions:
a. green colour b. blue colour a1. Consider the following reaction:
C. brown colour d. white colour pMgN +qH,0rMg(OH)2 + 5NH
Ans. (d) White colour When the equation is balanced, the coefficients p, 4, r, s
Calcium hydroxide is a white colour solid respectively are:
a. 1,3,3,2 b.1,6,3,2 c12.3,2 d. 2,3,6,2
Q3. In the given reaction,
Ans. (b) 1.6, 3,2
Sts)+O,0) SO MgN2 +6H0 3Mg(0H), +2NH
the physical state of so, is: Q2. Which of the following information is not conveyed by a.
a. liquid b. solid
balanced chemical equation?
d. All of these
[Link] a. Physical states of reactants and products
Ans. (c) gaseous b. Symbols and formulae of all the substances involved in a
SO is gaseous in nature. particular reaction
involye chemical
Q4. Which one of the following processes c. Number of atoms/molecules of the reactants and

reactions? products formed

in a gas cylinder
a. Storing of oxygen gas under pressure [Link] a particular reaction is actually feasible or not
in the open Ans. (d) Whether a particular reaction is actually feasible or not
b. Keeping petrol in a china dish
c. Liquefaction of air 03. The balancing of chemical equations is in accordance with:
d. Heating copper ire in the presence of air at high a. law of combining volumes
b. law of constant proportions
temperature
Ans. (d) Heating copper wire in the
presence of air at high C. law of conservation of mass

temperature d. both b. and c.

When copper is heated in the
presence of air at a very high Ans. ( law of conservation of mass
temperature, a chemical reaction takes place. Copper reacts In a balanced chemical equation. total mass of reactants
to form a thin layer of copper oxide on must be equal to the total mass of products. This is the
with oxygen of the air
copper, statement of law of conservation of mass.
the surface of metallic
 MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE
OuesTION BANK
20I a 3. Which of the following laws is satisfied by a
chemical cquations ls an chemlcal cquation?
balan
lanted
Q4. Which of the following
unbalanced one? a. Law of multiple proportions
a. 2NaHCO3 Na cO H,0+C0 b. Law of conservation of mass
b.2CHo+120, BCO +10H,0 [Link] of conservation of motion
c.2Al+6H0 2Al(OH)3 3H d. Law of conservation of magnetism
d. 4NH+502 4NO+6H,0 Ans. (b) Law of conservatlon of mass
Ans. (b) 20,Hho +120 BCO +10H0
Q4. In the glven chemical reaction,
Q5. Which of the following statements is/are correct?
a. A chemical equation tells us about the substances
2c,H,0)+ 150, 0)mco, g) + nH,o)
involved in a reaction The values of m and n are respectively:
b. A chemical equation informs us about the symbols
and and 8
a. 14 b. 12 and 6
12 and 10
formulae of the substances involved in a reaction d.
100
c. 8 and

C. A chemical equation tells us about the

atoms or Ans. (b) 12 and 6
involved in a
molecules of the reactants and products 2CH00+150,(g) 12CO,(g)+6H00
reaction Q5. Sulphur dioxide reacts with oxygen to form sulphur
d. All of the above trioxide. What would be the molar ratio of sulphur dioxide
Ans. (d) All of the above to sulphur trioxide?
a. 2:3 b. 1:1
Case Study3
In a balanced chemical reaction, equal number of atoms .1:2 d.3:2
Ans. (b) 1:1.
are present on both sides of reaction. A balanced chemical
reaction is based on law of conservation of mass which 2502g)+0g)+2s0,g)
means that total mass of reactants and products :Case Study 4
participating in a reaction must be equal. For example, a
balanced chemical equations of burning of magnesium in
Marble's popularity began in ancient Rome and Greece,
where white and off-white marble were used to construct a
oxygen to form magnesium oxide is written as:
variety of structures, from hand-held sculptures to
2Mg+O 2MgO
massive pillars and buildings.
The mass of reactants (2x 24 +32 80) is equal to the
=
mass of products [2 x (24 +16) 80].
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
the following questions
01. In a reaction, 35 g of reactant,PQ breaks down into 20 g of
product, P and an unknown amount of product, Q. Using
the law of conservation of mass, weight of products, Q will
be:
a. 25 g b. 35 g
.30g d. 15 8
Ans. () 1558
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
PQ P+Q the following questions:
35g 20g?
According to law of conservation [Link], 01. The substance not likely to contain CaCOs is:
Mass of PO= Mass of P +Mass of Q [Link]
Mass of Q=(35-20) 8=15g b. amarble statue
Q2. When solid mercury (11) oxide is heated, liquid mercury and
[Link] gVpsum
d. sea shells
oxygen gas are produced. Which of the following
Ans. (c) calcined gypsum
statementsis true regarding the balanced chemical
equation for this process? KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
a. 1 mole of mercury () oxide produces two moles of Generalformula ofdolomite is MgCO3 CaCO. Sea shells are made
mercury and one mole of oxygen gas up of calcium carbonate. Chemical formula of marble is CaCOz
b. 2 moles of mercury () oxide [Link] mole of Calcinedgypsum is CaSO4.2H,0.
mercury and one mole of oxygen gas
c.1mole of mercury () oxide produces half mole of mercury
and half mole of oxygen gas 02. A student added 10g of calcium carbonate in a rigid
d. 2 moles of mercury (1) oxide produces 2 moles of container, secured it tightly and started to heat it. After
mercury and one mole of oxygen gas some time, an increase in pressure was observed, the
Ans. (d) 2 moles of mercury () oxide produces 2 molesof pressure reading was then noted at intervals of 5 mins and
mercury and one mole of oxygen gas plotted against time, in a graph as shown below. During
which time interval did maximum decomposition took
2Hgols)2H8()+02) place?
 Science Class10 Term 1 21

Case Study 5
coloured
Rahul is a skilled painter. He mixed a white
The compound X
powder, compound X with water.
a compound Y
07S reacted vigorously with water to produce
Rahul used the
and a large amount of heat. Then,
compound Y for white washing the walls.
Customer was
Rahul as walls were not
not satisfied with the work of
would
025 shining. But Rahul guaranteed him that the walls
whitewash, the
shine after 2-3 days. And after 3 days of
walls became shiny.
0
a 15-20 min b.10-15 min
c5-10 min d 0-5 min
Ans (d) 05 min
Q3 Gas, obtained on heating calcium carbonate is a reactant
for a very important biochemical process which occurs in
the presence of sunlight. ldentify the name of the process:
a respiration
b. photosynthesis Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
the following questions:
c transpiration
Q1. Name the compound X, that Rahul mixed with water.
d photolysis
a. caldum
Ans. b) photosynthesis
b. calcium oxide
cO-g) is obtained on heating CaCO ccalcium carbonate
Q4. Marble statues are comoded or stained when they
d calcium hydroxide
repeatedly come into contact with polluted rain water. Ans. (b) calcium oxide
ldentify the main reason. Q2. Name the compound Y that Rahul got after mixing with
X

water.
a. calcium
1908 1969 b. calcium oxide
[Link] carbonate
d. calcium hydroxide
Ans. (d) Calcium hydroxide
Ca0+H0CalOH)+ Heat
03. What type of reàction has occured here?
a. Decomposition reaction
b. Displacement reaction
CDouble displacement reaction
a. Decomposition of calcium carbonate to calcium
oxide d. Combination reaction
in nature hence it reacts with
b. Polluted water is basic Ans. (d) Combination reaction
calcium carbonate Q4. Which of the following reactions is responsible for shiniy
in nature hence it reacts with
C Polluted water is acidic finish of the walls?
calcium carbonate a.Ca0 H0Ca(0H)2
give calcium
[Link] carbonate dissolves in water to [Link] CO2CaCOg
hydroxide cCa(OH)+cO CaC0+HO
hence it reacts with
Ans. (c) polluted water is acidic in nature
[Link]+HO»Ca(0H), +C02
caldum carbonate CaCO
calcium, by heating with Ans. (c) Ca(OH), +CO2 -
+H
Q5. Calcium oxide can be reduced to
would act as an oxidising Q5. Which of the following compound is responsible for shiny
sodium metal Which compound
finish of the walls?
agent in the above process? [Link] [Link](OH)2
b. Sodium oxide b. Ca0 [Link]
a. Sodium
[Link] oxide Ans. (a) Caco
c Calcium
Ans. (d) Calcium oxide Case Study 6
ion
2Ca0 2Ca +02
A reaction in which two or more reactants combine to
form a single product is called a combination reaction. For
oxygen. Thus. Ca0 is the example, calcium oxide reacts vigorously with water to
In this reaction. Ca0 is giving form calcium hydroxide. The reaction is highly
oxidising agent.
 QUESTION aANK
22 MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE
during the Ans. (b) Calcium hydroxide Calcium carbonate
exothermic in nature, as lots of heat is produced Ca0(s) + HO() Ca(DH)20q)
reaction. Calclum oxlde Water Calcium hydroxide
(Quick Ume) Slaked lirme)
CaO(s) +H2 O0) Ca(OH)2 (ag)+ Heat (A)
Calcium oxide Water Calcium hydroxide
walls. ca(OH),(ag)+ CO,(g) CaCo,(s) + H,0().
Solution of Ca(OH), is used for whitewashing the (A)
reacts slowly with carbon dioxide in
Calcium hydroxide Q5. Among the following, the endothermic reaction is:
aar to form a thin layer of calcium carbonatc on the wall
a. comblnation of carbon and oxygen to form carbon rbon
which gives a shiny appearance to wall.
Calcium monoxide
carbonate will form after two or three days of white wash. b. combination of nitrogen and oxygen to form nitrogen en
Read the above passage carefiully and give the answer of
: monoxide
the following questions: c. combination' of glucose and oxygen to form carbon
dioxide and water
a1. What is the chemical name of quick lime?
b. Calcium carbonate d. combination of zinc and hydrochloric acid to form zine
a. Calciunm oxide
Carbon dioxide chloride and hydrogen
[Link] hydroxide d.
Ans. (b) combination of nitrogen and oxygen to form nitrogen
Ans. (a) Calcium oxide
Calcium oxide (Ca0) is quick lime.
Emonoxide
() is a combustion reaction, so it is exothermic
Q2. When carbon dioxide is passed through lime water: (i) heat is required for this process, so it is endothermic
a. calcium hydroxide is formed ii) is respiration, it is exothermic
b. white precipitate of Ca0 is formed
iv) heat is released
lime water turns milky
d. colour of lime water becomes green Case Study 7.
Ans. (c)ime water turns milky Chemical reaction, a process in which one or more
Ca(0H),(ag)+ COlg) CaCO(s)
(Milky appearance)
+H0 substances, the reactants, are converted to one or more
(Lime water)
different substances, the products. Substances are either
Q3. Following observations are observed when calcium oxide chemical elements or compounds. A chemical reaction
reacts vigorously with water r 3 rearranges the constituent atoms of the reactants to create
-Beaker different substances as products. Study this table related
to the different types of reactions/processes and answer
the questions that follow:
Water S.
Word equation
Name of Process
-Calcium oxide No.
Magnesium +Oxygen
Identify the incorrect observations. i. Combustion
Magnesium Oxide
() It is an endothermic reaction.. Carbon dioxide + Water
(I1) Slaked lime is produced.
(11) Quick lime is produced. il. Photosynthesis chloraphyllaucose+Oxygen
(IV) It is an exothermic reaction.
---
+Water
--
)It is a combination reaction. eat
a. () and (I) b. (U) and (iV)
li. Combination
Iron +Sulphur Iron
c. (1)
and (1) d. (10. (V) and (V) sulphide
-**
Ans. () 0) and (1)
iv. Photodecomposition
Silver bromide Silver
Common Eror +Bromine
Students being in a hurry do not read the question carefully Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
and identify correct obsevations. the following questions:
Q1. The reaction in which two or more substances combine to
Calcium oxide (quick lime) reacts vigorously with water to form a single substance under suitable conditions is:
produce calcium hydroxide (slaked lime) releasing a large a. Combination reactionb. combustion
amount of heat. It is a combination reaction.
decomposition reaction d. photosynthesis
C.
Q4. Quick lime combines vigorously with water to form (A) which Ans. (a) combination reaction
reacts slowly with the carbon dioxide in air to form (B).
2. Which of the following is essential for photosynthesis?
ldentify the compounds (A) and (B).
(A)
a. Sunlight b. Chlorophyll
(6)
C. Glucose d. Both a. and b.
a. Calcium carbonate Calcium hydroxide.
b. Calcium hydroxide Calcium carbonate Ans. (d) Both a and b
[Link] Calclum bicarbonate Photosynthesis is the process by which green plants and
d. Calcium bicarbonate Calcium some other organisms use sunlight to synthesis nutrient
from carbon dioxide and water.
 Class10 Term 1:1 23
e Science
molecules produced in
03. nen a nemical compound decomposes on ahsorbina s The number of hydrogen
oxygen molecules.
light and energy, then the reaction which takes place is clectrolysis is twice the number of
known as: volume than oxygen.
Also, hydrogen is double in
give the answer of
a. photosynthesis b. photodecomposltion Read the above passage carefully and
C. combination d. thermal decomposltlon the following questions
(b) photodecomposition
Ans.
Q1. Which gas is evolved at anode?
A photodecomposition is a
chemical reaction In whlch an a. Oxygen
inorganic chemical (or an organic chemical) is broken down
by photons and is the interaction of one or more photons
[Link]
with one target molecule. [Link]
d. Carbon monoxide
Q4. Which of the following reactions is an example of
combustion reaction? Ans. (a) Oxygen
cathode?
[Link])+Olg)cog) 02. Which gas is evolved at
[Link](s)+HS0,(0q) Zn50, (aq) + H,(9) [Link]

[Link])+2HC(aq) ZnCiglag) + H,g) [Link]

c. Hydrogen
d.3Mg(s)+ Nlg)> MgNs)
d. Hydrogen peroxide
Ans. (a) Cls)+ Oz(g)> CO2lg)
Ans. (c) Hydrogen
A combustion reaction is a reaction in which a substance pure water because:
reacts with oxygen gas, releasing energy in the form of light Q3. A few drops of HS0, are added to
and heat. a. it does not conduct electricity
b. pure water is a bad conductor of electricity
Q5. Which of the following is an example of combination
reaction? makes the reaction faster
c. it
d. Both b. and c.
Hg)+Cllg)2HC(g) Ans. (d) Both b. and
c
[Link])+5()Feslg)
4. The gas evolved at anode is tested by:
c.2,g)+0g) 2H0) a. bringing a burning splinter close to the mouth of anode
d. All of the above
b. bringinga glowing splinter close to the mouth of anode
Ans. (d) Al of the above
C. passing the gas through lime water
combination reaction is a reaction where two or more
A
d. None of the above
REelements or compounds (reactants) combine to form a Ans. (b) bringing a glowing splinter close to the mouth of anode
single compound (product).

Case 5tudy 8
Common/Error
Usually students get confused in the tests perfotmed to detect
Electrolysis of water is a popular method used for
different applications in various industries. The different gases.
electrolysis of water is mainly carried out to yield pure
Q5. The number of hydrogen molecules produced is
. the
hydrogen and oxygen gases. It involves passing an electric
decomposition number of oxygen molecules.
Current through the water which results in a. half
water into hydrogen and [Link].
Aof Pure water is a poor conductor of electricity.
Sulphuric b. thrice
C. double
acid is added to the water so that the
conductance of water
d. twice
increases which makes the reaction faster. The setup for
Ans. (d) twice
electrolysis of water is given below:
Plastic Case Study 9
mug
In decomposition reactions, a single reactant breaks down
to form two or more products. Decomposition reaction is
Test tube opposite to combination reaction. Thermal decomposition
Oxygen -Hydrogen
reactions use the energy in form of heat for decomposition
Water
Graphite rod- of reactants. Electrolytic decomposition reactions involve
the use of electrical energy for the decomposition of
Rubber reactant molecules. Photolysis or photochemical
stopper decomposition involves the use of light energy for the
Cathode
Anode- purpose of decomposition.
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
6V-
Battery the following questions:
Switch-
 24 | MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE UESTION BANK
Q1. Copper displaces which of the
following metale s
01. Which of the following reactions is a decomposition Srom
reaction? salt solution?
a. NaOH+HCl NàCl +H,0 a. ZnSO4
[Link](NO3)+2KI2KNO +PBl2 b. FesO

c.2KCIO3 2KCl+302 [Link]

d. H2 +l2 2HI d. NISO4
Ans. (c) 2KClO3 - 2KCl +30 Ans. (c) AgNO
Q2. 2Pb(NO) 2Pb0+ nA + 0 Cu+2AgNO, Cu(N0)2 +2Ag
in the given reaction? Copper can displace silver from its salt solution sinte
What is nA
d.NO2
a. 4NO b. 4NO2 c.2PbNO2 copper ls more reactive than silver.
Ans. (b) 4NO2 sulphuric acid, the
2Pb(NO3) 2Pb0+4NO +02 Q2. When zinc reacts with dilute
evolved is:
03. Amino acid is formed by the decomposition of which
component of our diet? a. red in colour and have a sweet smeling
a. Carbohydrate b. Starch b. green in colour and have a foul smell
C. Protein !.
d Fat [Link], odourless and burns with a pop sound
Ans. (c) Protein wFT [Link]. pungent smelling and burns with a pop soun
Proteins in our diet get broken down into amino acids. Ans. (c) colourless, odourless and burns with a pop sound
Q4. Silver chloride on exposure to sunlight for a long duration Zn+H50,(dil.) Zn50, +H2
turns grey due to:
(I) the formation of silver by decomposition of silver
Q3. The colours ofaqueous solutions of CuSO, and Feso0,
observed in the laboratory are:
chloride
(U1) sublimation of silver chloride
a. dark blue and pale green respectively

(IUI) decomposition of chlorine gas from silver chloride

dark blue and dark green respectively
b.
C. pale green and light blue respectively
(IV) oxidation of silver chloride
d. light blue and dark green respectively
The correct statement(s) is/are:
a. Only ()
e Ans.(a) dark blue and pale green respectively
b. (11) and (1) 04. Which of the following reactions is a displacemet
c () and () reaction?
d. Only (V) a.Ca0+H40Ca(OH)2
Ans. (a) Only () [Link] Mg+CO
2AgCls Sunignt 2Ag(s)+ Cl2g) [Link]+CuS0 MgS0, +Cu
Q5. What type of chemical reaction takes place when d.H2 +Cl 2HCL
electricity is passed through water? 16/90 Ans. (c) Mg+ CusO Mg50, +Cu
a. Thermal decomposition Q5. A strip of copper was placed in a beaker containing zin
[Link] decomposition sulphate solution. On observing the strip next day, it was
[Link] decomposition noticed that:
d. Displacement reaction
a. colour of copper strip has changed
Ans. (b) Electrolytic decomposition b. copper strip became thicker
Electrolysis of water is electrolytic decomposition. .
copper strip became thinner
2H,0 Current 2H2 +O2 [Link] strip remained as it was
Ans. (d) copper strip remained as it was
Case Study 10 No reaction takes place between copper and zinc sulphate
Reactions in which one element takes place of another solution.
element in a compound, are known as displacement
reactions. In general, more reactive elements displaces a
Case Study 11
less reactive element from its compound. In all single Rishabh wanted to study displacement reactions. a
displacement reactions, only one element displaces knows that he needs a metal and a salt solution o
another element from its compound. The single
different metal. So, he takes two tubes and T, out
displacement reactions are, however, written as just 7
displacement reactions which in T1, he placed a copper wire in iron sulpna
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of: solution and in T2 he placed an iron nail in copp
thefollowing qeustions: sulphate solution as shown below:
 Term 1 25
Science| Class 10|
Iron nal
ofter 15-20 minutes
-Tost tubo Tost tub

Blue copper Green iron

-sulphate sulphate
solution solution
Iron nail
Copper wiro
Copper metal
on iron
-
Coppor
Iron sulphate sulphato
After
solution solutlon Before
T 2 passage carefully and give the answer of
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of eRead the abovequestions:
the following
the following questions: Cu(NO,) + yNO, +2H,a
Cu+xHNO
Q1. Based on the above passage which test tube will undergo 01. The equation
displacement reaction? The values of x and y are:
a. 3 and 5
a. T b. T2
b. 8 and 6
[Link] T, and T2 d. Neither Tnor T
Ans. (6)72
c4 and 2
d. 7 and 1

Q 2. Identify the balanced chemical equation for reaction

Ans. (c) 4 and 2
taking place in T2. Cu+ 4HNO uNO)2 +2N02 +2HO.
[Link])+CuCLlag) FeCl(ag) +Culs) is dipped in iron sulphate
Q2. What happens when copper rod
[Link])+Fe50,(ag)No reaction solution:
cFels)+CuS0,(aq) Fes0,(ag)+Cus) a. Copper displaces iron
[Link]'s)+Cus0,(0q) PbsO, (aq) +Cus) b. Blue colour of copper sulphate solution
is obtained
Ans. () Fels)+Cuso,(ag)Feso,(oq)+Cu) c No reaction takes place
Ta
a3. State the change(s) that is/are observed in d. Reaction is exothermic

[Link] precipitate of Fes0 is formed Ans. (c) No reaction takes place

[Link] blue colour of CuS0, changes to light green colour of a.3. A [Link] oxidised itself and reduces otheris
FeS0 known as:
c Brown coating of copper is obtained on iron nail a. oxidising agent b. reducing agent
d. Both b. and c. C. both a. and b. [Link] these
Ans. (d) Both b. and c Ans. (b) reducing agent
What will happen ifzinc is used in place of iron nail in T? Reducing agents reduce the other substance and in turn get
4.
oxidised.
a. It will produce zinc sulphate solution and copper metal
b. It will produce zinc sulphate solution and iron metal Q4. Fe,0 +2Al> AL,0, +2Fe
c. It will produce iron sulphate solution and zinc metal The above reaction is an example of a:
reaction will take place
d. No a. combination reaction
Ans. (a) It will produce zinc sulphate solution and
copper metal b. double displacement reaction

Q5. Identify the oxidising agent in the following reaction: c decomposition reaction
Mgls)+CuS0, (ag)MgS0, (0g) + Cu(s) d. displacement reaction
b. Cu c.CusO4 d. Mg Ans. (d) displacemènt reaction
a. Mgs0,
Ans. (c) Cus0 Q5. Name' the products formed when iron filings are heated
with dilute hydrochloric acid.
Case Study 12 a. Fe (10) chloride and water
iron nail is dipped in
In the below experiment, when an b. Fe (1) chloride and
water
copper is
copper sulphate solution, a brown coating of CFe () chlorlde and hydrogen gas
formed in the surface of iron and the colour
of copper d. Fe (l) chloride and hydrogen gas
pale green. The
sulphate solution changes from blue to Ans. ()Fe () chloride and hydrogen gas
than copper
reaction shows that iron is more reactive When dilute hydrochloric acid is added to iron filings, iron
sulphate
because it displaces copper from the copper chloride and hydrogen gas is produced.
solution. Fe+2HClFeClh +H2
26 MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE QUESTION DANK

The iron displaces hydrogen from hydrochloric acid to form Q4. Identify A in the following reaction
iron () chloride and hydrogen gas. This Is a single ALCl (0g)+3NH,OH(ag) A+ 3NH,Cl(ag)
displacement reaction. a. Al(OH)3 b. AlO

Case Study 13 c. AlH [Link]

Those reactions in which two compounds react by an Ans. (a) At(OH)3

AlClg +3NH,OHAL(OH), +3NH,CL
exchange of ions to form two new compounds arc called
5. Consider the following reaction,
double displacement reactions. A double displacement
reaction usually occurs in solution and one of the BaCl, +Na, so BaSO +2NaC
products, being insoluble, precipitate out (separates as a ldentify the precipitate in the reaction.
solid). Any reaction in which an insoluble solid (called a. BaCl2 b. Ba504
precipitate) is formed that separates from the solution is c.Na50 d. NaCl
called a precipitation reaction. The reaction in which acid Ans. (b) BaS04
or acidic oxide reacts with base or basic oxide to form salt BaCl(ag)+ Na S0,(aq) Ba50(s) + 2NaC(aq)
(white ppt)
and water is called neutralisation reaction.
For example, 2NaOH + H,SO Naz SO4 + H20 Case Study 14
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of :

the following questions: The reaction between MnO with HC1 is depicted in the
Q1. When hydrogen sulphide gas is following diagram. It was observed that a gas wih
passed through a blue
solution of copper sulphate, a,black precipitate of copper bleaching abilities was released.
sulphide is obtained and thé sulphuric acid so formed HCI(ag)
remains in the solution. The reaction is an example of a:
[Link] reaction b. displacement reaction
c decomposition reaction d. double displacement reaction
Ans. (d) double displacement reaction
b ng
CusO +HS Cus+H50 MnO2(s)
Both CuS0, and HS exchange their ions to give new Reactants Products
compounds-Cus and HS04. Hence, this is a double
displacement reaction. Read the above passage carefully and give the answerof
the following questions:
Q 2. Which of the following is not a double displacement
Q1. The chemical reaction between
reaction? Mn02 and HCI is an
a. AgNOa(og) + Nacl(aq)
AgCl{s)+ NaNO3(aq)
example of:
a. displacement reaction
[Link])+HSo,(0g)Zn50,(ag) + Hg) b. combination reaction
[Link],(aq) + HSlag) CuS(s) + HS0,(ag)
[Link](NO)aq) + 2K{(09) Pbl:(s) +2KNO,(oq) credox reaction
d. decomposition reaction
Ans. (b) Zn(s) + H,S0, (aqg)Zns0lag) + H,g)
Ans. (c) redox reaction
It is an example of single displacement reaction.
Q 3. Bariumchloride on reaction with ammonium sulphate
a2. In which of the following chemical
abbreviations represent the correct
equations, the
forms barium sulphate and ammonium chloride. Which of states of reactants and
the following correctly represents the type of the reaction products?
involved? a. MnO ()+ 4HCI
(aq)-MnCl (ag)+2H0 ()+ClL (g)
() Displacement reaction b. MnO (s)+4HCl (aq)MnClu (s)
c. MnOz (s)+4HCl
+2H0 (ag)+Cl (9)
(I) Precipitation reaction. () MnCl (s)+2H:0 (0+ClL (g)
(1) Combination reaction d. MnO (s)+4HCl (aq)
-MnCla (ag) + 2H:0 (ag) +Cla
(IV) Double displacement reaction Ans. (a) Mn02 (s) + 4HCL (ag)
MnCl (ag) + 2H0 () +Cl (9)
9
a. () only Q3. ldentifythe correct
b. (1) only
statement from the following:
a. MnO is getting
c.(U) and (V) reduced whereas HCl is
b. MnO is getting getting oxidised
oxidised whereas HCl
d. () and (V c.MnO2 and HCl both is getting reducea0
Ans. (d) (1) and (V)
are getting reduced
d. MnO2 and HCl
both are getting oxidised
BaCla+(NH)2S04Baso +2NH,CL Ans. (a) MnO2 is
getting reduced whereas
(Ppt.) HClis getting oxidiseu
4. In the above discussed
It is a precipitation reaction as well as doüble displacement a. MnCle
reaction, name the reducing agent
b. HCL c. MnO2
reaction Ans. (b) HCI d H:0
 Science Class 10 Term 11 27

Q5. What will happen if we take dry HCl which substance is reduced?
gas instead of aqueous Q5. In the following reaction,
solution of HCI? PbSO, +4H,0
PbS+4H,0,
a. Reaction will occur faster PbS [Link]
a. HO b.H02 C.

b. Reaction will not occur

Ans. (b) H0
c. Reaction rate will be slow
H,0 1s reduced to HO.
d. Reaction rate will remain
the same
Ans. (b) Reaction will not occur Case Study 16
reduction is based on
Case Study 15 The carlier concept of oxidation and
hydrogen elements
Redox reactions are those reactions in the addition or removal of oxygen or
which oxidation
so, in terms of oxygen and
hydrogen, oxidation is addition
and reduction occur simultaneously. A
redox reaction is removal of hydrogen from a
made up of two half reactions. In the first half reaction, of oxygen to a substance and
addition of
Oxidation takes place and in substance. On the other hand, reduction is
second half reaction, oxygen from a
hydrogen to a substance and removal of
reduction occurs. Oxidation is a process in which
a substance. The substance which gives oxygen to
another
substance loses electrons and in reduction, a substance substance in
substance or removes hydrogen from another
gains electrons. The substance which gains electrons is oxidising agent, while
an oxidation reaction is known as
reduced and acts as an oxidising agent. On the other hand, substance
the substance which gives hydrogen to another
a substance which loses electrons is oxidised and acts as a substance in a reduction
or removes oxygen from another
reducing agent. reaction is known as reducing agent. For example,
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of Loss of oxygen
Gain of oxygen
(Reduction)
thefollowing questions (Oxidation)
Q1. Which of the following is a redox reaction? ZnO+C Zn +CO 2H2S+SO2 3S+2H,0
Loss of hydrogen
[Link] Ca0+CO2 Loss of oxygen
(Reduction) (Oxidation)
b.H2+Cl2- +2HC ZnO-Oxidising agent SO2-Oxidising agent
cCa0+2HCI CaCl, +H0 C-Reducing agent HoS-Reducing agent
d. NaOH+HCI NaCl+H0
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
Ans. (b) H2 +Cl2 2HCI
the following questions:
H is oxidised to HCl while Cl, is reduced to HC
01. Aredox reaction is one in which:
02. Identify the reaction in which H,0, is acting as a reducing a. both the substances are reduced
agent. b. both the substances are oxidised
a. H50 +HO H50, +H,0 C. an acid is neutralised by the base
b.2H1+ H,0224,0+2 d. one substance is oxidised while the other is reduced
[Link]+H02 2HCl+02 Ans. (d) one súbstance is oxidised while the other is reduced
d.2FeCl 2HCl+ H02
+ 2FeCl +2H0 Q2. In the reaction, H,S+Cl, S+2HC
Ans. (c) Cl, +H02 2HCl+02 .HSis the reducing agent
one in which H,S
03. For the following reactions, identify the b. HClis the oxidising agent

acts as a reducing agent. [Link] the oxidising agent

a.Cu5O +H5 Cus+H504 [Link] is the reducing agent
Ans. (a) HSis the reducing agent
[Link](NO3)2
+HS> Cd5+2HNO
+2HCl +5 Gain of hydrogen
c.2FeCl +HS 2FeCl
Reduction)
d. None of the above i H2S G 2HCI
2FeCl +HS
Ans. (c) 2FeCl, +2HCL+S
FeC to FeCl Loss of hydrogen
HS gets oxidised to 5 and reduces (Oxidation)
correct statement.
04. For the following reaction, identify the
Q3. Which of the following processes does not involve either
Zn0+CO Zn
COe oxidation or reduction?
being reduced
a. ZnO is a. Formation of slaked lime from quick lime
b.CO2is being oxidised b. Heating mercuric oxide
being reduced
c. CO is c. Formation of manganese chloride from manganese oxide

d. Zn0 is being oxidised (MnO,)

Ans. (a) Zn0 is being reduced d. Formation of zinc from zinc blende
ZnO is reduced to Zn and CO is oxidised to CO Ans. (a) Formation of slaked lime from quick lime
28 MasTERMIND CHAPTERWISE CuESTION BANK

Q4. Mg+Cuo Mgo Cu [Link] a and b

d. None of the above
Which of the following is wrong relating to the above
reaction? Ans. (c) both a and b
Antioxidants and nitrogen gas
prevent oxidation of food
a. Cuo gets reduced
oxygen is an exampleeof:
b. Mg gets oxidised Q2. Combination of phosphorus and ot
[Link] oxidised a. oxidation
d. It is a redox reaction [Link]
Ans. (c) CuO gets oxidised [Link]
Here. Mg gets oxidised and Cuo gets reduced. d. None of the above
a5. Identify the correct oxidising agent and reducing agent in Ans. (a) oxidation
2P03, 4P +502 2P0s
the followving reaction. 4P+302 statements
2Fe + AL,O,
science teacher wrote the following
aboun
Fe,0,+2AL Q 3. A
a. Al-Oxidising agent, FeOa Reducing agent rancidity:
- become rancid
b. Fe-03-Oxidising agent. Al Reducing agent
dta) When fats and oils are reduced, they
- by oxygen.
[Link]-Oxidising agent, ALO Reducing agent uc (1) In chips packet, rancidity is prevented
d.Fe03-0xidising agent, AlLO- Reducing agent (lU) Rancidity is prevented by adding
antioxidants.
Ans. (b) FeD-Oxidising agent, Al Reducing agent
-

Select the correct option..

Case Study 17 a. () only
(1) and (11)
Oxidation has damaging effect on metals as well as on 14b.
c.(1) only
food. The damaging effect of oxidation on metal is studied
d.(0).() and (U)
as corosion and that on food is studied as rancidity. The (11)
Ans. (c) only
phenomenon due to which metals are slowly eaten away
The oils and fats are slowly oxidised to certain bad
smelling
by the reaction of air, water and chemicals present in compounds, which release foul smell This, is known
atmosphere, is called corrosion. For example, iron rancidity
particles are shiny when new, but get coated with a Rancidity is prevented by filling nitrogen gas in chips

reddish brown powder when left for sometime. This packets

process is known as rusting of iron. Rancidity is the Q4. Two statements are given below regarding rusting of
iron.

process of slow oxidation of oil and fat (which are volatile () The rusting of iron is a redox reaction and reaction

in nature) present in the food materials resulting in the occurs as, 4Fe + 30, 4Fe +602-
change of smell and taste in them. (0) The metallic iron is oxidised to Fe2 and 0, is redued
to 0.
Using inert
gasesin Select the correct statement(s).
packaging9 a.I only
[Link] only
c. Both I and II
Using
Wacuumn antioxidants d. None of the above
packaging Ways to A Cand
Ans. (a) only1

prevent Q5. Which of the

rancidity following measures can be adopted
prevent or slow down rancidity?
() Food materials should be packed in air tight containe
(1) Food should be refrigerated.
Storing in
adark Refrigeration (l1) Food materials and cooked food should be kept aw
place from direct sunlight.
[Link] and Il
:
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of b.I and Il
the following questions: C. Il and I
can be prevented by:
01. Rancidity d.1, and Il
a. adding antioxidants Ans. (d)I. and Il
b. packaging oly food in nitrogen gas
l
 2
Scan the QR Code
to know more about this Chapter

Acids, Bases and Salts

:
Fastrack REVISICN
,Indicators: These are the chemical substances which reacts with a metal
different 4. Reaction with Metal Oxides: An acid
colours in acidic and basic solutions. Litmus solution give oxide/hydroxide to form salt and water. For example,
osynthetic indicators.
and
turmeric
natural indicators. Methyl orange and phenolphthalein
are Cuo(s)+2HCl(ag)- CuCl, (ag)+ H,O()
Water
vanilla, onion and clove are used to determine Metal oxlde Acid Salt

the presence of acids and bases with their smell, hence they areBases: The substances which are soapy to touch, bitter in
cas
called olfactory indicators. to blue colour are called bases. According to
turn red litmus solution
Out in aqueous solution, e.g.,
Original Arrhenius, they give hydroxide (OH) ions
Indicator
Colour Acid Base NaOH, KOH, etc. All water-soluble bases are called alkalies. All
may not be alkalies.
zid. alkalies are bases but all bases
Red litmus Red No change Blue Chemical Properties of Bases:
Blue 1. Reaction with Metals: Only reactive metals
(such as sodium and
Blue litmuS Red Nochange
potassium) react with bases to form salt and hydrogen gas. For
Turmeric Yellow No change Reddish brown
example,
Red cabbage Purple Greenish 2NaOH (aq)+Zn(s) Na,ZnO(s)+H,(g)
Red Base Salt Gas
Juice yellow Metal
are
Phenolphthalein Colourless Colourless Pink 2. Reaction with Non-metallic Oxides: Non-metallic oxides
acidic in nature. Thus, they will react with bases to form salt and
Methyl orange Orange Red Yellow water. They do not react with acids. For example,
Smell vanishes Ca(OH)2 (s)+ COg) CaCO% (s)+H,O{)
Onion Nochange Base Non-metalic, Non-metallic Water
Oxide
Ling Vanilla No change vanishes
Smell H ions in
as Smell vanishes pH Scale: It is a scale used to measure the concentration of
Clove oil | No change a solution. One can measure pH from zero (very acidic) to fourteen
many (very alkaline) on this scale. Higher the value of hydrogen ion, lower
hips Universal Indicator: It is a mixture of different indicators OH
(or dyes) which give different colours at different pH values to will be its pH value. Also, as pH increases, the concentration of
of the base also
indicate the acidity and alkalinity of solutions ions also increases and therefore the strength
ron. Acids: The substances which are sour taste and turn
in blue litmus increases. indicates neutral
7 pH.
solution to red colour are called acids. Some fruits like lemon,Importance of pH in Everyday Life:
tion
orange, tamarind, etc. are sour in taste due to presence of acid in i) Our body works in the pH range of 7.0 to 7.8.
them. According to Arrhenius, acids are hydrogenous substances (i) Change in pH (less than 5.6) of rain causes acid rain, which has
uced
and releases hydrogen ions (H') in aqueous solution, eg,
HCl harmful effects on aquatic life.
(Hydrochloric acid), H:SO4 (Sulphuric acid), HNO, (Nitric acid), (ii) Plants require a specific pH range for their healthy growth.
(Carbonic acid), H,SO3 (Sulphurous (iv) Tooth decay starts when pH of mouth is lower than 5.5.
CH,COOH (Acetic acid), H2CO
acid), etc pH of Salts:
Chemical Properties of Acids: ) Salt of a strong acid and a strong base is neutral in nature with pH
1. Reaction with Metals: When acids react
with metals, they value of 7.
metals react with acids, (i) Salt ofa strong acid and a weak base is acidic in nature with pH
produce a salt and hydrogen gas. Most
value less than 7.
but not all. For example,
(i) Salt ofa strong base and a weak acid is basic in nature with pH
0 Zn(s)+H,so, (ag) Znso, (ag)+ H2 (9) value more than 7.
Gi) Mgls)+2HCl(ag)> MgC, (ag)+H2 (g)
to Common Salt: Sodium chloride obtained from sea is also known as
Salt carbonates and
Reaction with Metal Carbonates: All metal common salt. The large crystals of common salt found, in
acids to give a corresponding salt, underground deposits are called rock salt.
iner nydrogen carbonates react with
carbon dioxide and water. For example, Some Compounds Obtained from Common Salt:
2NaCl(ag)+CO, (o)+H,Oo(0 1. Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH): When electricity is passed through
away 2Hclag)+ Na,co, (s) alt an aqueoUs solution of sodium chloride (brine), the salt
Acid Metal carbonate
Nacl(aq)+CO% (9)+HO()a undergoes decomposition to produce sodium hydroxide solution
NaHCO (s) +HCl(ag) near the cathode, chlorine gas at the anode and hydrogen gas at
Hydrogen carbonate
reaction between an acid and a the [Link] process is called chlor-alkali process because of
3. Neutralisation eaction: It is the
For example the products formed-chlor for chlorine and alkali for NaOH.
ase to give salt and water. Electricity
HCl(ag)+ NaOHag) NaCl(ag)+HO(9 2NaCl(ag)+24,O() 2NaOH(aq)+CL(9)+ H, (o)
salt Water
Acid Base
30 IMASTERMND CHAPTERWISE JuEsTION BANK

2. nleaching Powder (Caocl}: when chlorine gas ls passed Na,CO,+10H,0- Na,co,.10L0

through dry slaked-lime [Ca(ON).), bleaching powder (Caoct,) Is um
tabonate
Washing soda

obtained. It is used In soap, glass and paper Industrles.

CaO)
Maled time
c CaOCl
leaching powder
N,O
Watr
5. Plaster of Parls (Caso,.,o}:tis prepared by heating gypIn
Bleaching powder is used to manufacture chloroform and as a (Caso,2H,0) at 373K causing It to lose water molecules
and
disinfectant becoming calclum sulphate hemlhydrate.
s. Baking Soda (NaHCOj:t is used for making baking powder and Caso, 2H,0 Caso,H,on,o
373K
as an ingredient of antacids. It is also used in soda-acid fire Giypsurn Haster of Water
Par
extinguishers.
It is used for maklng toys, materlals for decoratlon and for
NaCt HO co, + NH NHCI, NatCo
Ammonm Sodtum hyrogen making smooth surfaces.
Water of Crystallsatlon: It is the fixed number of water molecules
thlorde carbonate

The following reaction takes place when baking soda Is heated present In one formula unlt of a salt. The salts whlch contaln water
during cooking. of crystallsatlon are called hydrated salts. For example, Gypsum
crystals contain two molecules of water of crystallisation. It has the
ZNaHCO,
sedium hydrogen
PeNaCo +H0+Co, T
chemlcal formula, CasO.2H,0.
(Bsking soda) When hydrated salts are heated strongly, they lose thelr water of
4. Washing Soda (Na,co, 10H:O): Washing soda is obtalned by crystallsatlon. The salts which have lost thelr water of
recrystalisation of sodium carbonate. It is a basic salt. crystallisation are called anhydrous salts.

Objective TYPE QUESTIONS

a5.
.
are substances whose odour changes in acidic or
Multiple Choice Questions basic medium.
a. Natural indicators b. Synthetic Indicators
C. Olfactory indicators d. All of these
a1. A substance X, turns red litmus blue, itwillchange methyl
orange to: Ans.(c) Olfactory Indicators
a. yellow [Link] a6. An aqueous solution turns red litmus solution blue. Excess
d. colourless addition of which of the following solution would reverse
red (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
Ans. (a) yellow the change?
a. Baklng powder
Q2. Asubstance Y, turns phenolphthalein pink. It: b. LIme
a. turns blue litmus red c. Ammonium hydroxide solution
b. turns methyl orange red d. Hydrochloric acid
C vanishes smell of clove oil Ans. (d) Hydrochloric acid
d. None of the above Q7. Which one of the following can be used as an acid-base
Ans. (c) vanishes smell of clove oil indicator by a visually impared student? (NCERTEXEMPLAR)
b. Turmeric
CT!P a. Litmus
[Link] essence [Link] leaveS
Base turns phenolphthalein pink, so Y is a base. Ans. (c) Vanilla essence

a3. Whena substance A turns blue litmus red, it:

a. vanishes smell of clove oil
-T!P
Learn examples of natural, synthetic and olfactory
b. vanishes odour of vanilla
c turns phenolphthalein colourless indicators.
d. None of the above KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
Ans. (c) turns phenolphthalein colourless. Visually impared student cannot see, so o olfactory indicator is

a 4. An aqueous solution 'A' turns phenolphthalein solution used which smels diíferent when added to acid or base
pink. On addition of an aqueous solution 'B' to 'A', the pink
colour disappears. Which of the following statement is Q8. Which of the following statements is true for acids?
true for solution'A and 'B'7 (CBSE 2020) (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
a. A is strongly baslc and B Is a weak base. a. Bltter and çhange red litmus to blue
b. A is strongly acldic and B Is a weak acid. b. Sour
and change red litmus to blue
C.A has pH greater than 7 and B has pH less than 7. Sour and change blue lUtmus to red
C.

d. A has pH less than 7 and B has pHgreater than 7. d. Bitter and change blue litmus to red
Ans. (c) A has pH greater than 7 and B has pH less than 7. Ans. () Sour and change blue litmus to red
 Science
I
Class 10 I
Term 1 31
a9. Incorect statement about acids is
a they have sour taste /are: (NCERTEXEMPLAR) a [Link] of the following acid does not react with metals?
b. they do not change the colour .Sulphuric acid [Link] acid
of
c they change the colour of blue turmeric c Carbonic acid d itric acid
d. thay chenge the colour of
litmus to red Ans.{c) Carbonic acid
methyl orange to yellow
Ans. (d) they change the colour of
methyl orange to yellov CT!P
CT!P Carbonic acid is a veak acid and does not dissociate
completely in hydrogen ion in aqueous solution vhereas
Learn and understand the effect
of different indicators on sulphuric acid, phosphoric acid and nitric acid are strong
acids and bases.
acids and dissociate completely in aqueous solution.
a10. A blue litmus
paper was first dipped in diL HCl and
diL NaOH solution. It was observed then in a19. When sodium hydroxide reacts with zincit produces.
that the colour of the a. sodium ovide and water
titmus paper:
b. sodium zincate and water
a. changes to red
b. changes first to red and then to blue c sodium zincate and hydrogen gas
d. sodium oxide and hydrogen gas
changes from blue to colourless
d. remains blue in both the solutions Ans. (c) sodium zincate and hydrogen gas
Ans.(b) changes first to red and then to blue 2Na0H (0g)+Zn(s)taZn0,(sHg)
pum ircae
a11. The colour of methyt orange in basic medium is: Q 20. When an acid reacts with a metal carbonate or metal
a. pink b. orange hydrogen carbonate, it gives the corresponding salt,
Cpurple d. yellow gas and
Ans. (d) yellow a. hydrogen, water
a 12. Phenolphthalein's colour in basic medium is but in
b. oygen, water
acid it ccarbon dioxide, hydrogen
is-- d. carban diozide, vater
a pink colourless b. yellow, pink
cpink, arange d. blue, red Ans. (d) carbon dioxide. water
Ans. (a) pink. colourless a 21. When aqueous sodium carbonate (Na,co,) reacts with
a 13. Which one of the given statement is incorret? HCag), it gives:
a.Na0H(aq).H2(g)and cO2(g)
a. Acids turns blue itmus paper red
b. Aqueous solutions of acids conduct electricity [Link](ag). HD() and COo)
cAcids react vith certain metals to form hydrogen cNaHCO(s)H2lg) and COg)
g2s
d. None of the above [Link](s) HO() and Co,g)
Ans.() Hone of the above Ans. (b)NaCl(ag). HO{) and COo)
NacO(s)+2HCl(og) 2NaCl{ag) + HD()+co,tg)
a14. Which among the following is not a base?(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
a. laOH b. KOH a 22. Which one of the given is formed when sodium hydrogen
[Link] [Link] carbonate reacts with hydrochloric acid?
Ans. (6) CHOH a. Sodium htoride
[Link] dioxide
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
CWater
| C2HOH does not generate OH ions in aqueous solution. Hence d. All of the above
it is not a base. 3 Ans. (d) All of the above
NaHCOs)+HC{og)- Nacl{og)- Hpl0+Coo)
Q15. The gas evolved in a metal acid reaction is:
a. dependent upon acid b. hydrogen
a 23. Sodium hydrogen carbonate when added to acetic acid
d. no gas is evolved
evolves a gas. Which of the following statements are true
conygen
about the gas evolved?
Ans. (6) hydrogen
Acid+Metal Salt+ Hydrogen gas It turns lime water milky
0)t extinguishes a burníng splinter
Q 16. Reaction of zinc granules with evolves H, gas
which burns with a pop sound.
(ii) lt dissolves in a solution of sodium hydroxide
a. HNO [Link] iv) It has a pungent odour (NCERT EXEMPLAR)

d. All of these a. () and (i)

HC b. (). (i) and (i)
Ans. (d) All of these
Q17. Thereactíon of metal with acid results in the formation of:
e (i). (i) and (v)
d. () and (h
a. onty hydrogen gas
Ans. (b) ().) and (i)
b. only salt
c both salt and hydrogen gas CT!P
d. lone of the above Corbon dioxide gos is odourless in nature.
Ans. (c) both salt and hydrogen gas
32 IMASTERMND CHAPTERWISE CuEBTION BANK

, calclum oxlde Is produced

a 24. Whlch of the following substance wll not glve carbon
[Link] to the productlon of more heat
dioxlde on treatment wlth dllute acld? (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
a. Marble b. LImestone Ans. (b) calclum bl-carbonate Is produced
[Link] soda
Ans.(d) Lime
d. Lime
Common/Error
Most students commit error whle
onswering thls question as
Marble, limestone and baking soda have carbonates which
produces CO, gas they write opton (a) as the correct answer
Ca0+2HC CaCl+H,0 KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
a25. When co, ls passed through lime water, It turns milky, the jt turns milky due to thel
milkiness is due to formation of: When CO Is passed through slaked time,
water.
[Link] [Link](OH) [Link] [Link] Sormation ofCaCO, whlch is insoluble in
through this solution, the
Ans. (a) CaCO3 However, when excess of CO, passed
Is
of calcjum bi-carbonate
Ca(OH)+CO2CacO +H,O milkiness disappears due to the formation
White precipitate which is colourless and soluble in water.
Ca(HCO3)2
CaCO+ H20+CO
Q 26. Acetic acid was added to a solid X kept In a test tube. A excess
colourles and odourless gas was evolved. The gas was
is míxed with a
passed through lime water which turned milky. It was Q 32. What happens when a solution of an acid
concluded that: solution of a base in a test tube?
a. solid X is sodium hydroxide and the gas evolved Is CO2 increases
(i) The temperature of the solution
b. solid Xis sodium bicarbonate and the gas evolved Is CO2 decreases
(i) The temperature of the solution
c. solid Xis sodium acetate and the gas evolved is CO2
(ii) The temperature of the solution remains the same
d. solid X is sodium chloride and the gas evolved Is CO2
Ans.(b) Solid Xis sodium bicarbonate and the gas evolved Is CO (iv) Salt formation takes place
NaHCO,(s)+CHCOOH(0q)-CH,COONa"(ag) + Co,lg)+ HO(0 a. () only b. () and (i)
c. (1) and (i) d. () and (iv)
a 27. Which one of the following is formed when calcium (iv)
hydroxide reacts with carbon dioxide? Ans. (d) () and
a. Hydrogen gas
Salt
b. Water
d. Both b and ch1
CT!P giving out
Acid-base reactions are exothermic in nature,
Ans. (d) Both b and c
heat which causes an increase in temperature.
Ca(OH)(aq)-coo)Caco(s)+ H0(0 salt
28. A solutionreacts with crushed egg-shells to give a gas that Q3. Reaction of an acid with a base is known as:
tums lime-water milky. The solution contains: a. decomposition
a. NaCl b. HCL C. LICT d. KC [Link]
Ans. (b) HCl TEC. redox reaction
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER d. neutralisation
Ans. (d) neutralisation
The egg shells are mode up of calcium carbonate
In a neutralisation reaction, an acid reacts with a base and
CaCO +2HCICaCh + H20+ CO2 forms salt and water.
a29. When Ca(OH), reacts with CO, (@) it willgive CaCo, (6)and a 34. When NaOH and HCl are mixed in equal molar quantities,
H,o0, The nature of CaCO, is: the result is:
a. acidic basic a. the formation of NaCl+ H0
C. neutral d. All are possible b. the formation of NaCl, + H>(9)
Ans.(b) basic c. the formation of NaCt+0z(g)
CacO is basic in nature, as it is the salt of strong base d. All the above are correct
Ca(OH) (calcium hydroxide) and a weak acid, HCO Ans.(a) the formation of NaCl+ H0
(carbonic acid). When NaOH and HCl are mixed in equal molar quantities.
a 30. On prolong supply of CO, @) in lime solution (lime water), acid-base reaction takes place and we get salt (NaCl) and
it is observed that: water.
a. lime solution changes to gaseous state NaOH+HC Nacl+ H0
b. the milkiness of lime water disappears
. the milkiness of lime water changes from white to red.
a 35. 2NaOH+ MgS04
a. Mgo+Na 504
?
1.
the colour of lime water becomes black
b. Mg(OH)2 +Na S04
Ans. (b) the milkiness of lime water disappears
C. Mg(OH)2+ Na0
a31. Due to excess passing of CO, through an aqueous solution d. Mg0+Na0
of slaked lime, its milkiness fades because:
. calcium carbonate is produced Ans. (b) Mg(OH)2 + Na,S04
. calcium bl-carbonate is produced 2NaOH+MgsO Mg(OH)> + NaS04
g
 Science Class 10 | Term 1 33
36. Match the salts given in column (I) with (ii) Bulb will not glow because circuit is incomplete
acids and bases givenin column their appropriate type of
(). (iv) Bulb will not glow because it depends upon the
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
Column electrolytic solution
Column a. () and () b. (i) and (iv)
(A) KNO () Nitric acid,silver hydroxide onty d. (iv) only
c.(i)
Ans.(c) (i) only
(B) AgNO ()Hydrochloric acid. Magneslum
hydroxide Q 41. When an acid dissolve in water
it releases...
a. H' ion [Link] lon
(C) Mgcl, (i)Carbonicacid, Ammonium d.H0 lon
hydroxide c.H lon
Ans.(a)H lon
(0) (NH,),Co (iv)Nitricacld, potasslum the following are present in a dilute
aqueous
Q 42. Which of
| hydroxide
solution of hydrochloric acid?
a. A-():B-(v). c-(i). D-(i) a.H0'+C b.Hy0 +OH
b. A-(iv). B-(0), C-(i). D-() [Link]+OH d. unionised HCl
c.A-(iv). B-() C-(i). D-() Ans. (a) H0 +C
d. A-(). B-(iv). C-(ii). D-(it) Q43. Thestrength of bases depends on the number of.. ions
Ans. (b) A-(v). B-0). C-(i). D-(it) produced.
[Link] cHO d. Na
Q 37. Most of the oxides of metals reacts with acid to form a.H
Ans. (b) OH
HCl (g) is passed
*********

a. a base b. an acid Q44. Which of the following istare) true when EXEMPLAR)(NCERT
salt
C.a d. either (a) or (b) throughwater?
(i) It does not ionise in the solution as it is a
covalent
Ans.(c) a salt
Metal oxide + Acid compound.
Salt+water
yn(i) 1t ionises in the solution solution
a 38. Which of the following statements is not correct? in
(ii) It gives both hydrogen and hydroxyl ion the
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
(iv) It forms hydronium ion in the solution due to the
metal carbonates react with acid to give a salt, water
a. All combination of hydrogen ion with water molecule
and carbon dioxide. a. ) only b. (ii) only
b. All metal oxides react with water to give salt and acid c. (i) and (iv) d. (ii) and (iv)
c. Some metals react with acids to give salt and hydrogen Ans. (c) (i) and (iv)
d. Some non-metals oxides react with water to form an acid
Q 45. Which of the following gives the correct increasing order
Ans. (b) All metal oxides react with water to give salt and acid of acidic strength?
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)

a39. CuO+0)Cuso4 +H,O. Here (x) i: a. Water <Acetic acid <Hydrochloric acid
a.CuSO4 b. HCL cHSO d. HNO b. Water <Hydrochloric acid < Acetic acid
Ans.(c)HSO, C. Acetic acid< Water <Hydrochloric acid
d. Hydrochloric acid< Water <Acetic acid
CuO+H50 Cus0,+H0
Ans. (a) Water <Acetic acid <Hydrochloric acid
Q 40. In an attempt to demonstrate electrical conductivity a small
Q 46. Which of the following phenomena occur, when
through an electrolyte, the following apparatus (Figure) water? (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
amount of acid added to
is
was set up. (ii) Neutralisation
Bulb () lonisation
6V- (ii) Dilution (iv) Salt formation
battery () and (i)
Switch a.() and () b.
c. (i) and (i) d. (i) and (iv)
Ans. (b) ) and (ii)
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
The process of mixing an acid or base with water is called
Beaker A dilution.
Q 47. If a few drops of a concentrated acid accidentally spills
Nail TN over the hand of a student, what should be done?
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
Dilute NaOH
solution Wash the hand with saline solution
a.
Wash the hand immediately with plenty of water and
b.
Rubber
cork apply a paste of sodium hydrogencarbonate
C. After washing with plenty of water apply solution of

Which among the following statement(s) is

(are) correct? sodium hydroxide on the hand
because electrolyte is not acidic d. Neutralise the acid with a strong alkali
) Bulb will not glow Ans. (b) Wash the hand immediately with plenty of water and
Na0H is a strong base and
(i) Bulb will glow because apply a paste of sodium hydrogencarbonate
furnishes ions for conduction
34 IMASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE OueSTION
BANK

Q 48. Which of the following statements ls correct about an You are given 3 unknown solutíons
víth pH value as 6,2
a 65. solution il contajin
aqueous solutlon of an acid and of a base? and 9.5 respectively. Which
(NCERI EXEMPLAR) maxImum OH lon?
(1) a Solution sarnple-1 b. Solution sample-2
Hlgher the pH, stronger the acld
c. 5olution sample-3 d. Data is insufficient
(i) Higher the pH, weaker the acld
(ii) Lower the pH, stronger the base Ans. (c) Solution sample-3
(iv) Lower the pH, weaker the base
a. () and (i)
CT!P 14, it represents an
the pH value increases from to
7
b. () and () As
c.() and (iv) in the solution.
d. (i) and (v) increase in OH ion concentration
Ans. (d) (i) and (iv)
Q 49. Which of the folowing is a strong base? a 56, Range of pH scale is:
10
a. Calcium hydroxide b. Magnesium hydroxide a. 7 to 10 b.0 to
CAmmonium hydroxide Potasslum hydroxide
d. [Link] 14 d.7to 14

Ans. (d) Potassium hydroxide. Ans. (c) 0 to 14

universal indicator is:
a 50. Which one among the given is a weak base? Q 57. The correct statement regarding
a. Sodium hydroxide b. Potassium hydroxide a. it is an indicator having pH=7
b. it gives blue colour at pH =3
CAmmonium hydroxide d. All of these 7
c. it becomes colourless at pH =
Ans. (c) Ammonium hydroxide pH =3
d. it givesorange colour at
a51. You are having five solutions A, B, C, D and F with pH values Ans. (d) it gives orange colour at pH=3
as follows: Universal indicator is mixture of many indicators.
Its colour
A=1.8, B-7,C = 8.5, D -8and E -5 is orange at pH =3
Which solution would be most likely to liberate hydrogen Q 58. Equal volumes of hydrochloric acid and
sodium hydroxide
of
with magnesium powde? solutions of same concentration are mixed and the pH
a pH paper. What
a. Solution A and B the resulting solution is checked with (NCERTEXEMPLAR)
b. Solution A would be the colour obtained?
b. Yellow
cSolutionC a. Red
d. All of the c. Yellowish green d. Blue
above
Ans. (6) Solution A Ans. (c) Yellowish green
Solution A would liberate hydrogen with magnesium When pH of rain water is less than
..
it is called acid
59.
because pH value is least for A solution ie. 1.8. Hence. it is the rain.
most acidic among all the solutions. a. 5.6 b. 3.5 c7.8 d. 2.2

a52. Which one of the given is the pH value of pure water? Ans.(a) 5.6
or pH value of a neutral solution is. Q 60. Our body works within the pH range of:
*************

a. b. 7 a.7.0 to 7.8 b. 5.5 to 6.5

c 10.0 to 11.8 d. 6.0 to 6.8
c8 d.1
Ans. (b) 7 Ans. (a) 7.0 to 7.8

Q 53. Which one of the given is true, if a substance has a pH a61. A sample of soil is mixed with water and allowed to settle
The clear supernatant solution turns the pH paper
value of 4?
a. The substance is a base
yellowish-orange. Which of the following would change
the colour of this pH paper to greenish-blue?
b. The substance is an acid (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
c. The substance is a neutral substance
a. Lemon juice [Link]
d. Either a. or b.
c Common salt d. An antacid
Ans. (b) The substance is an acid
Ans. (d) An antacid
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER Antacid is a base which can change the colour of pH paper
Values less than 7 on the pH scale represents an acid. from yellowish-orange to greenish-blue while others are
acidic in nature.
a 54. Which one of the given is true, if a substance has a pH 62. Calcium phosphate is present in tooth enamel. Its nature
value of 112 is: (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
a. The substance is a base a. basic b. acidic
b. The substance is an acid C. neutral d. amphoteric
CThe substance is a neutral substance Ans. (a) basic
d. Either a. or b. a 63. The pH of the gastric juices released during digestion is:
Ans. (a) The substance is a base (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER a. less than 7 b. more than 7
Values from 7 to 14 on pH scale represents a base. [Link] to 7 d. equal to 0
Ans.(a) less than 7
 Science | lass 10
1
Term 1
35
G4. To protecttooth decay we are advised acid?7
regularly. The nature of the to brush our teeth a 70. Which of the following Is a mineral
tooth paste commonly used [Link] b. Formic acid
Is

Ans.
a, acidic
(C) basic
b. neutral . baslc d.
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)

corroslve
.Tartaricacid
Ans. (d) Hydrochloric acid
d. Hydrochloric acid

Q 65. Antacids contain: a 77. Which of the following is an organic acid?

a. weak base [Link] acid b. Hydrochloric acid
b. weak acld
[Link] base d. strong acld ,Lactic acid [Link] a. and c.
Ans. (a) weak base Ans. (d) Both a, and c.
Antacids 'are weak bases which a 78. Match the acids given in column
(1) with their correct
suffering from acidity. These are glven when a patient is source given in column (1)
antacids neutralises the acld
and give relilef to patient.
Column () Column (1)
a 66. Which of the given is used as an antacid?
a. Sodium hydrocarbonate (A) Lactic acid (9Tomato
b. Calcium hydroxide Lemon
(B) Acetic acid ()
c. Magnesium hydroxide
d. All of the above (C)Citricacid (ii) Vinegar
Ans. (d) All of the above (D) Oxalic acid (iv) Curd
Q 67: The pH of commonly used toothpaste is:
a. A-(i). (B)-(iv). C-(i). D-()
. <6.5
b.27.0 b. A-(iv). B-(ii), C-(i). D-()
c.222 d. None of these C.A-(i), B-(iv). C-(i). D-()
Ans.(b) 2 7.0 d. A-(iv). B-). C-(i). D-(ii)
a 68. Level of pH found in antacid solution is: Ans. (b) A-iv), B-(i), C-(i). D-(6)
a. s6.5 b. 2 7.0 C.10 d.>14 Q79. Sodium carbonate is a basic salt because it is a salt of:
Ans.(c)>100 (NCERT EXEMPLAR)

Q 69. In which of the following, oxalic acid is found naturally? a. strong acid and strong base
[Link] b. Tamarind b. weak acid and weak base
C. strong acid and weak base
c. Tomato d. Lemon
d. weak acid and stròng base
Ans.(c) Tomato
Ans. (d) weak acid and strong base
Q 70. Which of the following is not a mineral acid? never forms acidic salt?
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
Q 80. Which of the following acid(s)

b. Citric acid
. HCI [Link]
a. Hydrochloric acid
c.HS04 [Link]
[Link] acid d. Nitric acid
Ans. (d) HCOg
Ans. (b) Citric acid
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER Carbonic acid does not form acidic salts because it is a weak
Mineral acids give hydrogen ion in an aqueous solution. Citric acid.
acid does not give any ions.
Q81. Which of the following acids are edible?
(i) Citric acid (i) Tartaric acid
Q71. Which of the following acid is present in sour milk?
a. Glycolic acid [Link] acid (ii) Hydrochloric acid (iv) Carbonic acid
d. Tartaric acid a. (i) and (i) are correct
[Link] acid
b. (i). (i) and (iv) are correct
Ans. (b) Lactic acid
c.(). (i) and (ii) are correct
Q 72. The acid used in making of vinegar is: d. All are correct
b. acetic acid
a. formic acid Ans. (b) (). (i) and (iv) are corrèct
C. sulphuric acid d. nitric acid
Q 82. Common salt besides being used in kitchen can also be
Ans. (b) acetic acid used as the raw material for making: (NCERT EXEMPLAR)

Q73. The organic acid present in tomato is: i) washing soda (ii) bleaching powder
a. oxalic acid b. lactic acid (iv) slaked lime.
(ii) baking soda
C. malic acid d. tartaric acid a. () and (i) b.(). (i) and (iv)
Ans.(a) oxalic acid c.) and (i) d. (). (Gii) and (iv)

Q74. Which of the following is acidic in nature? Ans.(c) 0) and (i)

ta. Apple juice b. Soap solution

a 83. When electricity is passed through an aqueous solution of
. Slaked lime d. Lime NaCl:
Ans.(a) Apple juice a. Sodium metal is formed near the cathode
in nature?(NCERT EXEMPLAR) b. Chlorine gas is given off at the anode
Q75. Which of the following is acidic
a. Lime juice b. Human blood [Link] gases is given off at the cathode
d. Antacid d. All of the above
[Link] water
Ans. (d) All of the above
Ans. (a) Lime juice
36 IMASTERMND CHAPTERWISE CueariON DANK

Common/!JEror- Ans. (b) lIme present init

Bleaching powder is produced by the
action of chlorine
n
Students get confused between the gas liberated ot onode and (Ca(OH)
dry slaked lime
cathode during electrolysis of brine.
Q 80. Chemicat formula of baking soda ls:
a 84. Identify the correct representation of reactlon occurring a Mg50, [Link]
[Link] [Link]
during chloralkali process: (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
a. 2NaCi() 2H.0()2NaOH(0)+ Cl,(g)+ H,(g}) Ans. (c)MalHCO
sodium hydrogen carbonate used
is
b. 2NaCl(aq)+ 2H,0(aq) -2NaOH(0q)+Cl,(g)+4,g) Q 00. An acld (A) with
It is due to the releat
c.2NaCl{aq)+ 2H0()2NaOH(ag)+ Cl,(aq)+H(aq) making the cakes fluffy and spongy.
Here, X and Yare:
d.2NaCl(ag)+2H,O() 2NaOH(aq)+ Cl,(g)+H,o) of gas (6) In the reaction.
Ans. (d) 2NaCl(aq) 2H0()2Na0H(0q)+Cl,(g)+ H,(o) a. A: Oxalic acid:D:CO0
Q 85. Match the chemical substances given In column () with b. A:Tartaric acid :B:02

their appropriate application given in column (). C.A:Succinic acid:B:H2

d. A: Tartaric acid: B:CO2
[Link]. Column () Column (11) Ans. (d) A: Tartaric acid: B:CO2
Blcaching The acid (A) is tartaric acid that
reacts Vith sodium
(A)
powder Preparation of glass hydrogen carbonate. It makes cakes fluffy and spongy. t s
CO2 gas () in the reaction
Production of H, and due to the release of
(6) Baking soda (i) NaHCO,(s)+ (oq)
H" CO lg)+ H0)+ 5odium salt of acid
Cl2
(from any acid)
(C) Washing soda (in) |
Decolourisation Q91. Washing soda has the formula:
(o) Sodium chloride (iv)Antacid a. Na cO 7H0 b. Na CO 10H0
[Link] H0 d. NaCO
a. A-(i). (B)-0). C-(iv). D-(G) Ans. (b) NaCO 10H0
b. A-Ci). B-(i). C-(iv). D-()
cA-ii), B-(iv). C-(i),. D-(i) CT!P
Learn chemical name and formula of different chemicals
d. A-(i). B-iv). G-). D-(ii)
the
Ans. (c) A-i). B-(iv). C-6). D-(i) obtained from common salt.
Q 86. Bleaching powder's chemical name is.
Q 92. One of the constituents of baking powder is sodium
a. calcium hypo-oxychloride
hydrogencarbonate, the other constituent is:
b. calcium oxychloride (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
c calcium chloride a. hydrochloric acid b. tartaric acid
d. calcium chloro-oxide d. sulphuric acid
C. acetic acid
Ans. (b) calcium oxychloride
Ans. (b) tartaric acid
a87. In one of the industrial processes used for manufacture of
sodium hydroxide, a gas X is formed as by-product. The
a 93. Which of the following salts does not contain water of
crystallisation? (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
gas X reacts with lime water to give a compound Ywhich is b. Baking soda
a. Blue vitriol
used as a bleaching agent in chemical industry. The
compound X and Y could be:
.Washing soda d. Gypsum
Ans. (b) Baking soda
a.H and NaHCO respectively
[Link] and CaOCl, respectively a 94. Chemical formula for hydrated copper sulphate is:
c.Cl2 and CaOCl, respectively a. Cuso, 54 [Link]
[Link] and NaHCO, respectively
c.Cus04 2H0 [Link] 10HO
Ans. () Cl, and CaOCl, respectively
Ans.(a) CusO4 5H0
The gas released during the, manufacture of sodlum
hydroxide is chlorine, Cl2(X) a 95. The chemical formula of plaster of paris is:
2NaCl(aq)+ 2H,0()2NaOH(og)+Cllo)+H-lg) a.Cas0, 1/2H,0 b.CaS04 2H0
Cl is given off at anade, c.Cas0, H0 [Link] 3H,0
Ans.(a) Cas0, 1/2H0
Cl(X) when reacts with lime water (), a compound called
bleaching powder, CaQCl Is obtained.
ca(OH)(ag)+Cl,g) CaoCl6)+H00
Common/Error
Students get confused between the formula of plaster of paris
Q 88. Bleaching powder is soluble in cold water giving a milky
and gypsum.
solution due to:
a, available chlorine Q 96. Plaster of paris is made from:
b. lime present in it
a, lüme stone b. slaked lIme
[Link] carbonate formation [Link] lime d. gypsumn
d. the absorption of carbon dioxide from atmosphere Ans. (d) gVpsum
 Class 10 Term 1
I 37
Science
Plaster of paris Is prepared when sodium
caso 240- by heating gypsum
at 373 K. Q 104. Assertlon (A): Gas bubbles are observed
hydrochloric acid.
Cas0, 1/2H,0+H carbonate is added to dilute
off in the reaction.
Reason (R): Carbon dioxide is given
a97. Plaster of paris hardens by: Ans. (a)
a. giving of CO b. changlng 2HC+ Na co 2NaC+Co, t +Hp
.Combining with water into CaCO bases to
d. giving out
water Q 105. Assertion
(A): Non-metalic oxides react with
Ans.(C) combining with water
form salt and water.
acidic in nature.
Caso45H0H Caso, 2H0 Reason (R): Non-metallic oxides are
Plaster of Paris Gypsum Ans. (a)
of glucose and
98. The chemical formula of gypsum Is: Q 106. Assertion (A): The aqueous solutions
alcohol do not show acidic character.
[Link].1/2H0 [Link].2H0 glucose and alcohol do
[Link].H0 d. CaS0.3HO Reason (R): Aqueous solutions of
Ans.(b)Cas04.2H0 not give H' ions.
Ans. (a) (H,O") and
Q.107. Assertion (A): HCl
produces hydroníum ions
Assertion and Reason Type Questions chloride lons (C) in aqueous solution.
Reason (R): In presence of
water, bases give H'ions.
Directions ([Link]. 99 to 133): In the following questions, a Ans. solution because in
HCl produces H ions in aqueous H
statement of ASsertion A) is followed by a statement of Reason (R). As ions cannot exist
presence of water, acids give H' ions.
the correct choice as: molecules and form H0".
Mark
alone so it combines with water
a. Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true and Reason (R) Bases generate OH ions in water.
conductivity.
is the correct explanation of Assertion (A)
Q 108. Assertion (A): Weak acids
have low electrical
acids have equal
b. Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true but Reason (R) Reason (R): Strong acids and weak solutions.
is not the correct explanation of Assertion (A) concentration of hydrogen ions in their
c. Assertion (A) is true but Reason (R) is false Ans.(c)
hydrogen ions in
d. Assertion (A) is false but reason (R) is true Strong acids have higher concentration of
their solution that weak acids.
a 99. Assertion (A): Ammonia solution is an alkali. litmus solution into blue
a 109. Assertion (A): Bases change red
Reason (R):Ammonia solution turns blue litmus paper red. litmus solution.
aqueous solution.
Ans. (c) Reason (R): Bases give hydroxide ions in
All alkali are bases and bases turn red litmus paper blue Ans.(b)
acid.
a 100. Assertion' (A): Phenolphthalein gives pink colour in basic Q 110. Assertion (A): HCl is a strong
Reason (R): HCl is completely ionised in aqueous solution.
solution.
Reason (R): Phenolphthalein is a natural indicator. Ans. (a)
a weak acid.
Ans.() Q111. Assertion (A): Phosphoric acid is
in water
Phenolphthalein is a synthetic indicator. Reason (R): Phosphoric acid when dissolved
produces very little H*ions.
dissociates partially and
a 101. Assertion (A): Clove oil is an olfactory indicator.
Ans. (a)
Reason (R): Smell of clove can be characterised in acidic Q112. Assertion (A): HCl is a stronger
acid than acetic acid.
medium, but it cannot be recognised in basic medium. Reason (R): On dissociation, HCl yields lesser
hydrogen
ions for the same concentration as compared to acetic
Ans. (a)
a 102. Assertion (A): When zinc is added to dilute hydrochloric acid.
acid, hydrogen is given off. Ans. (c)
burning more hydrogen ion for the same
On dissociation, HCl yields
Reason (R): Hydrogen gas is tested by bringing a concentration as compared to acetic acid.
candle near gas bubbles. an acid or base in water,
Q 113. Assertion (A): While dissolving
Ans. (b) water with
hydrochloric acid to the acids must always be added slowly to
The metal zinc readily reacts with (ZnCl). constant stirring.
zinc chloride
produce hydrogen gas (4) and Reason (R): Dissolving an acid on a base in water
in highly
with zinc to
Q 103. Assertion (A): Sodium hydroxide reacts exothermic reaction.
produce hydrogen gas. Ans. (a)
metals to produce Q114. Assertion (A): To dilute concentrated
sulphuric acid, water
Reason (R): Acids reacts with active
is added to the acid slowly.
hydrogen gas.
Ans. (b)
Reason (R): A lot of heat energy will be given out in the
reacts with active dilution of concentrated sulphuric acid.
Sodlum hydroxide being an strong base, is given as
gas. The reaction Ans. (d)
metal (zinc) to produte H2
Acid must be added stowly to water with constant stirring to
follows
Zn(s)+ 2NabhH{aq) Nazn0,(aq) + H(a) avoid accidents.
38 IMASTERMIND
CHAPTERWISE OUESTION
BANK

are the products of an

Q 115. Assertion (A): Strength of acid.-base
dilution.
the acld or base decreases with a 124. Assertlon (A): Salts s
reactlon.
Reason (R): lonisation of an acid basic.
or a base increases with Reason (R): Salt may be acidic or
dilution. Ans. (b)
Ans b) a 125. Assertlon (A): AICI, Is a baslic salt.
acid and weak base,
KNOWLEDGE BCOSTER Reason (R): ALCl, Is a salt of strong
Mixing an acid or base with water results in Ans. (d)
HCl and Al{OH)
concentration of H,0 /OH ions
decrease in the ALCl is an acidic salt as it ls a salt of
base and
per unit volume.
Degree of ionisation increases a 126. Assertion (A): Salt of KNO, is formed by strong
with dilution.
weak acid.
Reason (R): Salt of NH,CI is formed by
weak base and
a116. Assertion (A):H,CO is a strong acid.
Reason (R):A strong acid dissociates completely or strong acid.
almost Ans. (d)
completely in water. (KOH) and a strong acid
Ans. (d) KNO, Is formed by a strong base
HCO is a weak acid (HNO).
Q 117. Assertion (A): Higher the H ion concentration, a 127. Assertion (A): Common salt is used for the preparation of
lower is many chemicals such as sodium hydroxide, bleaching
the pH value.
powder, baking soda, washing soda etc.
Reason (R): The pH of a neutral solution=7,
that of a basic Reason(R): Main source of sodium chloride is sea water.
solution<7 and that of an acidic solution> 7. Ans.( b)
Ans. (c)
Q128. Assertion (A):During electrolysis of concentrated aqueous
pH value less than 7 represents an acidic
solution and pH solution of sodium chloride, hydrogen is produced at
value more than 7 represents basic solution.
anode and chlorine gas is produced at cathode.
Q118. Assertion (A): Pure water is neither acidic not basic. Reason (R): lons get attracted to oppositely charged
Reason (R): The pH of a solution is inversely proportional electrodes.
to the concentration of hydrogen ions in it. Ans. (d) Chlorine gas is given off at anode and hydrogen gas at
Ans. (b) the cathode.
Q 119. Assertion (A): HCI gas does not change the colour of dry a 129. Assertion (A): The chemical name of bleaching powder is
blue litmus paper. calcium oxychloride.
Reason (R): HCl gas dissolves in the water present in wet Reason (R): Bleaching powder is used as an oxidising
litmus paper of from H ions. agent in chemical industries
Ans. (a) Ans. (b)

CT!P- Q 130. Assertion (A): Baking

process.
soda is prepared by chlor-alkali
Here,HClis not in aqueous form, nor the litmus paper is wet,
Reason (R): Brine decomposes to sodium hydroxide on
so the colour of the litmus paper does not change.
passing electricity through it.
Ans. (d)
a 120. Assertion (A): pH of ammonium chloride solution is in
acidic range [Link], 8as. H2 gas are prepared by chlor-alkali process.
Q 131. Assertion (A): Calcium sulphate hemihydrate,
Reason (R): Solution ofa salt of weak base and strong acid
is acidic. Cas0H,Ois called plaster ofparis.
Ans. (a)
Reason (R): Plaster of paris is used for producing moulds.
Ammonium chloride is formed by NH,OH (weak, base) and
for pottery and ceramics and casts of statues.
HC (strong acid)
Ans. (b)
Q 121. Assertion (A):Baking soda creates acidity in the stomach.
Reason (R): Baking soda is alkaline. Q 132. Assertion (A): Plaster of paris should be stored in a
Ans. (d) moisture proof container.
Baking soda, being alkaline, neutralises the acidity in the Reason (R): Plaster of paris is a powdery mass that absorbs
stomach and removes it. water to form a hard solid, gypsum.
Q 122. Assertion (A): If the pH inside the mouth is lower than 5.5, Ans. (a)
the decay of tooth enamel begins. Q 133. Assertion (A): Plaster of paris is used by
doctors for setting
Reason (R): The bacteria present in mouth degrades the fractured bones.
sugar and left over food particles and produce acids that Reason (R): When plaster of Paris is mixed with water and
remains in the mouth after eating. applied around the fractured limbs, it sets into a, hard
Ans. (a) mass.
a 123. Assertion (A): Antacids neutralise the effect of extra acid Ans. (a)
produced in the stomach during indigestion and thus Plaster of paris when mixed with water and applied around
provide relief. the fractured limbs, it sets into a hard mass and
Reason (R): Antacids are mild bases. keeps the
bone joints in a fixed position. So, it is
Ans. (a) commonly used for
setting fractured bones
 Science Class 10 Tem i 39

Case Based QUESTIONS

Case Study1
Out of these, the natural indicators are
An indicator is a special chemical and
that changes its colour al and b
to indicate the presence of a chemical
to conlim the presence of substance. It is used
an acid, a base or a neutral
c and only
onty
dLl and
solution. Litus paper Ans. (c) and
[Link] a purple is the mast commonly used 5. The figure given below represents the experiment caried
dye which extracted from
Lichen. Litmus paper comes is a
plant out between conc sulphuric acid and sodium chloride,
rd. in wo colours-blue and which react with each other to form Ha gas

Litms paper-
HO gas

Delivery tube
-Ccrk
-Test tube

Conc HSO
- NaCi
There are many other natural materials like turmeric,
red
cabbage leaves, coloured petals of some Blue litmus paper is brought near the mouth of the
flowers such as
petunia. which indicate the presence delivery tube to check the presence of Ha acid but no
of acid or base in a change is observed in the colour of litnus paper because:
solution. These are called acid-base indicators.
These a The itmus paper used is dny
indicators tell us whether a substance is acidic or basic by
showing change in colour. b The litmus paper used is moist
Blue litmus paper doas not charge is colcur with an acid
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer
of d The itmus paper is kept very close to the mouth of the
the following questions delivery tube
Q1. Litmus solution is a purple dye, which is extracted from: Ans.(a) The itmus paper used is dry
a. Lichen an algae b. Petunia. an algae
cLichen a fungus d. Petunia. a fungus
Case Study 2
Ans. (a) Lichen an algae Indicatoris a chemical compound which is added to th
Q2. The sample of soil froma particular place was tested for its
solution in very small amount to detect its acidic or basie
nature As they show colour change in acidic and basic
pH value. It came out to be 5. Which one of the following
should be added to the soil to make it suitable for the plant medium, they are also called acid-base indicators. In other
growth? words "an acid-base indicator is that substance which
(A) Calcium
possesses one colour in acidic medium and a different
chloride (B) Caldium Hydroxide () Calcium
oxide. Choose the corect option:
colour in alkaline medium"
Indicators, basically, are coloured oryanic substapces
a. Both (A) and (B) b. Both (8) and (C)
either extracted from plants (natural indicators) or
cOnly (A) [Link] (C)
Ans. (b) Both (6) (C). synthesised in the laboratory (synthetic indicators). A few
and
common acid base indicators ae Litmus
Q3. Which of the following statements is true for soap
phenolphthalein, methyl orange etc. In addition to these
solution?
there are some nanurally occurring substancæs which have
a. It changes blue litmus to colourless
different smell in acidic and basic madium. Thee
b. It changes red litmus to colourless
substances are called olfactory indicators
cit changes red litrnus to blue Read the above passage carefully and she the answer of
d. It changes blue litmus to red.
Ans. (c) It changes red litrmus to blue
the following questions
Q1. Which one of the following will tum red litmus blue?
Q4. Consider the following indicators:
I. Vanilla a. Vinegar b. Baking soda solution
I1. Turmeric
cLemon juice d Soft drinks
Ans. (b) Baking soda solution
ll. Red cabbage leaves Baking soda (NaHCO,) is basic in nature.
V. Phenolphthalein
40 IMASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE OuEGTION DANK
Phenolpht Mothyl
Dlue
Red lItmus haleln orange
a2. solutlon turns blue litmus red. The pH of the solutlon ls
A Sample lltmus Indlcator
solutlon solutlon solutlon Indlcator
probably:
a. 8 b. 10 c. 12 d.6 No colour Colourless Red/Pink
HCI Red
Ans. (d) 6 change
The solution turns blue litmus red, hence it is acidic No colour Colourless Red/Pink
HSOA Red
a3. A solution in test tube 'A turns red litmus blue, cvolves change
hydrogen gas on reaction with zinc and does not react with No colour Colourless Red/Pink
HNO Red
sodium carbonate. Whereas, solution In test tube 'B" turns change
blue litmus red, liberates hydrogen gas on reactlon wlth CH,COOH Nocolour Red Colourless Red/Pink
zinc and cvolves carbon dioxlde gas with carbonate. change
ldentify A' and B' No colour Pink Yellow
NaOH Dlue change
a.'A' is an acid, '6 is a base.
b. 'A Is a base, 'B is an acid. No colour Pink Yellow
Ca(OH)2 Blue
c. Both 'A' and 'B are bases change
d. Both 'A and 'B are acids. No colour Pink Yellow
KOH Blue change
Ans. (b) A is a base, '5 is an acid.
Acids turn blue litmus red, liberate hydrogen gas with zlnc No colour Pink Yellow
Mg(OH)2 Blue change
and evolve carbon dioxide gas with metal carbonates. Bases Yellow
Pink
turn red litmus blue, evolve hydrogen gas with zinc and do (becomes (becomes
not react with metal carbonates No colour colourless colourless
NH,OH Blue change
Q4. Select the incorrect option. after after some
sometime) | time)
Colour in Colour in
Indicator acidic basic Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
medium medium the following questions:
Litmus (Purple) Blue red litmus
Q1. Which of the following substances does not turn
Red
Flower of solution to blue?
hydrangea plant Blue Pink a. KOH [Link](OH) cCH,COOH d. NHOH
(Blue)
Ans. (c) CHCOOH
Red cabbage juice .
C(Purple
Turmeric Juice
Red or Pink Green Q 2.
acid it is .
Phenolphthalein's colour in basic medium is

yellow. pink
but in

D. Colourless Yellow a. pink, colourless b.

(Yellow)
C. pink, orange d. blue, red
a. B b. A c.D d.C Ans. (a) pink, colourless
Ans.(c) D Q 3. What is the colour of phenolphthalien in calcium
Turmeric juice is yellow in acidic medium, but turns reddish hydroxide solution?
brown with basic medium. a. pink [Link] c. colourless d. blue
Q5. Which one of the following can be used as an acid-base Ans.(a) pink
indicator by visually impaired student? Q4. The colour of methyl orange in neutral solution is:
a. Litmus [Link] red b. orange c. yellow d. purple
cClove oil d. Both b. and c. Ans. (b) orange
Ans. (d) Both b. and c. a5. Which of the following cannot act as an indicator?
Onion and clove oil are olfactory indicators, So, their smell is a. Methyl orange b. Methyl chloride
different in acidic and basic medium which can be detected C. Turmeric juice d. Phenolphthalein
easily by a visually impaired student Ans.(b) Methyl chloride

Case Study3 Case Study 4

Acids turn blue litmus red but have no effect on red litmus. The acidic behaviour of acids is due to the presence of
Bases tum red litmus blue but have no effect on blue hydrogen (H*) ions in them. They produce hydrogen ions
litmus. The sample in which phenolphthalein remains in the presence of water. Water is a polar solvent and this
colourless while methyl orange changes to pink/red are property of water helps in weakening the bond between
acids while the samples in which phenolphthalein colour the ions and makes them soluble. Hence, acids and bases
changes to pink and methyl orange changes to yellow are produce ions in aqueous solutions.
bases. Some observations of different sample solutions in It may be noted that a dry HCI
litmus, phenolphthalein and methyl orange indicator are gas or a solution
hydrogen chloride in organic,
given in the table. non-polar solvents like
 Scionce Class 10 I Term 1 41

oluene or benzene do not show acidic Higher the pH of the solutlon,

more basic is the solution
b.
properties. This is [OH ) lons
because hydrogen chloride does and higher is the
not undergo ionisation in lower (OH) lons than solution
toluene. Thus, solution Q(pH 9) has
The reason why HCI splits SlpH-13) Utmus solution
into 11 and CI ions in [Link] P(pH- 1)1s acidic w/hich turns blue
presence of water lics in the
fact that water molecules, CpH 9) is basic which turns red
being polar, pull the H"and red whereas solution
Ci ions apart and thus, the litmus solution blue.
bond in HCl is broken. acidic while solution S(pH =13)is
d. 5olution P(pH- 1is highly
ClpH=9) is weakly basic.
hlghly baslc and solution

Case Study 5
ECr Whenever a solution has a pH of less
than 7, it will be an
solution having a pH of 4
acidic solution. For example, a
-Water it will be an acid). Please note
molecule will be acidic in nature (or For
is, the lower will be its pH.
that more acidic a solution
I is much more acidic than
Dissociation of HCl into example, a solution of pH
H' andCI ions in presence of words, a solution of pH
1

water. another solution of pH4. In other

than another acid having
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of will be a much more stronger acid
solutions having pH of 0, 2
1.
the following questions. pH 4 (see the figure). The
be strong acids. And the
a1. ldentify the wrong statement. and 3 are usually considered to
to be weak
a. Higher the hydronium lon concentration, lower Is the pH solutions having pH of4,5 and 6 are considered
acidity of a substanceis
value. acid solutions. It is clear that the
Strongly acidic substances have a very
b. Universal indicator is used to judge how strong a given related to its pH.
acid or base is. low pH. In fact, lower the pH, the
stronger the acid.
cAs the pH value increases from 7 to 14, it represents
increase in H"ion concentration in the solution.
d. Value less than 7 on the pH scale represents an acidic
solution.
Ans. (c) As the pH value increases from 7 to 14. it represents
increase in H'ion concentration in the solution.
a2. If the pH of a solution is 8, then its [H*]ion is:
a. log 10-8 10 c.108 d. B
Ans. (c) 10-
a3. pH of neutral salt is:
.7 b. <7 C.>7 d.O
Ans. (a) 7 (a) Hydrochloric acid (b)Acetic acid:
Strong acid Weak acid.
Q4. Which of the following compounds does not give Hions
in aqueous solution? the answer of
Read the above passage carefully and give
a. HPO [Link] the following questions.
[Link] d. CHCOOH Its pH is likely to be:
Q1. A solution turns red litmus blue.
Ans. (b)
CHOH b. 4
a.1
CHOH is not an ionic compound, it is a covalent compound .5 d. 10
and hence does not give H* lons in aqueous solution. Ans. (d) 10
Q5. Four solutions labelled as P.Q,R and have
S pH values 1,9,
pH values of six solutions A to F are given below
following statements a2. The
3 and 13 respectively. Which of the A=Q,B=11,C=6 D=3 E =13, F-8
about the given solutions is incorrect? Which of the above solutions are acids?
a. Solution P has higher concentration of
hydrogen ions than
R.
a.A,C,D F b. A, B. C
d. A. C. D, E
solution c.A,C, D,
hydroxide ions than
Solution Qhas lower concentration of
b. Ans. (a) A, C. D

solution S. Q3. Fresh milk has a pH of 6. When milk changes

into curd, the
solution blue.
c Solution P and Q will turn red litmus pH value will:
solution Qis weakly basic. b. become less than 65
d. SolutionPis highly acidic while a. become 7
litmus solution blue.
Ans. (C) Solution P and Q will turn red C. become more than 7
d. remain unchanged
more acidic is the solution
a. Lower the pH of the solution, Ans. (6) become less than 6
which
and higher is the H*] ions. When milk is converted into curd, lactic acid is formed
H] ions than solution
Thus, solution P(pH=1) has higher is more acidic in nature.
R(pH=3)
44 MaSTERMIND CHAPTERWISE UESTION
BANK

a2. Nature of aqueous solution of common salt is:

a. acidic b. alkaline
basic d. neutral
Ans. (d) neutral
Aqueous solution of common salt is neutral in
nature. BLEACHING
NaCl+H0 NaOH + POWDER
Strong tase d
Strong acid
03. In the given series of reactions, Y and Z respectively are

NaCl H0+CO+ NH X+Y

a-H0-Co
Q20H
give the answer of
(Q is used in removing permanent hardness of water.) Read the gven passage carefully and
a. [Link] b. NHCL Naco, thefollowing questions:
given reaction.
[Link] [Link] [Link] Q1. Identify the product X in the
Ans. (b) [Link] CO3 Ca(OH),+C,X+H,0
NaCl CO2+ NH a. CaOCl [Link]
H,0 NaHCO + NHC
( cCa(CiO,) d Caco
a-H,0-cO Ans. (a) CaOCl
NaCO 10H,0-10H1acO HO
Ca(OH)Cl COCl
Washing soda Calcum pyxhiorxe
(0)

a4. Which of the following compounds is alkaline in aqueous 02. Bleaching powder is also known as:
medium? a calcium Cxychloride b catclu aypochlorite
a. Na CO b NaCt
[Link] of Lime dAllof tese.
cHCO Ans. (d) All of these
[Link] Q3. Bleaching powdet is used as:
Ans. (a) Na C0
WhentiaCo, (Sodlum carbonate) is dissolved In water. then a bleaching agent in testde. paper and jute industry
forms alkaline aqueous solution due to the formation of
t b disintectat for water to mmske water tree of germs
NaOH which is a strong alkau COdising agent in many chemical itndstries
5. Some statements regarding salt NaCl are given below:
d All ot the ažove
Ans. (4) A of the atove
() It is prepared by chlor-alkali proces
(11) It is a white
Q4. Bleaching powder gives smell of chlorine because it
crystalline substance
(11) It also exists in the form of rocks and is called rock salt.
a s unstable
(IV) It is a neutral salt, pH vatue of NaCl is 7
t goves cricene crn eeposuire to atnosphere
cisamiature of chiorne and staied ime
Select the correct statements. dcontai excPEs of Chiorine
a t and tl only Ans. ()gves chilorine on esposare to atmosphere
b. ll and IV only
Ekeathng poder ves thlprirne on expo0s4re to ar by
cland IV only reacting wtn E0,
d
Ans. (d) ,l and V
1 and
IV

only
only

a
CanciCOCac0C
5. Select the corneca statementts) regarding bleaching
Sodium hydroxde (Na0H) is prepared by chior-alkati
powder.
process
a is pale yetlow powciar having sImetl of chlorine
Case Study 10 t is sparingty solutle in water and gives milby 5uspension
b.
Bleaching powder is also known as chioride of liune. It is when diss2ved in water
solid and yellowish wtite in colour. Bleaching powder can A bleaxhing powder gves nastent oyeen it shows
bleactung prgerty
he easily identified by the strong smell of chlorine. When
d Ail ef thë atbeve
calcium hyrovide (slakrd lime) reats with chlorine, it Ans (d) Al of the atove
gives calcium oxychloride (bleacting powder) and water
formad Aqucous solution cf eacting pouder is busic in Case Study 11

nature. The material to te bleached is first passed thrvugh A compound. X of sxdiurm forms
a wute powder. It ina
sotution of NaOH to remove greasy marter, then it is passed constituent of baking poader and
is used in some antacid
through aquews solution cof bleaching powder arnd ver dl When heatoed it gives a
mpound, f which is anhydrus
HC solution. HCI reacts with bheacthing powder to liberute ad absortbs watet to becuic a hydratcd
salt, When thas
nascent oygen which Neaches matcrial salt is icp in pen air,
it koses waler molecules in a
 Science IClass 10 Term 1 45
process called efflorescencc. give the answer of
When dissolved in waler it Read the glven pussuge curefully and
forms a strong base and a
weak acid, Z. the following questions.
Read the above passage
carefully and give the answer o) Q1. Some of the uses of washing
soda are given below:
the following questions: hardness of water.
() It ls used for removing permanent
a1. What is the compound, X? (1) It is used in glass industry.
a. NaHCO [Link] CO (1I) It is used in paper industry.
[Link] compounds
d. NaCl (IV) It is used in the manufacture of sodium
Ans.(a) NaHCO
such as borax.
The compound of sodium that is of washing
powder and is used
a constituent of baking Select the correct option regarding uses
in antacids, is sodium hydrogen soda.
carbonate (NaHCO). b.(1) and (l)
a.) and () (1) and (V)
a2. The compound, Y is: c. (1) and (v) d. (0. (1).
a. NaHCO b.NaCO3 Ans. () (0.(19). (n) and (V)
[Link] -10HO with water when
d. NaCl
Q 2. What products will be formed along
Ans. (b) NaC0 sodium carbonate reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid?
2NaHCO
(X1 a NaCO + CO +H0 a. CO and NaCl b. Na and CO0

Sodiumhydrogen Y) and CO
c. NaCl d. Na and CO
Anhydrous
Carbonate
sodium carbonate Ans. (c) NaCl and CO2
a3. What is the nature of the solution formed by dissolvingY in with brisk
Na CO reacts with dilute acids to give Co gas
water?
effervescence.
a. Alkaline b. Acidic 2NaCl(ag) + HO()+ CO,g)1
[Link] NaCO(s)+ 2HCl{09) Carbon dioode
d. It remains insoluble Sodium DiL hydrochloric Sodum Water
Ans.(a) Alkaline carbonate acia chloride

Na CO+2H0 2NaOH+ HCO3 Q3. Chief raw materials for the manufacture of washing soda
Strong base (Z) are:
Weak acid
NaOH ionises a. sodium chloride, ammonia and imestone
completely to give a large amount of OH ions
b. ammonia, sodium hydrogen carbonate and copper
whereas HCO, ionises partially to give a small amount of H*
ions. Hence. the solution is overall alkaline. sulphate
sodium hydroxide, calcium chloride and ammonia
C
Q4. Identify the compound, Z.
calcium chloride, sodium chloride and copper sulphate.
d.
a.CO2 [Link] C NaOH d.H0
Ans. (b) HC0 Ans. (a) sodium chloride, ammonia and limestone
Z is carbonic acid, a weak acid formed when NaCO, is Chief raw materials for the manufacture of washing soda
dissolved in water are sodium chloride (NaCl), ammonia (NH,) and imestone
(CacO)
Q5. Sodium carbonate is a basic compound because it is a salt
of a Q 4. What is the action of sodium carbonate on litmus paper?
strong acid and strong base
a. a. Turns red litmus blue b. Turns blue litmus red
C No change on litmus d. Both a. and b.
weak acid and weak base
b.
c. strong acid and weak base Ans. (a) Turns red litmus blue because it is derived from a weak
d. weak acld and strong base acid and strong base.
Ans. (d) weak acid and strong base Sodium carbonate turns red litmus blue.
Case Study 12 a5. What products will be obtained when solution of sodium
carbonate and slaked lime is heated?
The preparation of washing soda is carried out through [Link] and NaOH
a. NaOH and CaCl,
following steps: d. NaCl and CacO
cNaHCO and NaOH
Step-I: Manufacture of sodium hydrogen carbonate Ans. (b) CaCO, and NaOH
NaCl+ H,0+ NH+CO NaHCO+NH,CI Sodium hydroxide and calcium carbonate are formed when
Sodium
hydrogen carbonate the solution of sodium carbonate and slaked lime,.Ca(OH), is
Step-I1: Thermal decomposition of sodium hydrogen heated.
Na cO,+Ca(0H)2 2Na0H +CacO
carbonate: When dry crystals of sodium hydrogen
carbonate are heated strongly, they decompose to Torm Case Study 13
anhydrous sodium carbonate (soda ash).
A girl met with an accident and his leg get fractured. She
2NaHCO, Na, C0,() +CO, ()+H,O(g)
() went to an orthopedics doctor for treatment. On
Step-I11: Recrystallisation of sodium carbonate: Sodium
recrystallised to form crystals
examination, the doctor mixed a white powder in water
carbonate thus obtained is
and applied it to her leg along with the cotton and gauze.
of washing soda. After a while, it turned into white, solid, hard mass. He
Na, CO(s)+10H,O(0) Na,CO, 10H,O(s) said that it would support her fractured bone in the right
Anhydrous Washing soda
sodium carbonate
position.
46 IMASTERMNO CHAPTERWISE OuESTION DANK calclum sulnh
praduct Is hate
Reactant is evpsurm,
C.
hemihydrate hemihydrate, product
d. Reactant Is
calcium sulphate
EVpsum hemlhycdrate, produrt
calclum sulphate tt is
Ans. (d) Reactant Is
BYpsum

Case Study 14 (PoP) is calcium sulphsu

Chemicaly, Plaster of Paris half imoleculc of waler
hemihylrate, i.e., containing
represented by the formul a,
crystallisation. It is
molecule of water
Read the above passage carcfully and give the answer of CaSO 1/211,0. llalf one waler molecule is shared
crystallisation means that Hence, we al
thefollowing questions, units of CasO4.
a 1. After treatment, the doctor repacked the white powder by two formula
(CasO, )2 *H20. The nam
represent its formula as because f
back into moisture proof, alrtight contalner. Why? to this compound
plaster of paris was given gypsum which Wa
as
a. The fungus growth will occur in open made from
the first time, it was
b. The powder would react to moisture and turn into solld
mainly found in Paris.
carefully and give the answer ot
mass Read the abore passage
c. The powder with react to sunlight and turn Into solid mass
d. To prevent the stealing of the powder as it ls very
thefollowing questioms: molecules of g9ypsum and plaster
Q1. The difference in water
expensive
of paris is: d. 3/2
Ans. (b) The powder would react to moisture and turn into solld a. 5/2 b.2 c. 1/2
mass Ans. (d) 3/2
of paris is CasoH0
02. What is white powder called as? Gypsum is Ca50, 2H,0 and plaster
a. Talcum powder b. Paris of plaster =
c. Plaster of paris d. Copper sulphate Difference in number of water molecules 2-
Ans. () Plaster of paris
Q2. Plaster of Paris hardens by:
Q3. The graph shows the porosity and expansion of plaster b. changing into CaC03
a. giving off CO
with respect to water content. [Link] with water d. giving out water
Ans. (c) combining with water
0.30%
60% Plaster of paris is hardened by combining with water.
is incorrect?
F0.25% Q3. Which of the following statement
50%1 Expansion to ornate designs on walls and
a. Plaster of paris is used
F0.20% ceillings
3 40%1 b. Onheating gypsum above 373 K, CaS0,is obtained.
Porosity . Dead burnt plaster is CaSO 2H0.
30% F0.15% d. Setting of plaster is due to its hydration into gypsum.
Ans. () Dead burnt plaster is CasO4 2H,0.
0.10%
Dead burnt plaster is Ca50, (anhydrous calclum sulphate).
-
20%1
90 80 70 60 50 40
Water: Plaster ratio a4. Select the incorrect statement with respect to gypsum:
a. It is slightly soluble in water.
At what temperature, the reaction would occur? b. It is also known as alabaster.
a.373 K b. 673 K [Link] heating gypsum at 373 K, it loses water molecules
C. 273 K d. 573 K and becomes calcium sulphate hemihydrate.
d. Chemical formula of gypsum is CasO4 /2H:0
Ans. (a) 373 K Ans.(d) Chemical formula of gypsum is CasO, 1/2H0
Q4. The reaction involved in the formation of white mass is: Gypsum:Cas0, 2H,0
a. Combustion b. Oxidation Plaster of paris: CaSO4 1/2H0
c Mineralisation d. Crystallisation Q5. Plaster of paris is obtained by:
Ans. (d) Crystallisation a. adding water to calcium sulphate
Crystallisation is defined as a process by which a chemicalis b. adding sulphuric acid to calcium hydroxide
converted from a liquid solution into a solid crystalline state [Link] EVpsum to a very high temperature
d. heating gVPsum to 100°C
a 5. Study the following reaction and choose the correct
Ans. (d) heating gypsum to 100°C
option:
Gypsum on heating upto 1oo'c gives plaster of paris.
CasoH,0H,0Caso, 24,0
a. Reactant is calcium hemihydrate. product is BYpsum
CaSO4
Gypsum
2H0 CasO p1Hop
Plaster of paris
b. Reactant is gypsum. product is calcium hemihydrate
3 Metals and Non-metals
Fastrack REVISICN
Scanthe QR Code
to know more about this
Chapter

tements are
Elem mainly divided into two
groups namely metals and MNEMONICS
serles?
+metals, but there are certain
non-m elements which show properties of Concept:Howto remember reactivty
CAlling Me A ZebralLike Her Call Smart
hoth metals as well as non-metals. These are known as metallolds. Mnemonies: Please Stop
Elements which form positive lons by losing electrons are called Goat.
Interpretatlon:
metals. CA- Calcium
P S- Sodium
Potass/um
Metals are hard solid substances, malleable, ductile, sonorous and M-Magneslum A- Aluminium Z Zinc
are good conductors of heat and electricity. I
Iron Lead -H Hydrogen

CCopper Silver G Gold

Almost all the metals combine with oxygen (or alr) to form metal
Oxides which are basic in nature. which form negative lons by
gaining
Non-metals are those
Sodium and potassium react so vigorously with oxygen that they electrons.
liquid or gas. They are
catch fire it kept in the open. Hence, to prevent accidental fires, they Non-metals occur in the form of solid,
in nature and are poor
are kept immersed in kerosene oil. non-malleable, non-ductile, non-sonorous
graphite.
conductors of heat and electricity except
Anodising is a process of forming a thick oxide layer on aluminium, acidic oxides or neutral
Non-metals react with oxygen to form
which prevents the metal from corrosion.
oxides.
or steam but the
Most of the metal oxides are insoluble in water. But some of the Non-metals do not usually react with water
form acids.
metal oxides dissolve in water to form alkalis. Metal oxides which non-metal oxides react with water to
Non-metals do not react with dilute acids to
release hydrogen gas.
react with both acids as well as bases to produce salt and water are a
The compounds formed due to the transfer of electrons from
called amphoteric oxides. Aluminium oxide and zinc oxide are as ionic compounds or
metal to a non-metal are known
examples of amphoteric oxides. 3 lsa r electrovalent compounds.
Formation of Sodium Chloride
Al,O +6Hcl 2AlC e
+340 2,81
A minium
ride
Chionde (Sodium cation)

AlLO +2NaOH2NaAlO2 + H,Oo Cl

2,8,7
+e CI
Chloride anion

a
sodium
aluminate

Metals react with water to produce respective metal hydroxides and

hydrogen gas. Formation of Magnesium Chloride:
Metal +Water Metal oxide + Hydrogen Mg Mg4 2e
2,8,2 2,8
Metal oxide + Water Metal hydroxide (Magnesium cation)

Except a few less reactive metas (such as Cu, Hg, Ag, Pt, etc.), all
hydrochloric acid to
a CI
,8,7
e C
2,8,8
metals react with dil. sulphuric acid and dil. (Chloride anion)

produce salt and hydrogen gas.

Hydrogen gas is evolved when a metal reacts with nitric acid
not Mg
because it is a strong oxidising agent.
Reactive metal can displace comparatively less reactive metal
a
Properties of lonic Compounds:
from its compounds in aqueous salt solution or in molten form. They are generally solid and hard because of the strong force of
Metal A+ Salt solution of B Salt solution of A + Metal B attraction between the positive and negative ions.
(Metal A is more reactive than B) have high melting and boiling point.
The reactivity series isa list of metals arranged
in the orderof their They are soluble in water but insoluble in solvents such as petrol etc.
decreasing reactivity. The order of reactivity of metals is They do not conduct electricity in solid state but conduct electricity
in molten state.
K> Na> Ca>Mg> Al>Zn> Fe > Pb»H> Cu> Ag> Au.
48 MASTER MIND CHAPTERWISE uEBTION DANK

Objective TYPE QUESTIONS

. They are brittle easily
Multiple Choice Questions capable to form anions
d. They are
valence electrons
Ans. (a) They have one to three
up their electrons and
form
Q1. In Metal can easly glven one to three valenco
general, the number of electrons in the outermost shell
electroposltlve lons. They have anlons
of a metal atom is: and do not form
electrons, They are not brittle
a. b. 1 to 3 c.5to 8 d.8
Q8. Which of the following
non-metals is a liquid?
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
Ans. (b) 1 to 3
02. Which of the following properties is not a characteristic of b. Bromine
a. Carbon
metals? d. Sulphur
[Link]
a. Metallic lusture
Ans. (b) Bromine
b. High density a property of non-metals?
c. Hardness Q9. Which of the following is not
a. They are nelther malleable
nor ductile
d. Low melting and boiling point
b. They are brittle
Ans. (d) Low melting and boiling point
C. They are sonórou5
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER and electricity (except
d. They are poor conductor of heat
Metals are lustrous, malleable, ductile, hard, good conductors of graphite)
heat and electricity and have high melting points. Ans. (c) They are sonorous
on striking
Q 3.
Almost all the non-metals do not produce sound
Generally, metals are solid in nature. Which one of the
Thus, they are not sonorous.
following metals is found in liquid state at room characteristics of metal?
Q 10. Which of the following is not a
temperature? (NCERTEXEMPLAR)
a. Malleable b. Shining Surface
a. Na b. Fe
c. Ductile d. None of these
cCr d. Hg
Ans. (d) Hg Ans. (d) None of these
Q 4. Generally, non-metals are not lustrous. Which of the Q11. .. is the most ductile metal
b. Copper
following non-metal is lustrous? (NCERTEXEMPLAR) [Link]
c. Aluminium d. Lead
a. Sulphur b. Oxygen
Ans. (a) Gold
c Nitrogen d. lodine
Ans. (d) lodine a12. The most malleable metal is:
a. aluminium b. aluminium
Q5. The electronic configurations of three elementsX, Y andz
are X = 2, 8; Y = 2, 8, 7 and Z = 2, 8, 2. Which of the .gold d lead
following is correct? (NCERT EXEMPLAR) Ans. () gold
a. X is a metal Q 13. On hammering change of metal into thin sheets, is
b.Y is a metal called ****

cZis a non-metal a. ductility b. malleability

d. Y is a non-metal and Z is a metal c. lustrous d. None of these
Ans. (d) Y is a non-metal and Z isa metal Ans. (b) malleability
Element Y has 1 less electron to complete its octet, which is a
property of non-metals.
-Common/Eror
On the other hand, element Z has 2 extra electrons, no it will Students get confused between the definition of malleability
lose electrons to become stable which is a property of and ductility.

Q 6.
metals.
014. Metals are . conductors of heat and electricity.
Which of the following hon-metal has highest melting
[Link] b. bad
point? poor d. None of these
a. Graphite b. Carbon
Ans. (a) good
c. lodine d. Diamond
015. An example of a metal which can be cut with a knife
Ans. (d) Diamond
a. diamond b. gallium
is.
CT!P: C. mercury d. sodiumn
Make a list and learn the examples of metals and non-metals Ans. (d) sodium
possessing different physical properties.
CT!P.
Q7. Which of the following is a characteristic of metals: Alkali metals (lithium, sodium, potassium)
are so soft that the
can be cut with a knife.
a. They have one to three valence electrons
b. They have 4 to 8 valence electrons
 Science
1
Class 10 I Term 1 49
which of the following b () and (v)
metals? property is generally
not shown a. () and (9
Electrical conduction b. (NCERT EXEMPLAR) b () and (v) d (5) and ()
Sonorous in nature Ans (c) () and (w)
cDullness
Dullness
[Link]
a 23. Generally non-metals are not conductors of electricity.
Ans. ()
Which of the following is a good conductor
of electricity?
17. Observe the given figure (NCERT EEMPLAR)
follows: and answer the question that
a. Diamond b. Graphite cSudphur d Fullerene
Stand -Metal wire Ans. (b) Graphite material
Clamp a 24. Electrical wires have a coating of an insulatingDEMPLAR)
(NCERT
The material, generally used is:
Rree end bwie
b graphite
Lwax a sulphur
-Burner PVC d All cf these
Ans. (c)PVc
among metals is:
0 25. The poorest conductor of heat
b. mercuny ccalcium d sodiumn
a. lead
Which of the following metals
can be suitable for the Ans. (a) lead and
experiment? metals is used for making bells
a 26. Which property ofinstruments and Violin?
Iron (ii) Gallum strings of musical like Sitar
(in Caesium (iv) Copper [Link]üty
a Sonorousness
a. 6) and () b. (i) and (m) Ductility
c d Conductivity
c(i) and (i) d. (i) and (v) Ans. (a) Sonorousness
Ans (a) ) and (iv)
o18. The best conductors of heat are and . . a 27. Select the
a. sulphur b. hydrogen
odd one out:
c iodine d potassium
a. lead. mercury [Link], caesium Ans. (d) potassiurn
c silver. copper d. sodium. potassiumn Except potassium all other all
non-metals.
Ans. () silver. copper is an acidic oxide?
.
. 0 28. Which one among the following
019. Most metal oxides are n nature whereas non-metal a Na0 [Link] c CO2 dAlO
oxides are. Or
Ans. (c) C0
a. acidic. basic. neutral b. neutral acidic, basic about the non-metals.
a29. Pickthe statement which is correct
c basic adidic. neutral d. None of these a. Br is an example of iquid non-metal
(c) basic. acidic, neutral electricity
Ans.
. b. Graphite is a good conductor of
a 20. PVC stands for *********
Most of the non-metal oxides are acidic
c
a. Polyvinyl chloride b. Polythene vinyl chloride d. All of the above
c Polyvanadium carbide d. All of these Ans. () Al of the above
Ans. (a) Polyvinyl
chloride a 30. is a process of forming a thick oxide layer of
a 21. Observe the given figure and answer the question that aluminium.
folows: a. Anodising b. Galvanisation
cGangue d None of these
Bulb Ans. (a) Anodising
Batteny
(
Q31. The ability of metals to be drawn into thin
wire is known
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
as:
a. ductility b. malleability
C sonorousity d. conductivity
(Clips Switch
Ans. (a) ductility
Q 32. Aluminium is used for making cooking utensils Which of
responsible for
Insert sample the following properties of aluminium are(NCERTEXEMPLAR)
to be tested the same?
Bulb glows, when wire is placed between the () Good thermal conductivity
terminals A and B. () Good electrical conductivity
(i) Aluminium (ii) Ductility
Copper Civ) High melting point
(ii) Iron (iv).Silver
a. (i) and (i) b. (i) and (ii)
a. () and (ii) b. (). (i) and (ii)
d. All of these c.(i) and (ii) d.) and (iv)
cOnly (iv)
Ans. (d) ) and (iv)
Ans. (d) All of these
Q 33. Which of the following metals reacts vigorously with
a 22. Which of the following metals will melt if you keep them
oxygen?
on your palm? a. Zinc b. Iron [Link] d. Copper
) Magnesium (i) Mercury
(iv) Gallium Ans. (c)Magnesium
(ii) Caesium
50 MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE CQuEsTION BANK
water. Sodium oxida
Q34. An element A is soft and can be cut with a knife. This is very (1i) mctal oxides are soluble in
All
dissolve in water to produe
reactive to air and cannot be kept open in alr. It reacts and potassium oxide
vigorously with water. Identify the element from the alkalies.
following. (NCERT EXEMPLAR) (11) Aluminium oxide and zine
oxide, show both acidic a
a. Mg Na well as basic behaviour.
same rate.
C.P d. Ca (iv) All metals react with oxygen at the
b. () and (iv)
Ans. (b) Na a. (1t) and (Iv)
d. (i) and (ii)
035. Although metals form basic oxides, which of the following9 c.() and (i)
metals form an amphoteric oxide? Ans. (c) () and ()
N. Identify them by using
Q43. There arc four metals K, L, M and
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
a. Na b. Ca c. Al d. Cu the hints given below:
Ans. (c) Al K forms basic oxide.
Q 36. An element reacts with oxygen to give a compound with a L forms amphoteric oxide.
high Lting point. This compound is soluble in water. The Oxide of M dissolved in water to form alkali.
element is likely to be: N does not react with water at all.
a. calcium b. carbon a. K>Zn, L-> Al, M-> Na, N- Fe
[Link] d. Iron b. K Fe. L> Na, M>K, N-> Zn
Ans. (a) calcium C. KK, L Cu, M- Pb, N>Na
2Ca+02 2Ca0 (ionic compound) d. K-> Cu, L> Zn, M> K, N- Pb
Ca0+HO Ca(OH Ans. (d) K-> Cu, L->Zn, M> K, N-> Pb
Q37. Aluminium does not oxidise readily in air because:
a 44. Al,0, +2NaOH H20,
a. Al(OH)3 b. Na0 C. NaAlO d. AlNa02
a. it is high in the electrochemical series
b. it is low in the electrochemical series Ans. (c) NaAlO
c. the metal does not combine with oxygen Q 45. Example of an amphoteric oxide is:
d. the metal is covered with a layer of oxide which does not a. Naz0 b. K20 c.AlO3 d. Mgo
rub off Ans. (c) Al20
Ans. (d) the metal is covered with a layer of oxide which does Q 46. Which of the following do not react with oxygen even at
not rub off high temperatures?
a 38. Metal M reacts with oxygen to form metallic oxide MO. . Zinc b. Gold
This oxide reacts with moisture and carbon dioxide of the Silver
C. d. Both b. and c.
atmosphere to forma basic carbonate metal M. The metal Ans. (d) Both b. and C.
M is: Q 47. A student writes two incomplete chemical reactions.
[Link] b. Fe
C. Zn d. Cr X-P (s)+50,0)
Ans. (a) Cu
Y-2Mgls)+0, g)
Since, the metal forms an the metal
oxide MO, is divalent. Which option completes the reactions to form a balanced
Since it forms a basic carbonate when exposed to moisture chemical equation?
and carbon dioxide, therefore it must be copper. a.X-P50(s): Y (Mg0)2s) -

2Cu+CO2 +02 +HO CuCOg Cu(OH)2 b.X-4PO10(s): Y -4Mg0(s)

Basic (copper carbonate) c.X-P,010(s): Y 2Mg0S) -
From moist air

a 39. Metals combine with oxygen to form

.. Oxides. d.X-5P02(s): Y Mg202(5) -

a. acidic b. basic Ans. (c)X-P4010(S): Y -2MgO(s)

C. neutral d. amphoteric P,(s)+502(g)PO10ls)
Ans. (b) basic 2Mg(s)+Og) 2Mg0(s)
Q [Link] oxides which react with both acidic as well as bases 48. When a metal reacts with oxygen gas, the product is
a. metal hydroxide
.
to produce salt and water are called... oxides.
a. acidic b. basic b. metal oxide
C. neutral d, amphoterlc [Link] and oxygen
Ans. (d) amphoteric d. metal hydroxide and hydrogen gas
41. Complete the following equation: Ans. (b) metal oxide
Q 49. The least reactive
4Fels)+ 30, (g)- with oxygen in the list is:
a. 4Fe203(s) b. 2Fe0(s) a iron
C. 2Fe203 (S) d. 4Fe0(s) C. copper [Link] d. lead
Ans. (c) 2Fe03 (s) Ans. () copper
4Fels)+30g) 2Fe0,(s) KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
42. ldentify the correct statements: Copper do not reactwith oxygen because
() When copper is heated in air, it combines with oxygen it is coated with a
black colouredlayer of copper (1)
to form copper (11) oxide, a black oxide. oxide.
 o Science| Class 10| Term 1 51
metals that floats when
he give Hg) with
a50. treated with water are: Q 58. Which of the following metal will not
a. manganese and sodium
[Link] and calcium H,07
a. Na(s)+ 2H,0 [Link](s)+2H,0-
[Link] and sodium
d. magnesium and calclum
c,Zn(s)+H0 [Link]+2H,0
Ans. (d) Cu+ 2H0
(d) magnesium and calcium in reactivity series, will
Ans. Metals placed below the hydrogen
Decreasing order of
When calcium Oxide is added
dissolves in water without to water, it completcly
not give H2(g) with water
(H,0).

forming bubbles. What reactivity of metals is

products are formed in this Na Mg Zn Cu
reaction?
is:
a. Ca and H2 [Link] and H,02 Q 59. The metal that reacts with cold water
[Link](OH)2 d. tungsten
d. CaH2 a. mercury b. sodium c. zinc
Ans.() Ca(0H)2 Ans. (b) sodium
Ca0+HOCa(OH)2 Q 60. When metal reacts with liquid water the
products
A52. When a non-metal is allowed to react are...a***
with water: a. metal hydroxide and oxygen gas
a. CO2 gas is formed
b. H2 gas is formed b. metal hydroxide and hydrogen gas
[Link] formed depends on temperature C. metal oxide and oxygen gas

d. No products are formed d. metal oxide and hydrogen gas

Ans. (b) metal hydroxide and hydrogen gas
Ans. (d) No products are formed
Q61. What is the correct equation when potassium
reacts with
a53. What happens when calcium is treated with water?
water?
) It does not react with water
() It reacts violently with water
a. 2K(s)+HO()> KOHaq) +H2l9)
K(s)+2H,0() KOH{aq)+2H2(g)
b.
(ii) It reacts less violently with water
c.2K(s)+2H,0() 2KOH{aq) + H,lg)
(iv) Bubbles of hydrogen gas formed stick to the surface
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
d.K(s) +H0() > KOH(09) +H2g)
of calcium 2KOH{ag) + H2lg)
(iv) (i) Ans. () 2K(s)+2H,0()
a. () and b. and (i)
Q 62. Which one of the following metals do not react with cold
c() and (i) d. (i) and (iv) as well as hot water?
(NCERTEXEMPLAR)
Ans. (d) (ii) and (iv)
a. Na .Ca
a 54. When sodium reacts with cold water, then the product Mg
C. d. Fe
formed wil be: Ans. (d) Fe
a. NaCO3 b. Na,0 KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
c NaOH d. All of these
Iron and zinc do not react either with cold or hot water They
Ans. (c) NaOH
2Na0H+H2 react with steam to form metal oxid and hydrogen.
2Na+2H0
055. Zn +H,0 (steam) ->A+B Q63. An experimental set-up is shown in the figure. ldentify the
the above equation A and are:
In B metal (X) and gas (Y) respectively in the figure.
[Link] andH2 b. Zn and Ha Metal X

d. ZnH2 and O2
c ZnO2 and O2 Glass-wool GasY
Ans. (a) Zn0 and H2 soaked
statements is incorrect for with water Water
56. Which among the following (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
magnesium metal? Burner Gassjar
a. It burns in oxygen with a
dazzling white flame
b. It reacts with cold water
to form magnesium oxide and
evolves hydrogen gas hydroxide
C. It reacts with hot water
to form magnesium
gas a. Zinc, H2 gas
and evolves hydrogen hydroxide and
d. It reacts with steam to
form magnesium b. Copper, CO, gas
CAluminium, cO2 gas
evolves hydrogen gas. oxide and
nS. (b) It reacts with cold
water to form magnesium [Link], H2 gas
evolves hydrogen gas Ans. (a) Zinc. H2 gas
obtained
oxide(s) of iron would be a 64. Which of the following does not react with water?
57. Which of the following with steam?
on prolonged reaction ofiron (NCERT EXEMPLAR) a. Sllver b. Gold
cLead d. All of these
b. Fe203
a. Ans. (d) All of these
.Fe0 d. Fe20g and Fe,0
c.Fe304
Ans. (c)
Fe04 Fe0,(s)+ 4H,(g)
T!P
Lead, copper, silver and gold do not react with water at all.
3Fels)+ 4H0(g)>
52 I MASTERMND CHAPTERWISE OUueSTION BANK
ZnCl, + A
Q65. Which one of the following metals reacts most vigorously Q 69. Zn +xHCI>
with cold water? A and x are: b. H4
a Sodium b. Magnesium Cl.1 d. H 2
.Copper d. Zinc c.H3
Ans. (a) Sodium Ans. (d) Hz2 (dil). The
treated with H2S0,
Q70. A reactive metal (M) is
T!P- and
Potassiun sodiunm react violerntly with cold water evolved and is collected
over the water as shown in fia

a [Link] happens when a pellet of sodium is dropped in

water?
a. It catches fire and forms oxide.
b. It absorbs heat and forms oxide.
cIt catches fire and forms hydroxide.
d It absorbs heat and forms hydroxide
Ans. (c) It catches fire and forms hydroxide.
a 67. Arrange the set-up as given below: drawn is/are:
The correct conclusion
Metal sample Boiling a. the gas is hydrogen
tube Glass tube
b. the gas is lighter than air
Glass-wool
Cork
Hydrogen
gas c. the gas is S0 and is lighter
than air at
soaked in Water d. both a. and b.
water
Ans. (d) Both a. and b.
Burner Stand Delivery (M) reacts with the acid H,So
When any reactive metal
tube gas (H2). It is lighter than air.
(dil). it evolves hydrogen
M-sulphate+ H2 (9)
M(s)+H5O, (dil)>
in a steam of dry hydrogen
Match the columns. Q71. When iron filings are heated
formed is FeCl, where x is:
chloride, the compound
Column Column l b. 2 c.3 d. 4
a.1
A React violently with cold (P) Magnesiumn Ans. (b) 2
water 072. Which of the following react with dilute
nitric acid?
B Does not react with cold (q) | Aluminium, iron a. Magnesium b. Iron
water but reacts with hot and zinc [Link]
[Link]
water
Ans. (a) Magnesium
Do not react with water Calcium
at all a 73. What is made when magnesium reacts with hydrochloric
acid?
D Reacts less violently with (s) Sodium and
a. Magnesium nitrate and hydrogen gas
water and hydrogen does potassium
not catch fire b. Magnesium sulphate and hydrogen gas

Lead. copper c. Magnesium oxide and oxygen gas

E Do not react either with )
d. Magnesium chloride and hydrogen gas
cold or hot water but silver and gold
theyreact with steam Ans. (d) Magnesium chloride and hydrogen gas
a. A-(). B-(s).c(a). D-(p), 5-) 074. When a metal is added to dilute HCl solution, there is no
evolution of gas. Metal is:
b. A-(s). B-(p). C-(0). D-(). E-(q)
c.A-(). B-(s). C-(p). D-(r). E-(q)
.K Na .[Link] [Link]

d. A-(p). B-(r). C-(q). D-(s). E-(t) Ans. (c) Ag8

Ans. (b) A-(s). B-(p). C-(¢). D-(r). E-(q) Ag is below hydrogen in reactivity series,

a 68. 75. Which of the following metals does not displace H, gas
Aqua regia, (Latin for 'royal water) is a freshly prepared
mixture of concentrated..()...and..(i).. in the ratio of from dilute HCl or dilute H,50,2
a. Mg b. Al
3:1. It can dissolve...(ii).., even though neither of these
acids can do so alone. Aqua regia is a highly corrosive, c. Cu d. Zn
fuming liquid. It is one of the few reagents that is able to Ans. (c) Cu
dissolve..(i)... and..(iv)... Cu is below hydrogen in reactivity series.
i) (iv) a 76. Which four numbers a, b, c and d are required to balance
a. Conc. HCL Conc. HNO Gold Platinum the equation?
b. Conc. HNO Conc. HCl Gold Platinum a Fe(s)+ bH, S0, (0q) cFeS0, (aq) + dH,g)
cConc. H,S0 Conc. HNO Silver Gold a. 1, 1. 1.1 b. 2,3.2.2
d. Conc. H,SO Conc. HC Silver Gold .3,4,1.2 d. [Link]
Ans. (a) Conc. HC Conc. HN0 Gold Platinum Ans. (a) 1. 1. 1.1
 Science Class 10 Term 1 53
7. Which of the following is
aluminium reacts with the correct equation when R
sulfuric acid?
a.2Al(s)+3H,SO,(oq)
Al,(SO)3 (aq)+3H,g)
b.2Al(s)+3HSO,(0q) placed in
C.2Al(s)+3HSO,()
AlL,(SO,) ()+3H,(s) Between which two metals should hydrogen be
Al{SO,) ()+3H,g) the serles?
d.2Al(s)+3HSO,(s) AlZ(S0.), ()+3H,g) a. P and Q b.Q and 5 c.P andR [Link] 5
AnS. (a) 2Als)+3H,SO,(aq) Al,(S0,)a (ag)+3H,o) Ans. (b) Q and S
078. Tick () the correct statements Q 83. 2 mL each of concentrated
HCL, HN0, and a mixture of
and cross (X) the incorrect in the ratio of
statements. concentrated HCl and concentrated HNO ,
A, and C. A small
3:1 weretaken in test tubes labelled as
(0) Sodium reacts B
vigorously with dilute hydrochloric
No change
acid evolving hydrogen gas. piece of metal was put in each test tube.
dissolved
() Oxides of aluminium and zinc show both acidic and occurred in test tubes A and B but the metal got
basic behaviour. in tube C respectively. The metal could be:
test (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
(iii) Iron does not react either
with cold or hot water.
(iv) The reaction of
magnesium with oxygen is less a. Al b. Au [Link] d. Fe

vigorous implying that it is not as reactive as sodium. Ans. (6) Au

finds
) (i) (i) (v) ) (i) (i) (iv) Q 84. A student studying the chemical properties of metals
[Link]* incomplete chemical reactions in his book, as shown:
b.X X
C.
d.X x Mg0+HNO0,
Ans.() Which option completes the reaction?
79. Complete the following equation: a. Mg0+HNO MgN2 + 4H0
[Link]+HNO3 Mg +NO2 +02
Zn(s)+2HNO,(aq)
a. 2nNO,(aq)+2H,(g) b. ZnNO,(og) + H0)
c.Mg0+HNO Mg(OH)2 +2NO2
c.2Zn(NO)(og)+2H2(g) d. Zn(NO,)2laq)+ H9) d. Mg0+HNO Mg(NO3)2 + H0
Ans. (d) Mg0 + HNO Mg(NO)2 + H0
Ans. (d) Zn(NO,)(aq)+ H9)
a 85. Generally metals react with acids to give salt and
80. Which of the following metals liberate hydrogen with 5% hydrogen gas. Which of the following acids does not give
HNO ? hydrogen gas on reacting with metals (except Mn and
ett r(i) Cu (i) Zn t
Mg)?
(NCERTEXEMPLAR)
ii) Mn (iv) Mg HCL c. HNO d. All of these
a.HS04
a. and (i)
(1) b.(i) and (i) Ans. (c) HNOg
c. (ii) and (iv) d.() and (v) Q 86. The composition of aqua-regia is:
Ans. (c) (ii) and (iv) HNO0
a. Dil. HC Conc.
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER 3
Hydrogen gas is not evolved with Cu and Zn because HNOg is a b. Conc. HCL DiL HNO

strong oxidising agent.

[Link]. HCl Conc. HNOg
copper and nitric
a81. The chemical reaction between a piece of
d. Dil. HCL DiL HNO
acid is given by the chemical equations:
Cu+ HNO Cu(NO,)2 +H2
Ans. (c) Conc. HC Conc. HNO3
H, +HNO H,0+NO,
What can be inferred from the chemical equation?
a. Copper causes the oxidation of HNO, to form NO2 Q87. Which one of the following four metals would be displaced
b. Hydrogen gas gets oxidized by HNO, to form water. from the solution of its salts by other three metals?
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
in the air to form water.
C. Gas reacts with oxygen
d. Nitrate reacts with hydrogen to form NO, and H0. a. Mg b. Ag C. Zn d .Cu
Ans. (b) Hydrogen gas gets oxidized by HNO, to form water. Ans. (6) Ag
Q 82. Four metals P, Q, R and S are tasted with water, steam and
Q 88. Which of the following can undergo a chemical reaction?
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
dilute hydrochloric acid. The table given below shows the
results of the experiment. a. Mg50 +Fe b.Zn50+Fe
Fe
Reaction
c. Mg50 +Pb d.Cus04 4+

Metals Reaction Reaction

with water with steam with dil. HC Ans. (d) Cus04+Fe

cT!P-
Learn the reactivity series using the Mnemonics discussed in
Q this chapter tosolve similertypologies ofquestions
54 I MASTERMND CHAPTERWISE
OuESTION BANK
a 89. Beakers A, B and C contain zinc sulphate,
iron (1) sulphate solutions sllver nitrate and
added to each beaker. Blue respectively. Copper pleces are 2-M
a. beakerA
colour will appear in case of:
b. beaker B
c. beaker C
d. All the beakers
Ans. (b) beaker B
Copper is more reactive a. M=Zn, Y= FeSO.Z=Fe
from its salt solution. than silver thus, displaces sllver
b. M=Cu. Y= Al2(50a)3, Z= Al
a 90. A student puts
one big iron nail each in M Ag. Y=Cus0,. Z=Cu
C.
containing solutions of zinc four test tubes
M=Fe. Y=ZnS0,, Z=Zn
d.
copper sulphate and ironsulphate, aluminium sulphate, Ans. (o) M-Zn. Y= Fes0Z=Fe
sulphate. A reddish brown
coating was observed only on
was put in the solution of:
the surface of iron nail which 97. Clean small pieces of magnesium, zinc, aluminium, iron
paDer
and copper by rubbing them with a piece of sand
a. zinc sulphate b. iron sulphate Add about 10 mL o
Take them in separate test tubes.
.copper sulphate d. aluminium sulphate dilute hydrochloric acid to each of them.
Ans. (c) Copper sulphate
Fe displaces copper from
copper sulphate (CuS0,) solution.
CuSO+Fe FeS0,+Cu
Reddish
a 91. Which of the following
brown

pairs will give displacement

reactions? Mg Al Zn Cu Fe
a. ZnSO, solution and
aluminium metal Identify the correct statement(s).
b. MgCl2 Solution and aluminium
metal ) The rate of evolution of hydrogen gas bubbles is not
c FeS0 solution and silver metal
same in all the test tubes.
d. AgNO solution and copper
metal i) The rate of formation of bubbles is the fastest in the
Ans. (d) AgNO solution and
copPper metal case of magnesium.
Copper is more reactive than silver
hence displaces silver (i) The reactivity decreases in the order:
from silver nitrate solution.
Mg> Zn> Al> Fe> Cu
a 92. Which of the following will not undergo reaction? (iv) In the case of copper, no bubbles are seen and the
a. Zinc metal+Zinc oxide b.
Iron
metal + Copper oxide temperature also remains unchanged. This shows
c. Zinc metal + Iron oxide d.
Magnesium+ Iron oxide that copper does not react with dilute HCL
Ans. (a) Zinc metal + Zinc oxide a. (Gi) and (iv)
a 93. A student placed an iron naill in copper sulphate solution. b. (it) and (iv)
He observed the reddish brown coating [Link] (ii)
on the iron nair
which is: (). (i) and (iv).
d.
a.
soft and dull b. hard and flading Ans. (d) (). (i) and (iv)
smooth and shiningg
C. d. rough and granular a 98. Aluminium sulphate and copper sulphate solutions were
Ans. (d) rough and granular
taken in two test tubes I and II, respectively. A few pieces
94. An aluminium strip is
kept immersed in freshly prepared of iron filings were then added to both the solutions. Four
ferrous sulphate solution taken in a test tube, the change students A, B, C and D recorded their observations in the
observed is that: form of a table as given below:
a. green solution slowly turns brown
b. lower end of test tube become slightly warm Students Aluminium sulphate Copper sulphate
c a colourless gas with the smell of burning sulphuris solution ((0 solution (1)
observed
d. ight green solution changes to blue
Colourless solution Blue colour of the
changes to light solution is retained
Ans. (a) green solution slowly turns brown reen
Q95. On addition of which metal, copper
sulphate solution Colour of the solution | Blue colour of
(Blue colour) will be changed to colourless solution: the
does not change solution changes to
[Link] [Link] Fe d. Hg green
Ans. (b) Zn
Colourless solution Blue colour of the
a96. A metal rod (M) was dipped in a coloured solution (Y). changes to light blue
After some time it was observed that the metal rod starts solution changes to
green
dissolving in the solution and the solution starts fading in
D Colour ofthe solution
colour. However, a coloured precipitate (2) was seen at the Blue colour of the
remains unchanged solution fades away
bottom of the beaker. (M, () and(2) could be:
 Scienco Class 10 Term 1 55

The correct set of observatlons Q 106. Which of the following reactlons is possible?
student: has been recorded by
Zn0(ag)+Cu(s)
a. A b. B
[Link](s)+Cu0(0q)
c.C d. D [Link](s)+Feso,(ag) Cuso, (aq)+Fels)
Ans. (b)
B

Iron Is less reactlve than alumlnium,

cPbls)+ZnCl,(aq)» PbCl(aq)+Zn(s)
aluminium from aluminium
Itcannot dlsplace d. Au(s)+2HCl(aq)» AuCl,(aq)+Halg)
sulphate solutlon. So, colour or +Culs)
the solution does not change. Iron Is
more reactlve than Ans. (a) Zn(s)+Cuo(ag) Zn0(09)
calcium?
copper, t displaces copper
from copper sulphate solutlon. a 107. Which metal is more reactive than
So, blue colour of the solutlon a. Magnesium
changes to green.
99. What is the decreasing order of reactivity of b. Potassium
the following
metals? c. Sllver
Na, AL, K, Cu, Ag, Fe d. Aluminum
a.K Na > Al Fe Cu Ag
> Ans. (b) Potasslum
metals among the
b. Na K Al > Cu Ag Fe Q 108. Identify the correct order of reactivity of
C.K Na > Al > Cu> Fe Ag following:
d.K Na-Al > Fe Ag Cu a. Cu <Fe <Zn <Al< Na
b. Fe <Zn <Cu < Na <Al
Ans. (a) K Na Al Fe Cu Ag
c. Zn <Cu< Fe <Al <Na
a 100. Reactivity of zinc is ..than hydrogen. Fe
d. Cu <Zn <Al < Na <
a, equal
Ans. (a) Cu< Fe <Zn <Al < Na
b. less
C. more Common/Error
d. sometimes more sometimes less of reactivity of
Students usually [Link] with the order
Ans. (c) more metals.
a 101. Food cans are coated with tin and not with zinc because: of
each test tubes A, B, and D, 2mL of solutionwas
C
Q 109. In
a. zinc is costlier than tin pieces of zinc
Al2(S0 4) 3 in water was filled. Clean
b. zinc has a higher melting point than tin B,
C. zinc is more reactive than tin
placed in test tube A, clean iron nail was put in test tube
placed in test tube C and a clean copper
silver (Ag) was
d. zinc is less reactive than tin
wire was placed in test tube D.
Ans. (c) zinc is more reactlve than tin
a102. On the basis of the sequence of the given reactions identify
the most and least reactive elements:
X+YA XA+Y
X+YB XB+Y .(2)
Z+ XA ZA+X .(3 Al(SOa)3 + Cu
Al2(5Os)3 +Zn Al(S04)3 + Fe AlSO)3 + Ag.
[Link] Z
X b. Y and Z (C) (D)
(A) (B)
C. Z and X d. Z and Y
Ans. (d) Z and Y Which of the following option(s) is/are correct about
Z is the more reactive element and Y is the least reactive above experiment?
a. Zinc is more reactive than aluminium
element Z easily displaces X, while easly displaces
X Y.
[Link] is more reactive than aluminium
Q 103. The correct order of increasing chemical reactivity is:
c. Zinc is more reactive than copper
a. Zn <Fe Mg <K d. Zinc, iron, silver and copper are less reactive than
[Link]&MgZn<K it naeoa aluminiumn
< Mg<K<Zn
c. Fe Ans. (d) Zinc, iron, silver and copper are less reactive than
d. Fe <Zn < Mg <K aluminiumm
Ans. (d) Fe <Zn <Mg<K Zn, Fe, Ag and Cu are less reactive than aluminium.
Q 104. A list of common metals arranged
in order of their Aluminium resides at the top of the activity series. While Zn,
known as an Fe. Ag and Cu lies below aluminium in the activity series.
decreasing reactivity is

a.
hydrogen series
b. reactivity series
Thus, being less reactive than aluminium, they cannot
displace Al from its salt solution ie. Al(S0,) solution.
NR Q 110. What will happen if a less reactive metal is added in a
C. lyman series

d. balmer serles solution with more reactive metal compound?

Ans. (6) reactivity series a. Vigorous reaction
arranged according increasing b. Fizzing gas produced
105. Which of the following is
reactivity? c. Burns moderately

a. Mg> Ca > Na>K

b. Mg> Na >Ca>K d. No reaction
d. K> Mg> Na> Ca Ans. (d) No reaction
c. Na> Ca > Mg>K
Ans. (a) Mg> Ca > Na >K
56 I
MASTERMND CHAPTERWISE QUESTION BANK
ionic compounds is:
Q 111. If the metal is more reactive than the metal in the a 116. Physical nature of most of the
b. liquid
compound, it completes with the less reactive metal a. gas
d. may exist in any state
Therefore, it can concluded that: c. solid
a. the less reactive metal repel the more reactive Ans. (c) solid
metal
from its compound
. the more reactive metal a117. lonic compound have:
bonded with the less reactive a. low melting and high
boiling points
metal from its compound b. low melting and low boiling points
c the less reactive metal displaces the more reactive boiling points
metal from its compound c high melting and low
d. high melting and high
boiling points
d. the more reactive metal displaces boiling paints
the less reactive Ans. (d) high metting and high
metal from its compound
Ans. (d) the more reactive metal displaces the less reactive a 118. During formation of ionic bond:
betvween tvo posítive ions
metal from its compound a. there is force of repulsion
positive and negatire
b. there is force of attraction between
Q112. In an experiment each of the
metals AL, Zn, Cu and Fe are ions
reacted with ZnS0 Cuso. Al,(50), and Fe50 force of repulsion between two negative
is
ions
c there
solutions. The results are tabulated as follows where d. None of the above
means that the reaction occurs and X' means no reaction negative
Ans. (b) there is force of attraction between positive and
OCcurs.
ions
Metal ZnSO Cuso Q119. lonic compound are soluble in:
Al(50,),|Feso, a. ether b. alcohol cbenzene d. water
Zn
Ans. (d) water
lonic compounds are soluble in water but insoluble in organic
Cu X X
solvents ke ether, acetone, alcohol, kerosene oil etc
X Q 120. lonic bond is formed by:
a. loss and gain of electrons both
b. sharing of electrons5
Onthe basis of the above results, the order of the reactivity closs of electrons only
of the metals may be concluded as: d. gain of electrons only
a. Zn Fe Al> Cu Ans. (a) loss and gain of electrons both
Q 121. lonic compounds conduct electricity in:
[Link] Fe Zn Cu
c Zn Al>Fe Cu a. solid state
[Link] Zn Fe Cu [Link] state
Ans. (d) Al Zn- Fe Cu Cmolten state
Q 113. d. do not conduct electricity at all
The arrangement for Copper, Iron, Lead and Mercury
according to reactivity series is: Ans. (c) molten state
a. Iron > Lead> Copper> Mercury Q 122. lonic bond is formed between:
b. Lead> Copper> Mercury> Iron a. two electro-positive elements
cCopperMercury> Iron > Lead electro-negative elements
b. two

d. Mercury>Iron > Lead> Copper celectropositive and electronegative elements

(a) d. None of the above
Ans. Iron> Lead » Copper> Mercury
Ans. (c) electropositive and electronegative elements
Q114. Which of the following is the correct arrangement of the
given metals in ascending order of their reactivity?
a 123. In the formation of ionic bond, cation is formed by:
a. sharing of electrons(s)
Zinc, Iron, Magnesium, Sodium
[Link] of electron(s)
a.
Zinc Iron Magnesium Sodium
c loss of electron(s)
[Link] Magnesium Iron Zinc d. None of these
c Sodium Zinc Magnesium Iron Ans. (c) loss of electron(s).
d. Sodium > Magnesium Zinc> Iron
Q 124. Which one
Ans. (d) Sodium Magnesium Zinc >Iron of the following properties is not generally
exhibited by ionic compounds? (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
0 115. Reaction between X and Y forms compound z X loses a. Solubility in water
electron and Y gains electron. Which of the following b. Electrical conductivity in
solid state
properties is not shown by z? (NCERTEXEMPLAR) . High meltlng and boiling
points
a. Has high melting paint d. Electrical conductivity
in moltei state
b. Has low melting point Ans. (b) Electrical conductivity
in solid state
[Link] electricity in molten state
d. Occurs es solid CT!P.
Students should learn the properties
Ans. (b) Has low melting point of ioniccompounds.
 Solonco Class 10 Torm 1 57
125, Tho atomi
omlc number
of four eloments Cloctronlc configurntlun of =2,0,2
012nd
0 12 [Link] two P, Q, n,Sn
,S are 6, 0, 10 Valenty of 2
olementswhlch can
form lonlc compounds aro: teacto Y-2,7
a Pand S b.Q andR
Cletronlc tonfipurotion l
[Link] d. Q andS
Valenty ofY -1
Ans. (1) 9 and 5 Symbol
Clectronlc configuratlon
of Dis 2.G. It requres two Valency 2 Furdla XY
to compeie G octet, On electrons
configuration ot D is 2, 0, 2. It the other hand, olectronic elomets Ato Fare given In
Q133. Tho oloctronlcstructures of slx
to complete lt, octet. 1hus, D roquirus to lose two electrons thotable belo:
and Droact to form lonic bornds
by transfer of electrons. Clectronlc Structure Fornula of compound
o 126. What ls an lonlc bond?
[Link] bond is formed by sharlng
9A:2,LB:2,6
two atons
of electrons between S)_2,6C:7 DC
b. It is formed by
transfer of electrons from one atom to ()C:2.7D:2,8,3 fEy
another L(E:2,0,GF:2,6,0,2
.Both a. and b. Whlch of the compounds formed
ara wrong?
d. Nonc of the above (1) and (i) b. () and ()
a.
(a) lonic bond Is formed by sharing of
Ans.
two atoms
electrons between c.() and () d.() and(
Ans. () (01) oand (v)
o 127. Whlch of the following is truo about lonic compounds? vsth anather
Q 134. An eloment X (atomic number 12) reacts compound Z.
a. lonic compounds conduct electricity when dissolved in form a
element Y (atomlc number 17) to
water Whlch of the folloing statements
are true regarding this
b. lonic compounds are not soluble In water
compound?
c. lonic compounds are crystallUne sollds
[Link] formula of Zis XY2
d. Both a. and c.
1. It is soluble In water,
Ans. (d) Both a, and c. sharíng of electrons.
I. X and Y are Jolned by
lonic compounds conduct electrlcity vwhen dissolved in IV. It would conduct electriclty in the molten state.
water or melted. They are soluble In water and are also b. I and I C1,1 and
IV d.W and V
a. I and ll
crystalline sollds
Ans. (d) 1l and IV
1.

a 128. The solution of one of the following compounds wil question that
conduct electricity. This compound Is: a 135. Observe the given reactions and answer the
follows:
a. CCl [Link]
cCaCl2 d. CHC Na +e
22,1)
Ans. (c) CaCl2
CaCl form ionic bond and so will conduct electricity.
Q 129. Which of the foltowing compounds is not lonic in nature? 2e
a. Lithium Chloride b. Ammonium Chloride Mg > Mg +
(222)
cCalclum Chloride d. Carbon tetrachloride representations for the
Which of the following are correct
Ans. (d) Carbon tetrachloride lonic compounds formed of these lons?
Except carbon tetrachloride all forms ionic band.
Q130. Name the lons present in magnesium oxide
compound?
a, Magnesium cation b. Oxide anion
c. Both a. and b. d. Neither a. nor b.

Ans. (c) Both a. and b.

compound are:
The ions present in magnesium oxide
magnesium ions and oxlde ions.
electronic configuration of calcium ion (Ca")?
a131. What is the
b. 2. 8, 2 c2,8,4 d. 2.8,8
.2.8
so its electronic
Ans. () The atomic number of calcium 20
is
electrons in the
configuration ís 2. 8, 8. 2 and so has 2
(Ca*).
to form calcium lon
outer most shell Therefore configuration becomes
calcium will lose 2 electrons and its When metalX
a 136, Chlorine react with metals and non-metals.
2.8.8 XCl, is formed. Which
compound formed reacts withchlorine, the compound,
Q 132. What is the chemical formula of the of the following occurs when
X and chlorine react to form
when 1 X combines with"Y?
XCL,?
a. XY S
b. X2Y
(i) An atom of X gives away two electrons.
d.X2Y3
CXY2
Gy Each atom of chlórine receives one
electron.
Ans. (c) XY2
58 |
MASTERMND CHAPTERWISE
UESTION DANK
(U1) X
and Cl share a palr of electrons.
(iv) X and Cl form a double Q 142. Assertion (A): Platinum, gold and silver are used to mato
bond, jewellery.
a. (0) and (i) b. (i) and (il)
c. (ii) and (iv) Reason (R): Platinum, gold and silver are least reactiv
tive
d.(). () and (iv) metals
Ans. (a) () and ()
Q 137. Which of Ans. (a)
the following is the correct electronlc Platlnum, gold and silver are highly malleable. lustrous and
arrangement of sodium oxide? b
least reactive, ie., noble metals, so they are not corroded
a. alr and water easily
a 143. Assertion (A): Metals are sonorous.
d.
Reason (R): They are generally brittle in the solid state.
they break into pieces when hammered.
Ans. (c)
Metals are sonorous and hard, while non-metals are brittle.
Ans. (6) Nay|:0. Na) a 144. Assertion (A): The oxides of sulphur and phosphorus are
acidic in nature.
Common/!)Eror Reason (R): Metal oxides are basic in nature.
Students get confused in drawing the dot structure. Ans. (b)
Q 138. Sulphur and phosphorus are non-metals. Non-metals form
Which of the following are not ionic compounds?
oxides which are either acidic or neutral.
(NCERTEXEMPLAR)
Q 145. Assertion (A): Carbon reacts with oxygen to form carbon
) KCI G) HCL (ii) CCl4 (iv) NaCl
a. () and (i) b. (i) and (i) dioxide which is an acidic oxide.
c.(ii) and (iv) d. (i) and (ii) Reason (R): Non-metals form acidic oxides.
Ans. (b) (i) and (ii) Ans. (a)
Q 139. The electronic configuration of Carbon being a non-metal form acidic oxides, ie, their
three elements X, Y and Z aqueous solution turns blue litmus solution red.
are as follows:
X=2,4, Y =2,7,Z-2, 1
Which two elements will combine to form an ionic
Common /Error-
compound and write the correct formula? Usually, students get confused in the nature of oxide formed by
.X2Y
Ans. (6) YZ
[Link] .XZa d. Yzi pg metals and non-metals.
0 146. Assertion (A): Magnesium reacts with oxygen upon
Assertion and Reason Type Questions heating and burns brightly to form magnesium oxide.
Reason (R): Magnesium oxide is basic in nature.
Ans (b)
Directions ([Link]. 140-168): In the following questions, a Metals react with oxygen to form metal oxides which are
statement of Assertion (A) is followed by a statement of Reason (R). basic in nature.
Mark the correct choice as:
Q 147. Assertion (A): Silver and gold do not react with oxygen
a. Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true and Reason
(R) is the correct explanation of assertion (A) even at high temperatures.
b. Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true but Reason Reason (R): Silver and gold are less active metals.
(R is not the correct explanation of Assertion (A) Ans. (a)
[Link] (A) is true but Reason (R) is false KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER-
d. Assertoin (A) is false but Reason (R) is true Different metals show diferent reactivities towards oxygen.
0140. Assertion (A): Metals are good conductors of heat.
Q 148. Assertion (A): Aluminium oxide is an amphoteric oxide.
Reason (R): Silver and copper are poor conductors of heat.
Ans. () Reason (R): Anodising is a process of forming a thick oxide
Silver and copper are good conductors of heat layer of aluminium.
Ans. (b)
Common/Error Q 149. Assertion (A): Zinc oxide is amphoteric in nature.
Students get confused between the examples of good and bad Reason (R):Zinc oxide reacts with both acids and bases.
conductors of heat. Ans. (a)
Q150. Assertion (A):Aluminium oxide and zinc oxide are acidic in
a 141. Assertion (A): The property of beating a metal into sheets
is called ductility. nature.
Reason (R): Gold and silver are most malleable metals. Reason (R): Amphoteric nature means that
substance have
Ans. (d) both acidiç and basic character.
Ans. (d)
.The property of beating a metal into sheets is called
Aluminium oxide and zinc oxide are
malleability. amphoteric in nature
 Scionco Class 10 | Term 1 59

0 151. Assertion (A): Potasslum react violently with cold water Thus. the green colour of the solution fades and iron metal
Reason (R): It also starts floating due to
the bubbles ot Hets deposited.
hydrogen gas sticking to the surface. Zn(s) Fe50, (aq) Zn50, (aq) fe(s)
Ans. (c) Cetness) on deeate)
a 152. Assertion (A): Calclum floats In water. a 160. Assertlon (A): Copper displaces sllver from sitver nitrate
Reason (R): Calcium reacts with water to form hydrogen solutlon.
9as and bubbles of H, gas stick to the calclum metal Reason (R): Copper Is more reactive than sllver.
surface. Ans. (a)
Ans. (a) a 161. Assertlon (A): Zine can casily displace Copper on reacting
a 153. Assertion (A): Calcium and magneslum fNoats In water. wlth a solutlon of copper sulphate.
Reason (R): The bubbles of hydrogen gas evolved stlck to Reason (R): Copper Is more reactlve metal as
compared to
their surface. Zinc.
Ans (a) Ans. (c)
Q 154. Assertion (A): The reaction of calclum with water is less a 162. Assertlon (A): Food cans are coated with tin and not with
violent in comparison to that of sodium. zlnc.
Reason (R): The heat evolved is not suficient for the Reason (R): Zinc ls more reactive than tin.
hydrogen to catch fire. Ans a)
Food cans are coated with tin and not with zinc because
zinc
Ans. (a)
Is more reactive than tin, It can react with organic aclds
a 155. Assertion (A): Zine do not react with cold or hot water.
Reason (R): Zinc react with steam to form metal oxide and present in food.
hydrogen. a 163. Assertion (A): The arrangement of metals In order of
Ans. (a) decreasing reactivitles is called reactlvity series.
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER Reason (R): Metals at the top of serles are very reactive
Potassium and sodium react violently with cold water and metals at the bottom are least reactive.
Magnesium reacts with hot water and starts floating. Ans. (b)
Aluminium, Iron and zinc react with steam. Metals at the top of the series are very reactive and
Lead, coppe, silver and gold do not reactwith water at all. therefore. they are not found In free state in nature. The
metals at the bottom of the series are least reactive and
a 156. Assertion (A): C and N do not react with dil. HCl and dil.
therefore. they are found in free state in nature.
HSO Q 164. Assertion (A): Different metals have different reactlvitles
Reason (R): Metals do not react with diL HCl and dil.
with water and dilute acids.
H,SO Reason (R):Reactivity of a metal depends on its posltion in
Ans. (c)
the reactivity series.
Metals react with dilute HCl and dilute HSO, Non-metals do
Ans. (a)
not react with dilute acids.
The metals placed at the top of the series are most reactive.
a157. Assertion (A):Zinc fails to evolve hydrogen gas on reacting Q 165. Assertion (A): lonic compounds have high melting and
with diL nitric acid.
bolling points.
Reason (R): DiL HNO, is an oxidising agent and zinc gives
Reason (R): A large amount of energy Is requlired to break
NO when reacts with it.
the strong Inter-lonic attraction In lonic compounds.
Ans. (a)
Ans. (a)
a 158. Assertion (A): When a piece of copper metal is added to a 166. Assertion (A): Magneslum chloride Is an lonic compound.
dilute sulphuric acid, the solution turns blue.
Reason (R): Metals and non-metals react by mutual
Reason (R): Copper reacts with dilute sulphuric acid to
transfer of electrons.
form copper (1) sulphate solution.
Ans. (a)
Ans. (a)
When a piece of copper metal is added to dilute sulphurle a167. Assertion (A): Electrovalency of Na is +1.
acid. the solution turns blue. It is because, copper reacts with Reason (R): The number of electrons which an atom either
dilute sulphuric acid to form blue copper
(0) sulphate loses or gains In the formation ofan lonic bond is known as
solution. its valency.
Ans. (a)
0 159. Assertion (A): When zine is added to a solution of iron (1)
sulphate, no change is observed. Q 168. Assertion (A): Mg0 exlsts In liquld state.
Reason (R): Zinc is less reactive than iron. Reason (R): The electrostatic forces of attraction between
Mg2' and 0 lons constitute lonle bond.
Ans. (d)
iron
Zinc being more reactive than Iron displaces iron from Ans. (d)
(00)
sulphate solution. Mg0 Is an lonic compound which are solld in nature.
60 I
MASTERPND CHAPTERWISE QuESTHON RANK

Case Based QUESTIONS

Case Study 1 hard. good conductors of

nature. They are generally
ductile and have striking h
Metals as we know, are very useful in all fields, industries and electricity, malleable.
play in our daily life,
in particular. Non-metals are no less in any way. Oxygen They have a significant role to
present in air is essential for breathing as well as for carefully and give the ansne of
Read the abone passage
combustion. Non-netals tonmm a large mumber of
ompunds which are extremely useful, g, ammonia, the following questions.
Q 1. Metatls which are of vital
lmportance to the nationa
nitric acid, sulphurie acid, cte. industry sector are called straten
Non-metals are found to exist in three states of matter. defence, cnergy and
is a strategic metal?
metals. Which of the following
Only solid non-metals are expoted to be hand however. b. Zirconium
a Titanium
they have low density and are britle. They usually have
low melting and boiling points and are por conductors of
[Link]
All of these
d.
Ans. (d) All of these
eloctricity.
Titanium. zirconium and manganese are used
in defenre
Read the abnr passzge carcfally and give the anwer of and therefore,. are
equipments as they are light and durable
the following questions called strategic metals.
electricity?
Q1. is a non-metal but is lustrous. 02. Which metal is the best conductor of
a Phosphonus b. Sulphur a. Silver [Link]
[Link] d lodine Nickel
c. [Link]
Ans. (c) lodine Ans. (a) Silver
lodine is a lustrous non-metal Q3. Which of the following metals is not a coinage metal?
02. Most non-metals produce. a. Copper b. Silver
xides when dissolve in C. Iron d. Gold
water.
Ans. (c) Iron
a addic b. neutral
Copper, silver and gold are called coinage metals becauSe
cbasic d. none of these they are used in making coins. jevwellery etc
Ans () basic Q4. Which of the following are the most malleable metals?
03 Which of the following non-metals is a liquid? LSodium
.Gold
a Carban [Link] 1. Potassium IV. Silver
c lodine d Sulphur a. () and (V) b. (01) and ()
Ans. (6) Bromine c.(11) and ((V) d. (1) and (V)
Eromine exists as a liquid. Ans. (d) () and (V)
Q4. Hydrogen is used: Q5. Identify the correct statement(s).
a for the synthesis of ammonia The wires that carry current in our homes have a
LL

b. for the synthesis of methyl alcohol coating of PVC or a rubber like material.
II. School bells are made of metals
cin welding torches
d All of the above l. Metals do not conduct electricity
Ans. (d) Al of the abave v. Metals which produce a sound on striking a hard
Q5. Generally, non-metals are bad conductors of electricity but surface are said to be non-sonorous.
a. (0) and (lI) b. () and ()
* which is a form of carbon is a good conductor of
c (t) and () d. Only ()
electricity and is an exceptional non-metal X is:
Ans. (6) () and (1)
a. diamond [Link] Metals conduct electricity. Metals which produce a sound on
c coal d coke striking a hard surface are said to be sonorous.
Ans. (b) graphite
Graphite conducts electricity because of the delocalised
Case Study3
electrons in its structure. All metals do not react with oxygen at the same rate.
Different metals show different reactivities towards
Case Study 2 oxygen. Almost all metals combine with oxygen form
to
An element is a pure substance made up of same kind of metal oxides. Metal oxides are basic in nature. But some
atoms. At present, nearly 118 elements are known but all metal oxides, such as aluminium oxide, zinc
oxide, etc
of them do not occur free in nature, some of them have show both acidic as wvell as basic behaviour.
Most metal
been synthesized by artificial methods. Based on their oxides are insoluble in water but some like sodium oxide
properties, they are mainly classified as metals and non- and potassium oxide dissolve in water to produce
alkalis.
metals. Metals are those elements which lose electrons Read the above passage carefully and
give the answer of
and form positive ions ie, they are electropositive in the following questions.
 Science Class 10 Term 1 61

water is:
a1. Arrangethe metals In the correct order of thelrreactlvity: 01. The acld formed when sulphurtrioxide reacts with
a. Mg> Al> Zn > Fe b. Al > Mg> Fe >Zn a. sulphurous acid
[Link]>Zn>Al>Fe sulphurlc acld
Ans. (c) Mg» Zn > Al> Fe
d. Al>Fe>Zn> Mg b.
c. both a. and b.
a 2. Why does the magneslum d. None of the above,
ribbon necd to be cleaned
before burning it in air? Ans. (b) sulphuric acld
a. To increase its efficiency
S0+H0 HS0, +heat
gas
b. To remove the oxide layer is a very useful
from it 02. An element X' forms an oxide XO, which "X' is:
c. To decrease its efflclency
used In the process of photosynthesis. The element
d. All of the above b. nitrogen
a. sulphur
Ans. (b) To remove the oxide layer from it C. carbon
d. phosphorus

a3. What is the reason for the surface of aluminium turns Into Ans. (c) carbon
oxygen. During
dull colour after few days as shown in the figure? Carbon forms CO2 on reaction with
photosynthesis plants take in CO

Q3. Non-metals generally act as:

a. oxldising agents b. reducing agents
C. both a. and b. d. None of these

Ans. (a) oxldising agents

accept
Non-metals act as oxidising agents since they can
electrons.
on
Q4. Which of the following elements produces basic oxide
a. Due to the formation of a stable aluminium oxide layer.
b. Due to the reaction with atmospheric dirt particles. reacting with oxygen?
c. Due to its ductile nature. a. Chlorine b. Sulphur
d. None of the above [Link] d. Magnesium
Ans. (a) Due to the formation of a stable aluminium oxlde layer. Ans. (d) Magnesium
Q4. Why it is necessary to keep sodium immersed in kerosene Magnesium, being a metal, produces basic oxide on reaction
oil? with oxygen.
2Mg+02 2Mg0
a. Sodium reacts vigorously with the oxygen and water
producinga lot of heat/fire. Q5. Which of the following is a covalent hydride?
[Link] reacts with kerosene to produce by products. [Link] b. NH3
[Link] d. All of these
[Link] is very less reactive metal
d. None of the above Ans. (d) Al of these
Ans. (a) Sodium reacts vigorously with the oxygen and water Carbon, nitrogen and sulphur are non-metals hence, they
producinga lot of heat/fire. form covalent hydrides.
Q5. Aluminium oxide reacts in the following manner witn
Case Study 5
bases. The resultant product is:
Metals are lustrous, malleable, ductile and are good
Al0, +2NaOH conductors of heat and electricity. They are solids at room
a. 2AICl+ 3H0 b. 2NaAlO2 +H0
d. None of these temperature, except mercury which is a liquid. Metals
C. AlO3+H20
Ans. (b) 2NaAlO2 +H,0o
combine with oxygen to form basic oxides. Different
metals have different reactivities with water and dilute
Case Study 4 acids. Non-metals have properties opposite to that of
Non-metals are highly electronegative in nature. They metals.
have a tendency to gain electrons in their valence shell to Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
achieve nearest noble gas configuration. Thus, they form the following questions.
anions and act as good oxidising agents. Q1. The ability of metals to be drawn into thin wire is known as:
X + ne (anion)
a. conductivity b. malleability
(non-metal atom) C. sonorousity d. ductility
They react with air or oxygen on heating to form oxides Ans. (d) ductility
which react with water to form acids. Thus, non-metal a 2. Which of the following metals do not react with oxygen
oxides are acidic in nature. Non-metals do not react with even at high temperatures?
dilute acids at all. This is because they are electronegative
. Ag 1. AL
. Fe
and therefore, cannot displace hydrogen from acids but Au
they form covalent hydrides when heated with hydrogen. a. () and () b.(t) and (V)
give the answer of c.() and () d.() and ()
Read the above passage carefully and
Ans. () () and (1)
the following questions.
62 | MASTERMND CHAPTERWISE QuESTION DANK

a3. Study the image below that shows the reaction of metal give the answer,
a Read the abuve passage carefully and
with cold water.
the following questions
ll and select the
0 1. Match column with column I
ect
optlon using the given codes.
Column Column I
(P) Ga
Ametal that forms
amphoteric oxldes
Motal
B A metal which melts
(g) Au
when keep on our plam.
Wator
A metal that reacts with | )Al
nitric acld
Which of the following metal explains this event? (s) Mn
metal which cannot
D Adisplace
a.K b. Ca c. Mg d. Fe hydrogen from
Ans. (a) K
acids
Q 4. Which among the following statements is incorrect for
magnesium metal?
a. A-(q). B-(p). c-(t). D-(s)
a. It burns in oxygen with a dazzling white flame
b.A-). B-(p). C-(s). D-(9)
C.A-(s). B-(q). C-(). D-(p)
b. It reacts with cold water to form magnesium oxide and
d. A-(), B-(q). c-(p). D-(s)
evolves hydrogen gas
[Link] reacts with hot water to form magnesium hydroxide Ans. (b) A-(), B-(p). C-(s), D-(9)
and evolves hydrogen gas 2. State True (T) or False (F) for the following statements.
d. It reacts with steam to form magnesium hydraxide and Non-metals react
(1) with acids to give a salt and
evolves hydrogen gas hydrogen gas.
Ans. (b) It reacts with cold water to form magnesium oxide and (1) Zinc oxide is amphoteric in nature.
evolves hydrogen gas () Copper oxide is basic in nature.
05. Generally metals react with acids to give salt and hydrogen (IV) Hydrogen gas is evolved when a metal reacts with
gas. Which of the following acids does not give hydrogen dilute acid.
gas on reacting with metals (except Mn and Mg)? () Copper reacts vigorously with dilute HCI.
a.HS0 [Link] cHNO d. All of these (0 (0) (u) (v) () () (m) (ov) (V)
(0

Ans. (c) HNO a.F T F TT b.T F T FF

cFTF FT d.F TT TF
Case Study 6
Although there is no sharp line of distinction between
Ans. (d)F TTT F
03. Tick () the correct statements and cross () the incorrect
metals and non-metals yet there are some distinctive statements.
differences. The main points of differences are: (0)
Non-metals are either solids or gases except mercury
PropertyMetals Non-metals which is a liquid.
(M)
Sodium is a metal and can lose its electrons easily.
Electronic They have 1 to 3 They have 4 to 8
structure electrons in the (1) Most non-metals produce acidic oxides when dissolved
electrons in the in water, Most metals produce basic oxides on reaction
outermost shell of their outermost shell of their
with water
atoms, atoms. (V) Graphite is a conductor of electricity.
State of They are mostly solid at They are either solids or (0 () () (V)
room temperature 0 (0) () (V)
existence gases at room a.
except mercury and temperature (except
C.
gallium hich are liquid. bromine which is a
liquid). Ans. (c) x
Nature of They are electropositive They are electronegative Q 4. An element X (atomic number 12) reacts with another
ions elements and hence, lose elements and hence,gain elemen (atomic number 17) to form a compound z
one or more electrons to one or more electrons to Which of the following statements
are true regarding this
form positive ions. form negative íons. compound?
Nature of They form basic oxides, They form acidic or Molecular formula ofZ is XY2
I.
oxides though some oxides are neutral oxides. It is soluble in water.
II.
amphoteric also. 11. X and Y are Joined
by sharing of electrons.
Displace Metals vhich lie above They do not displace IV. It would conduct
ment of electricity in the molten state.
hydrogen in the hydrogen from acids. a. l and 1I b. Iand I
hydrogen reactivity series displace
from cI, l and V d. I, Il and IV
hydrogen from acids.
acids Ans. (d) 1. Iland IV
 Scionce Class 10 Term 1 63
An element (X) with atomic
number 12 is Mg. Element (Y)
with atomic number7 is CLTherefore, Pb does not react with water at all
AeCl. It is soluble in water. compound (Z) wilt be Thus, K. L, Mand Nare Cu, Zn, Kand Pb respectively.
It is an lonic hydrochloric acid?
conducts electricity in the compound and it Q4. Which metal does not react with dilute
molten state. a. Iron b. Sodium [Link] d. Copper
a5 A metal "M'
does not burn In
vigorously when sprinkled alr but its nillngs burn Ans. (d) Copper
zinc because:
metal M' Is:
in the flame of a burner.
The 5. Food cans are coated with tin and not with
a. zinc is costlier than tin
a. Iron b. Gold
b. zinc has a higher melting point than
tin
[Link] d. Aluminium
C. zinc is more reactive than tin
Ans. (a) Iron
d. zinc Is less reactive than tin
Case Studyy7 Ans. (c) zinc is more reactive than tin
with food
Zinc being more reactive than tin can react
The chemical properties of metals are mostly linked
with elements kept in food cans.
the electron relcasing tendency of their atoms. Greater the
tendency, more will be the reactivity of the metal. They Case tuay o
react with oxygen, water, hydrogen, acids, etc. Since Sample picces of five metals, A, B, C, D and E
are added
they
can lose electrons, they act as reducing agents. Some
to the tabulated solutions separately. The
results observed
reactions of metals are given as: are shown in the table given below:
Metal+Oxygen Metal oxide
Metal+Water Solution
Metal hydroxide + Hydrogen Metals
Metal+Acidailtute) Metal salt + Hydrogen | Fe5O Cus0 Zn50 AgNO Al(50),
Metal X + Salt solution of metal Y Salt solution of No No No A
coating No change
A
Metal X+ Metal Y (Displacement reaction) change change change on
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
metal
Brown No A
coating No change
the following questions B Grey on
01. Metas such as.
deposit coatingchange
and. react so vigorously that metal
they catch fire if kept in the open. Hence, to protect them No change No change
C No No No
and to prevent accidental fires, they are kept immersed change
in.. changechange
a. phosphorus, magnesium, water No No
A
coating No change
change on
b. sodium, potassium, kerosene oil change metal
C. sodium, potassium, water

d. tin, lead, alcohol Brown New New Nochange

coating coating Coating
Ans. (b) sodium, potassium, kerosene oil
2. Which of the following pairs will give displacement Read the observations carefully and give the answer of the
reaction?
following questions:
a. NaCl solution and copper metal
Q1. Which is the most reactive metal?
b. MgCl, solution and aluminium metal
a. B b. C C.D d. E
c.Fe504 5olution and silver metal
Ans. (d) E
d. AgNO solution and copper metal
The most reactive metal is E because it has displaced Zn
Ans. (d) AgNO 5olution and copper metal
from ZnsO4
As copper is more reactive than silver, it displaces silver
Q2. Which is the least reactive metal?
from silver nitrate solution.
03. There are four metals K, L, Mand Identify them
N. by using a.A b.C c.E d. B

Ans. (b) C
1

the hints given below.

K forms basic oxide. The least reactive metal is Cas no reaction takes place with
L forms amphoteric oxid any solution.
Oxide of M dissolves in water to form alkali. 0 3. Activity series of elements is:
N does not react with water at all a. the arrangement of elements in increasing order of
reactivity.
a.K>Zn l> AL M-> Na, N> Fe b. the arrangement of elements in decreasing order of
[Link]. L Na, M»K, N>Zn
reactivity
.KK,LCu M>Pb,K,N-> Na c. the arrangement of oxides of elements in increasing
d.K-> Cu l+Zn M-> N> Pb
order of reactivity.
Ans. (d) KCuL>Zn M>
K, N> Pb
stin nature.
d. None of the above
CuO Is basic in nature., Zn0 Is amphoteric
to form alkali. Ans. (b) the arrangement of elements in decreasing order of
Oxide of potassium dissolves in water reactivity.
2KOH(on)
K +HO
64 MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE OuESTION BANK

Q4. Decreasing
order of reactivity Is: Ans. (c) l and only
IV not react.
[Link]-C-D»E copper, silverand gold do tvith
b. B-E C>D-A Metals such as lead.
.EBD>A»C d. D»C B»E-A water at al
Ans. (c) E>B-D»A»C
Case Study 10
Q5. Which of the following metal ls least reactive? metals, also known as the activi
tivity
The reactivity serics of metals in the
a. Gold arrangement of
b. Copper c. Silver d. Mercury series, refers to the
Ans. (c) Gold reactivities. Metals tend to
descending order of their
form cations. Most of themthe
Case Study 9 readily lose clectrons and oxides
oxygen to form metal
react with atmospheric
The arrangement of metals in a vertical column in the have different reactivitie
However, different metals
decreasing order of heir reactivities is called the metals such as gold and
towards oxygen (unreactive
reactivity series or activity series of metals. The most when exposed to airn
platinum do not readily form oxides
reactive metal is at the top position of the reactivity series. insight into the properties and
Apart from providing
The least reactive metal is at the bottom of the reactivity series has several
reactivities of the metals, the reactivity
series. following graph shows
other important applications. The
Hydrogen, though a non-metal, has been included in the
the activity series of metals.
activity series of metals only for comparison. Apart from 2.0p
it, the hydrogen atom also has tendency to lose its valence
1.5
electron and form cation which behaves like metal. a.
HH +e
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of 0.5
the following questions: 0.0
Q1. Which metal can be displaced [Link] from its salt
0.5
solution?
a. Zinc b. Silver
C. Iron d . Lead
Ans. (b) Silver
Copper is more reactive than sliver thus, it can displace
silver from its salt solution.
02. An element "X' after reacting with acids liberates hydrogen Hg
gas and can displace lead and mercury from their salt
solutions. The metal X is: 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
a. copper b gold Electronegativity (Xpauling
c calcium d. hydrogen.
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer o
Ans. (c) calcium
the following questions
Calcium is more reactive than lead and mercury
Q1. Which of the following is the correct arrangement of the
Q3. The most reactive metal is: given metals in ascending order of their reactivity? Zinc,
a. potassium b. barium Mercury, Aluminium, Sodium
[Link] calcium.
d. a. Zinc> Mercury> Aluminium> Sodium
Ans. (a) potassium b. Sodium>Aluminium> Mercury Zinc
Potassium is present at the top of the activity series c. Sodium >Zinc> Aluminium > Mercury
d. Sodium> Aluminium> Zinc> Mercury
04. The metal which does not liberate hydrogen gas after
reacting with acid is: Ans. (d) Sodium> Aluminium > Zinc > Mercury
lead Q2. Which of the following reactions
a. zinc . cannot occur?
[Link] d. gbld a. 2AgNO(0qg)+ Fels)Fe(NO,)>(ag) +2Ag(s)
Ans. (d) gold b.CuS0,(oq)+Zn(s)Zn50,(aq)+Cu(s)
Gold is below hydrogen in the reactivity series so. it does not [Link],(aqg)+2Ag(s)Culs)+ Ag,S0,(aq)
liberate hydrogen gas on reaction with acids. d.2AgNO(aq)+Zn{s) Zn{NO3)>(ag)+2Ag(s)
Ans. (c) Cu50,(0g)+ 2Ag(s)Culs)+
Q5. Which of the following metals does not react with water at AgS0,(aq)
0 3. In the given reaction,
all?
(0) Sodiumn (11) Copper AlLOs+NaOH X+ HO
(1) Aluminium (IV) Lead What is element X?
ll
a.l and only b. IV only a. NaAlO b. Na3Al c. Na20
IV only d. NaAlO
c.l and d. 1, 1, M and IV Ans. (a) NaAlO
 Class 10 Term 1 65
e Science
correct order of
of the following represents the
Q 4. Which
4. Gencrally, metals react with aclds
to glve salt ana reactivity for the given
metals?
hydrogen gas. Whlch of the following
aclds do not glve a. Na>Mg > Al>
Cu
hydrogen gas on reacting with metals (except Mn and
Na> Al> Cu
Mg)? b. Mg>
a. HSO .HCI [Link]>Mg>Cu>Al
Cu
[Link] d. All of these d. Mg>Al> Na>

Ans. ()HNO Ans. (a)

Na> Mg> Al>Cu a metalreacts with
is not evolved when oxidising [Link]
Q5. Hydrogen gas
5. An aluminium strip Is kept Immersed In freshly prepared
ferrous sulphate solution taken In a test tube, the change
observed Is that:
a. green solutlon slowly turns brown
nitric acid. It is because
oxidises the Ha produced
to any of the nitrogen
HNOs is a strong
to water and itself
But.
gets reduced
oxides (N,0, NO, NO,). H2 gas.
HNO, to evolve
and. react with very dilute
b. lower end of test tube become sllghtly warm
C.a colourless gas wlth the smell of burning sulphur Is a. Pb, Cu
observed b. Na, K
green solution changes to blue.
d. light C. Mg. Mn

Ans. (a) green solution slowly turns brown d. Al, Zn

Ans. (c) Mg. Mn
Case Study
11

On the basis of reactivity of different metals with oxygen, Case Study 12

upon its
chemical reactivity of an clement depends
water and acids as well as displacement reactions, the The elements having less than
metals have been arranged in the decreasing order of their electronic configuration. All chemical
outermost shell show
reactivities. This arrangement is known as activity series eight electrons in the reactions, atoms of all
or reactivity series of metals. reactivity. During chemical
completely filled valence shell.
The basis of reactivity is the tendency of metals to lose elements tend to achieve a
nature. They have tendency
electrons. If a metal can lose electrons easily to form Metals are electropositive in valence shell
to lose one or more
electrons present in the
positive ions, it will react readily with other substances. noble
cations and achieve nearest
Therefore, it will be a reactive metal. On the other hand, if of their atoms to form transfer
compounds formed by the
a metal loses electrons less rapidly to form a positive ion, gas configuration. The
to other are known as ionic
it will react slowly with other substances. Therefore, such of electrons from one element
a metal will be less reactive. or electrovalent compounds.
give the answer of
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of Read the above passage carefully and
the following questions: the following questions
1. Which of the following metals is less reactive than
of three elements X, Y and Z
Q
Q1. The electronic configurations
hydrogen? are
8, 2
a. Copper [Link] X=2,Y=2, 8,7 and Z=2,
d. Lead regarding these
Magnesium Which of the following is correct
c.

Ans. (a) Copper elements?

Copper is placed below hydrogen in activity series therefore
a. X is a metal
it is less reactive than hydrogen.
b. Y is a metal
a 2. Which of the following metals is more reactive than
C. Zisa non-metal
hydrogen?
d. Y is a non-metal and Z is a mnetal
a. Mercury
b. Platinum Ans. (d) Y is a non-metal and Z is a metal
a compound Z.
02. Element X reacts with element to form
Y
G. Iron
During the formation of compound Z, atoms of lose
X one
d. Gold
electron each whereas atoms of Y gain one electron each.
Ans. (c) Iron
Iron is placedabove hydrogen in activity series therefore, it Which of the following properties is not shown by
is more reactive than hydrogen. compound 2?
a 3. Which of the following metals reacts vigorously with a. High melting point
oxygen? [Link] melting point
a Zinc cOccurrence as solid
Magnesium
b. d Conduction of electricity in molten state
Sodium
c.
Ans. (b) Low melting point
d. Copper Z is an lonic compound.
Ans. (c) Sodium
66 I MasTER MIND CHAPTERWISE OUESTION BANK

They have high melting and

Q3. Which of the following is correct representation of exist in the form of crystal.
formation of magnesium chloride? boiling points. answer.
carefully and give the er of
CI
**
Read the above passage
a. Mg (Mg*) the following questions.
change to a cation?
CI 01. Which of the following can
Fluorine b. Oxygen
a.
. Neon
[Link] -(Mg: [Link]
Ans. (c) Potasslum
to cation by losingits
Patasslum being a metal, can change
c Mg o

valence electron.
to an anion?
Q2. Which of the following can change
d. None of the above a. lodine
Ans. (a) b. Magnesium
c. Calcium
Mg d. Xenon

Ans. (a) lodine

lodine, belng a non-metal, can change
to anion by gainino
Mg Mg +2e electron.
L8,2 2,8
Q3. lonic compounds are soluble in
. *** *

28.7 +e a., kerosene

b. petrol
Mg+2C MgCl
C. water
Q4. The electronic configuration of sodium ion is:
d. None of the above
a. 2, 8.8 b. 2, 8,2
Ans. () Water
2,6 d.2.8 lonic compounds are generally soluble in water and
Ans. (d) 2,8
insoluble in kerosene and petrol
Na Na+ e
28,1 a4. Which of the following statements is correct about ionie
Q5. Which of the following represents an electropositive
compounds?
I: They conduct electricity in solid state.
element?
a. 2, 8, 6 b. 2, 8,8 II. They conduct electricity in solutions.
C. 2, 8, 8,1 d. 2,7 II1. They conduct electricity in molten state.

Ans. (c) 2. 8, 8,1 .lonly

(a) and (d) represents electronegative elements and (b) b. only
Il

represents a noble gas. c. I1 only

d. ll and ll
Case Study 13
Ans. (d) lI and |Il
Ionic compound is a chemical compound in which ions lonic compounds do not conduct electricity In solid state as
are held together by ionic bonds. An ionic bond is the type ions are very closely packed and are free to move.
of chemical bond in which two oppositely charged ions Q5. Select the incorrect statement.
are held through electrostatic forces. We know that, metal a. lonic compounds are generally brittle.
atoms have loosely bound valence electrons in their b. lons are the fundamental units of ionic compounds.
valence shell and non-metal atoms need electrons in their [Link] of ionic bonds involve sharing of electrons.
valence shell to attain noble gas configuration. The metal d. NaCl is an ionic compound.
atom loses the valence electrons while non-metal atom Ans. (c) Formation of ionic bonds involve sharing of electrons
accepts these electrons. By losing electrons, metal atoms. Formation of ionic bonds involye complete transfer of
change to cations and by accepting electrons, non-metals electrons from metal atom [Link]-metal atom.
form anions. Ionic compounds are generally solid and
 :

6 Life Processes
Scan the QR Code
to know more about this Chapter

Fastrack REVISIGN
LIfe Processes: Various functions
beings which are necessary to that are carried out by llving9 over the food particle forming a food vacoule. Inside the food
maintain
fe processes. Life processes in livingand continue ufe are called vacuole, complex substances are broken down into simpler ones
respiration, transportation beings include nutritlon, which then diffuse Into the cytoplasm, The remaining undigested
of substances and excretion.
Nutrition: Itis the process of intake food Is moved to the surface of the cell and is then thrown out.
inside of the body of living
of nutrients from outside to the Food Food vacuole with
organisms, providing energy necessary Psoudopodla particlos food and water
to grow, develop and prevent damage. Coll
Types of Nutrition: There are two types memprane8
of nutrition: Surlac0
1. Autotrophic nutrition 2. Heterotrophic nutrition
Autotrophic Nutrition: It is the mode of
nutrition performed by Nuclaus
green plants, some bacteria, etc., For
manufacturing their own food
from inorganic sources, i.e., CO and water.
These organisms are Pseudopodia
called autotrophs. Food substances in
Photosynthesis: It is the process by which green plants synthesize surrounds the vacuole
food
organic food as carbohydrates from carbon dioxide and
water in the
presence of sunlight and chlorophyll. Photosynthesis
occurs in
three stages, i.e., absorption of light energy by chlorophy,
conversion of light into chemical energy and splitting of water
molecules into hydrogen and oxygen and reduction of carbon
dioxide to carbohydrates. The whole process can be shown by the
Following equation: Egestion of Enzymes digest the Digested enzymes
Sunligh undigested food food so that they release into food
6CO% +6HhO CH120 +602
ChlorophyllGlucose are absorbed vacuole

Excess carbohydrates (glucose) produced during photosynthesis Nutritlon in Amoeba

are stored in the form of starch in plants. It serves as internal energy
Nutrition In Humans: It involves breakdown of complex substances
reserve and is used whenever required by the plant.
ingested from outside by different parts of alimentary canal
Chloroplasts:They are the site of photosynthesis and are preseñt in
leaves of a plant. They contain a green coloured pigment called
uman Digestive system: It consists of alimentary canal, i.e., a
tube-like structure consisting of mouth, pharynx, oesophagus,
chlorophyl that traps solar energy from Sun.-
stomach, small intestine and large intestine.
Stomata: These are tiny pores present on the surface of the leaves. Digestive Glands: These include salivary, gastric, intestinal glands
Massive amount of gaseous exchange for the purpose of
photosynthesis and transpiration takes place through stomata. The Salivary along with pancreas and liver.
Glar (in mouth): These secrete saliva con ng y
opening and closing of stomata is a function of the guard cells. amylase which helps in breakdown of starch into simple sugar.
Heterotrophic Nutrition: The mode of nutrition in which anGastric Glands: These are present in the wallof the stomach and
organism takes food from another organism. Heterotrophs cannot releases pepsin, HCl and mucus.
synthesize their own food but are dependent on autotrophs for Liver: It is the largest gland of our body that secretes bile juice for
their nutrition. It can be divided into three types as follows: emulsification of fats, which is stored in gall bladder.
() Saprotrophic Nutrition: It is the mode where nutrition derived
is Pancreas: It secretes pancreatic julce containing trypsin, for
decaying digesting proteins and lipase for breaking down emulsified fats.
from the breakdown of complex molecules in dead and
such as mushroom etc. Intestinal Glands: These are present in walls of small intestine and
organic matter. e.g., Bacteria, fungi secrete intestinal juice.
(i) Holozoic Nutrition: It is the mode of
nutrition where complex
The enzymes present in It finally convert the proteins to amino
simpler Forms, e.g.,
molecules are taken in and broken into aclds, complex carbohydrates into glucose and fats into fatty aclds
Amoeba, cow, goat, humans, etC and glycerol.
In this mode, the organisms derive nutrition Role of VIlli:
(Gii)
Parasitic Nutrition:
live on or inside, e.g., ticks, lice, leech, ) They increases the surface area for absorption of food.
from the host's body they
Cuscuta (Amarbel) in plants etc.
(i) They are rlchly supplied with blood vessels which takes the
a unicellular animal which follows absorbed food to each and every cell of the body, where it is
Nutrition in Amoeba: Amoeba is special organs for nutrition. It
holozoic mode of nutrition. It lacks utilised for obtalning energy, bullding up new tissues and the
(Finger-like extensions) which fuse
Cakes in food using pseudopodia repair of old tissues.
 68 MASTERWD HAPTERVISE OUESToN EAN

Respiratio Tre process by wtich food (gucose) is broken dounto Transpertation in

proe g
Aninaie The fe one part cf the bo
oygen from
provide energy in te fom of ATP (Aderosine Triohosphate). hovement cf food, weter and
Respirations of tro types aerobit and anzercbic respiretian other via rafatory System
Aerobic Respiration: it is complete breakdzwn cf food ocaurting inHuman Grculatory Syste eert,
df hezrt, nternes,
atere
the presence of orygen. treleases large amount of [Link] ATP. verious sbsarces and is composed irs,
Anzercbic Respiretioe is incomplete breakdown oF Food capilaries and blood.
tissue cerSg p2
occurting n e absece cf orygen, releasing small amount of Blood:tisa speiaised connective platelets). t helps in tree
enersy. t an be alzoholie fermentaticn, ie, glucose breaks into elemens (ie, REC WBC 2nd
oTTed
procucts, Et 27d reguates
ethanal and CO or lactic aid fermentation, ie, glucose breaks into Gtrients, çeses, wete
etic acd temperature and pH, etc
Absence ct Types of Blood Vessels:
cryen Etancd Carbon 0Arteries: They carry crygenated blood
from the heart to ver
/nyeas ise Energy organs of the body. They have thidk, elestic well
(2-carton mcieate)
) Veins:Theycollect
deorygenatedblood frovarous organsre
thin wes znd valves
cyopas
ack d bring it back to the [Link] have
Glcose Pyuae
ygen
Energy (i) Capillaries:These are the smallest vessels väich ielp in etee
(6anann on
moieate)
n arLaseacd.
mscde
(3-arton mcieaie)
celsj of material between the blood end
suTourding ces
olece crcuation ocair3, ie, be
8lood Cirautation: in humans, [Link]
Presence d in one comporecte
Energs
cygen passes through the heart twice
Carton écde blzod from the heat t
ntnda) Waer Erergy 0 Systemic Grculation The pathwey of
the rest cf the body and back to the heart
Breakdown of glucose by various pathways blood from tte hean
) Pulmonary Graulation The pathrwey of
Respiratian in Plants:The energy produced in plants by respiration
is utilised in growth and various ife functions. Gaseous exchange in to the lungs and back to the heart
It is similar to plesma but colourss wth
ess protensE
rocs ocaurs by diifusion from air present in soil particdes to the Lymph
from intestine and rairs ba
roos. Gaseous exchnge in stems ocaurs through small pores CaTies digested and absorbed fet
present in the stems called as lenticels. Gaseous exchange in leaves excess Ruid into the blood.
ocurs through difusion of orysen through stomata into the cels Blood Greulation through Heart LugsPunna
ve
of the leaf. (Oxygenated blood) -Left etrium Left ventride Main artery
Respiration in Animal It may oar through their skin or through Aorta)Bocy organs Main vein (Vena ceve)>Right abrin
specfic respiretory orgens. These organs have struchures thet inaezse Rightventride>Pulmonary artery (Deoxysenated blood)LingS
the surfece area vhich is in contzat with the oxygen rich aumosphere Aorta
Respiration in Aquatic Organisms: Fish and other aquatic Vena cava from -Pulmonary arteries
organisms use gills to tzke up oxygen dissolved in water. upper body Pulmonary veins
Fish exchange gases by pulling orygen rich water through their
mouths and pumping it over their gills, where the dissolved oxygen Right atrium- Left atriumn
is taken up by blood Aloving in blood vessels. Vena cava from
The rate of breathing in aquatic organisms is much faster than in lawerbodyinht
terestrial organisms because the amount of dissolved oxygen is Right
feirtylow as compared to the amount of oxygen in air. ventride -Left ventricde
Septum
Respiration in Terrestrial Organisms: These orgánisms use
(dividing wal)
atmospheric oxygen for respiration.
Respiration in Human Beings:It inrvolves inhalation and exhalation, Sectional View of the Human Heart
ie, taking air (oxygen) into the lungs and giving out air (carbon
dioxide) from the lungs. Pulmonary-
Pulmonary vein
Human Respiratory System: it consists of nostrils, pharynx, larynx, artery to
from lungs
trechea, bronchi and bronchioles, alveoli and the lungs. lungs
Lungs: These are the primary organs for respiration, present in the
thoradc cavity. Vena cava- -Aorta
In lungs, millions of balloon-ike structures called alveoli are from body to body
present, which have a rich supply of blood vessels and help in
exchange of gases. Tens
Ribs: These are 12 pairs of bones, which help in respiration by
movement of intercostal musdes attached to them.
Diaphragm: It is a muscular partition between thorax and abdomen. Schematic representation of transport and exchange
It forms the base of chest cavity and helps in breathing. of oxygen and carbon dioxide
Gaseous Exchange in Humans: The blood brings carbon dioxide >Transportation in Plants: Plants have speialised
from the rest of the body for release into the alveoli and the oxygen tissues for
transportation of substances. There are two types
in the alveolar air is taken up by blood in the alveolar blood vessels of vascular
tissues in plants:
to be transported to all the cells in the body. 1. Xylemtransports water and minerals
Haemoglobin: It is the respiratory pigment present in Red Blood
Cells (RBCS) which takes up the oxygen from the air in lungs and
obtained from the soil
composed of tracheids, xylem vessels, xylem ts
parenchyma and
xylem fibre.
carries it to different tissues.
 Scionce Class 10 Term 1 69

2. Phloem transports products of

photosynthesis from the leaves >Urine ls the end product yLeft renal
to other parts of plant, le, formed that contalns artery
translocatlon. It is composed of sleve
tubes, companlon cels, phloem urea, urlc acid, -- Left kidney
Transport of water: It occurs dueparenchyma and phloem flbres. ammonlum salts and
pressure. to transplratlon pull and root pigment
Left renal vein
urochrome Aorta
Transpiration: It Is the loss Imparts yellow colour to
of water vapour from aerlal parts or Left ureter
olant .e Stomata and lenticels. The urlne. Vena cava
transpiration on the walls of v ne pressure exerted by by of Urine: Urine
u called transpiration pull Removal Urinary bladder
causing upward movement of is
of water and minerals. It also helps in remains stored in the
Urethra
temperature regulation. urinary bladder until the
Transport of Food: The transport of soluble products pressure expands too
photosynthesis from the leaves to other of
parts of plant is called much. We can control
translocation. It is a form of active transport the urge to urinate. Excretory system in human beings
and flow of substances
takes place in both directions l.e., it is a two-way traffic in phloem. Kidney disorders occur malfunctions.
The phloem also transports amino acids and
other substances to the when one or both kidneys stop functioning or
storage organs of roots, fruits and seeds and to growing organs. in Plants: It occurs to remove the wastes excreted by
Excretion
Excretion In Animals: It is a biological process for the removal of them during their life processes.
harmful metabolic wastes from the body. during respiration and
Gaseous waste products are carbon dioxide
In unicellular organisms, wastes are excreted via diffusion while oxygen during photosynthesis which are excreted out through
multicellular organisms have specialised organs for excretion. stomata and lenticels.
tio
Human EXcretory system: It removes nitrogenous waste products Liquld waste products are excess water, gums e, degroda
from the body. It includes a pair of kidneys, a pair of ureters, a are excreted by
product of internal tissues, resins, etc. which
urinary bladder and a urethra. transpiration via stomata or hydathodes (guttation).
in cell vacuoles
The nephron is the basic structural and functional unit of the kidney. Solid waste products are stored waste substances
Formation of urine occurs to Ffilter out waste products from the with dead cell. These wastes are removed by dropping
and tissues
blood. It involves three stages i.e., ultrafilteration in glomerulus, of leaves, peeling of bark and felling of fruits.
beings, e.g,
selective reabsorption of useful substances such as glucose, amino Some of the plant wastes are useful products for human
acids, etc., in tubular part and tubular secretion, ie., active secretion essential oils, gums (used to make adhesives), resins, natural rubber
of ions, medicines, drugs, etc, from blood into urine. (tyre industry) and tannin (for leather treatment), etc

Objective TYPE QUESTIONSs

Q4. The autotrophic mode of nutrition requires:
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
Multiple Choice Questions
a. carbon dioxide and water
b. chlorophyll
Q1. Which of the following is an incorrect statement?
(NCERT EXEMPLAR) C. sunlight
d. All of the above
[Link] grow with time
Ans. (d) Al of the above
[Link] must repair and maintain their structure
c. Movement of molecules does not take place among cells Q5. The internal (cellular) energy reserve in autotrophs is:
d. Energy is essential for life processes a. glycogen b. protein (NCERT EXEMPLAR)

Ans. (c) Movement of molecules does not take place

among cells
starch
C. d. fatty acld
Q2. Autotrophic organisms include: Ans. (c) starch
a. bacterla and virus
b. bacterla and fungl a6. Which of the following equations is the summary of
photosynthesis? (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
bacteria
[Link] plants and some
d. green plants and al bacteria a.6CO,+12HO CH0+60+6HO
Ans. () green plants and some bacteria b.6CO, HO+sunlight CHOs +0,+ 6H0
the autotrophs is c.6C0+12tHO + chlorophyll +sunlight
03. Which of the following statements about (NCERTEXEMPLAR) C0
incorrect? +602+6H0
a. They synthesis
carbohydrates from carbon dioxlde and d.6CO2+12H0 +chlorophyll+sunlight
sunlight and chlorophyl
HhOs
water in the presence of +6C02+6H0
in the form of starch
b. They store carbohydrates
c. They convert carbon
dioxide and water Into carbohydrates Ans. (c) 6CO,+12H0+chlorophyll+ sunlight HhD
In the absence of sunlight +602+ 6H0
trophic level in food chains
[Link] constitute the first
Ans. (c) They convert carbon dioxide and water into CT!P
of sunlight Learn the eguation of photosynthesis carefully
carbohydrates in the absence
70 IMASTERMND CHAPTERWISE OUESTION BANK
Cork cut so leaf
through
a7. Choose the event that does not occur in photosynthesis: can pass
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
[Link] of light energy by chlorophyll
reduction of carbon dioxide to carbohydrates
b.
cOxidation of carbon to carbon dioxide Green
loa Leaf removed and
[Link] of light energy to chemical energy
Ans. (c) oxidation of carbon to carbon dioxide Exposed
to light for
tested for starch R
Q8. The site of photosynthesis in the cells of a leaf is: 8 hours Substanco to absorb
a chloroplast b. mitochondria carbon dioxide
ccytoplasm d. protoplasm What are the colours of Qand R, when
the leaf is tested for
Ans. (a) chloroplast starch, using lodine solution?
Q 9. In photosynthesis, which substances are used up, which [Link].
are produced and which are necessary. but remain Brown
Blue/black
unchanged after the reaction?
b. Brown Brown
[Link]. Used up Produced Remain Blue/black Blue/black
Unchanged
d. Brown Blue/black
a. | Carbon dioxide Water Oxygen
Ans. (b) 0-Brown, R-Brown
Chlorophyll Carbon dioxide Water
Oxygen Starch Cellulose CT!P-
The of partleafwas covered and not exposed to sunlight and
Q
did
part was kept in absence of CO2. Thus, both parts leaf not
d Water Oxvgen Chlorophyll R of

Ans. (d) Used up-Water, Produced-Oxygen. Remain Unchanged- form starch and gave a negative testfor starch.
Chlorophyvl
Equation of photosynthesis shows the reactants and
products
Common(!Eror
Most students mark option (a) as the correct answer
6CO+6H0 Chlorophyl 0CHO+602
010. What is the final product of photosynthesis?
Q 14. From which structure, the free oxygen gas produced
a. Protein b. Fat during photosynthesis is released?
c Starch d. Mineral salt a. Epidermis b. Stomata
Ans. (c) Sterch [Link] d. Guard cel

The final product of photosynthesis in plants is glucose and Ans. (b) Stomata
water. The glucose produced is stored as starch in storage The oxygen gas produced during photosynthesis is released
organs into the surroundings through stomata.
Q11. Oxygen liberated during photosynthesis comes from: 015. The opening and closing of the stomatal pore depends
(NCERT EXEMPLAR) upon: (NCERTEXEMPLAR)

a. water b. chlorophy a. oxygen

b. temperature
c carbon dioxide d. glucose
Ans. (a) water Cwater in guard cells
d.
concentration of COz in stomata
012. The diagram shows the arrangement of cells inside the
Ans. () water in guard cells
leaf of a green plant. (No cell contents are shown). Which
Q 16. Which of the following
cells normally contain chloroplasts? structures is involved in gaseous
exchange in woody stem of a plant?,
a. Stomata b. Lenticel
[Link] cell d. Epidermis
Ans. (b) Lenticel
The guard cells regulate the opening and closing
of stomata
to maintain the flow of respiratory as well as photosynthetic
gases (CO2 and Ox) in the plants.
a.1 and 2 b. 1 and 4
a17. Choose the forms in which most plants absorb nitrogen
c2 and 3 d. 2 (i) Proteins
and 4 (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
Ans. (d) 2 and 4 (i) Nitrates and Nitrites
(ii) Urea
013. A plant is kept in the dark for two days. A leaf is used in an
(iv) Atmospheric nitrogen
experiment to investigate the effect of two factors on
photosynthesis as shown in the diagram.
a.() and (i) b.(i)and (i) c.(i) and (iv)
Ans. (b) (i) (ii)
d.() and (iv)
and
 Science Class 10 Tem 1 71
-T!P- KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
Nitrogen is taken up in theform Amoeba ingests food by using its psevdopodia and Paramecium
ofinorganic
nitrates or nitrites or
it is token up as organic compoundsfrom atmosphericnitrogen. uses its hoir like structures colled cilio to sweep the food particles
into its mouth.
a [Link] shows following
kind of nutrition:
a autotrophic b. holozoic a 25. In which order do theseevents occur in human nutrition?
saprotrophic d parasitic a. Digestion ingestion absorption assimilation
Ans. (b) holozoic b. Digestion ingestion assimilation absorption
019. What is the mode of nutrition in fungi? c Ingestion digestion absorption assimilation
a. Autotrophic d. Ingestiondigestion- assimlation absorption
b. Heterotrophic assimilation
cSaprophytic Ans. (c) Ingestion digestion absorption
d. Parasitic
Ans. (c) Saprophytic After ingestion. food is digested in buccal caviny. stomach
Fungal organisms feed on dead and small intestine. Then the products of digestion. ie.
matter. They releas
chemicals to break complex organic matter into simple glucose and amino acids are absorbed from the iteum
forms and absorb them. This is called saprophytic mode of region into the blocd which carries these products to body
nutrition tissues and cells where assimilation occurs
digestive
a20. Select the correct statement: 026. Which is the first enzyme to mix with food in the EXEMMPLAR)
(NCERT EXEMPLAR) (NCERT
a. Heterotrophs do not synthesis their own food tract?
a. Pepsin [Link] cAmylase d. Trypsin
[Link] utilise solar energy for photosynthesis
Ans. (c) Amylase
c Heterotrophs synthesis their own food
d. Heterotrophs are capable of converting carbon dioxide Q 27. Digestion of starch starts from:
a. stomach b. intestine
and water into carbohydrates
coesophagus d. mouth
Ans. (a) Heterotrophs do not synthesis their awn food
a 21. In which of the following groups of organisms, food Ans. (d) mouth
material is broken down outside the body and absorbed? 28. Digestion of food in human starts from:
a. duodenum b. small intestine
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
cmouth d large intestine
a. Mushroorm. green plants, Armoeba
Ans. (c) mouth
b. Yeast mushroom. bread mould
c Paramecium. Amaeba. Cuscuta a 29. Only two of the following statements accurately describe
d. Cuscuta. lice. tapeworm what happens in the mouth.
Ans. (b) Yeast, mushroom. bread moutd 1. Amylase breaks down large starch molecules into
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
smaller maltose molecules
a22. Match column (A) with column (B) 2. Chewing increases the surface area of food for
Column (A) Column (B) digestion
3. Saliva emulsifies fats into smaller droplets
(A) Autotrophic nutrition Leech
4. Teeth breakup large insoluble molecules into smaller
B) Heterotrophic nutrition (ii) Paramedium soluble molecules
Which statements are corect?
(C)Parasiticnutrition Deer
a1and 2 b. 2 and 3
(D) Digestion in food vacuoles (iv) Green plant C3 and 4 d1and 4
Ans. (a) 1and 2
a. A-(iv). B-(i). C-6i). D-() Statement 1 and 2 are correct. Saliva cannot emulsify fats
b. A-(iv). B-(i). G-). D-(i) and teeth do not change insoluble molecules into soluble
cA-(ii). B-(iv). C-(i). D-i) ones. They only help in the chewing of food.
d. A-i). B-iv). C-i). D-(i) 0 30. A few drops of iodine solution were added to rice water.
Ans. (b) A-(iv). B-{ii). C-). D-) The solution tumed blue-black in colour. This indicates
Q23. In Amoeba the digestion is intracellular because: that rice water contains: (NCERT EXEMPLAR)

a. Amoebo is unicellular a. complex proteins b. simple proteins

b. Amoebo is multicellular fats d. starch
u cAmoeba is found in a pond Ans. (d) starch
d. Amoeba is a microscopic animal a31. The part of the digestive system where no digestion takes
Ans. (a) Amoebo is unicellular place is:
a. ileum b. stomach
a 24. Temporary finger like extensions on Amoeba are called: c mouth d. oesophagus
a. cell wal b. pseudopodia
Ans. (d) oesophagus
cilia d. villi
Ans. (b) pseudopodia
72 MASTERND CHAPTERWISE OuESTION BANx

QL water VWater
Te contraction and expansion movement of the walls of Ans () Protein arnino acds andbroken down to anino are
te faxd pipe s alled: hstomach egg wtite is which s not completely b
arasotaton transpiration contains albumin prctein rydrolysed in intestin
C eriscattk mavement d digestion down Some of it is further
abserbed by facd
Ars (eristite mevement where amino acids are
longest small intessine
Q Wich is the corect sequence of parts in human Q33. Which of the following has the
[Link]
anentary canal? NCERTEMFLAR) a Carnivore Autotroph
cHerbivore d
Muth stomach» small intestine-oesophagus
rge intestine Ans (c) Herbivere
Mauch- oesephags » stomach large intestine KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
Smal testine to cllow the celldose s
Nouth Herdcres red c ianger small intestire
stamach oesophagus Small intestine bedigested.
Mauth casophagus » stomach small intestine statement regar
Lange intastine Q41 Which of the following is the corTect
bile?
As (c)cuch»oesophaguS stomach small intestine in ver
large intestine a Sereted by biie duct and stored
bladder and stored in lver
a fsalhay amylase is lacking in the salia, which of the
Sacreted by gell
c Seureted by lher and stered in biie dut
following events in the mouth cavity will be affected? gal bladder
d Secreed by lber and stored in
a Proteis bresing down into amino aids
Ans (c) Sacreted by ther and stored in gell bladder
Starch bresking down into sugs
Q41. Most of the digestion and absorption of the food tas
cFes breaking down into fatty aids and gycercl (CESEZ020
place in the:
dAbserpen cf vitenins
a small intestine b Lver
Ans ) Srth breaking cown into sugers
C stomech d large intestine
a33 The inner üning of stomach is protected by one of the
Ans (a) small intestine
following from hydrochloric acid. Choose the coTect one:
Q42. A gand not associated with the alimentary canal is:
NCERT EXEMPLAR)
a liver b. satvary glands
a pepsin
Cpanaeas d adrenal
Cseivary amylase d bile
Ans. (c) adrenal
Ans (b)muas
Q43. VIli present on the intemal wall of intestine help in the:
03s Which of the following are chiefly digested in the
a emulsiñcation of fats
stemach?
b. breakdown of proteins
a Carboydrates [Link]
c absorption of igested food
cLipids d Fats
d igestion of carbohydrates
Ans (b) Proteins
Ans () absorption of digested food
Q37. The exit of food from the stomach is regulated by:
The small finger-ke projections, ie. villi present in intestine
asphincter muscie [Link] increase the surface area for better absorption af dgested
canal sphincter d pancreas food
Ans (a) sphincter muscde Q4. Which part of alimentary canal receives bile from the liver?
-T!P a Stomach
(NCERTEXEMPLAR)
studying human climentary canal lay stress on the
While b. Small intestine
function ofsphincter muscde cnd anaisphincte. cLarge intestine d Oesophagus
Ans. (b) Small intestine
a 33. When a person eats some egg white, proteins and water
45. In which part of the alimentary canal food is finaly
enter the stomach. Which substances are found leaving digested? (NCERTEXEMPLAR)
the stomach and leaving the smal intestine? a Stomach b. Mauth cavity
SNo Leaving the Stomach Leavingthe small Intestine cLarge intestine d Small intestine
Ans. (d) Small intestine
a Amino 2dds and| Amino adids and water
water Q46. Choose the function of the
pancreatic juice from the
. Fatty adds sycerot Fatty atids glycerol and water
following:
(NCERTEXEMPLARY
a trypsin digests proteins and Upase carbohydrates
and water
b. trypsin digests emulsified
Protein and water Fatty acids and glycerol fats and Upase proteins
[Link] and lipase digest fats
Protelin amino atids Water d trypsin digests proteins and Upase
emulsified fats
and water Ans (d) trypsin digests proteins and
ipase emulsified fats
 Science Class 10
Term 1 73
gastric juice.
1is stomach which secretes
pepsin in
Common Eror- trypsin and amylase.
Gtudentsget conjused and interchange 2is pancreas which secretes intestinal juice (contain a
the functions of trypsin 3 1s small intestine which secrete
and ipose is salivary gland which
number of enzymes) while 6
Which of these is secreted by secretes amylase in saliva.
by:
a 47,
pancreas? 52. The exit of unabsorbed
food material is regulated
a. Trypsin [Link] a
b. anus
[Link] juice a. liver
d. Both a. and b. d. anal sphincter
small intestine
c.
Ans. (d) Both and
a. b.
Ans. (d) anal sphincter
48. Match the terms in column (A) containing
with those in column (B) from mouth into a test-tube
53. When air is blown turned milky due to the
lime water, the lime water
(NCERTEXEMPLAR)
(NCERTEXEMPLAR)
Column (A) Column (B) presence of:
b. carbon dioxide
A Trypsin ) Pancreas a. oxygen
d. water vapour
B Amylase (i) | Liver C. nitrogen
Ans. (6) carbon dioxide
C Bile (ii) Gastric glands
D Pepsin (iv)Saliva CT!Pdioxide is present in exhaled air.
Carbon
a.A-i). B-(v).C-). D-(i) b. A-(v), B-(). C-(i). D-(i)
pyruvic acid
c.A-). B-(v). C-(i), D-(i) c-(v). D-(i) conversion of glucose into
d. A-(Gi). B-().
a54. The process of
Ans. (c) A-). B-(v). C-{i), D-(ii) occurs in:
b. cytoplasm
Lipase acts on: a. mitochondria
49. d. chloroplast
C. outside the cell
a. amino acids b. fats
[Link] d. All of these Ans. (b) cytoplasm glucose is converted into
During aerobic respiration, the
Ans. (6) fats of respiring cells.
pyruvic acid in the cytoplasm
Q50. Large intestine in man mainly carries out: ATP?
Q 55. What is the full form of
a. absorption b. assimilation
triphosphate
d. digestion of carbohydrates a. Adenosine
c digestion of fats
b. Adenosine phosphate
Ans. (a) absorption [Link] tetraphosphate
cT!P-
large intestine
The is the final section of human alimentary
LtEd.(a)None of these
Adenosine triphosphate 7e
Ans.
water from the 1 and 2 contain
canal that performs the vital task of absorbing Q56. An experiment is set up as shown. Flasks
the flasks.
completely digested food. lime water. Air is pumped through
Air flow 1ov
Air
gut. Which numbered
Q51. The diagram shows the human
structures secrete digestive enzymes?

Oesophagus
6-
(food pipe)
Flask 2
Potassium Flask Living animals
hydroxide
solution (absorbs
carbon dioxide)
in flasks 1 and 2 after
What is the appearance of lime water
a period of ten minutes?
Flask 2
[Link]. Flask1
a. Clear Clear
White/Cloudy
Clear
White/Cloudy Clear
Whlte/Cloudy White/Cloudy
b. 1,2,3 and 6 d.
a.12,3 and 4 d. 2,3, 5 and 6
c. 2,3,4 and 5 Ans. (b) Clear, White/Cloudy
Ans. (6) 1. 2,3 and 6
74 IMASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE QuESTION BANK

Living animals resplre and produce carbon dloxlde which a 62. Whlich of the followlng Is most appropriate for aerobie
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
causes lime water in flask 2 to become milky white. resplration?
Potassium hydroxide solution in flask 1 absorb carbon miltochondrl" pyruvate cytoplasm
dioxide and remains clear. a. Glucose
CO+H0+Energy
Q57. Which of the following statement(s) Is (are) correct? mitochondri
cytoplasim Pyruvate cO, +H0+
(i) Pyruvate can be converted into ethanol and carbon b. Glucosc
Enerey
dioxide by yeast mitochondrla
(ii) Fermentation takes place in aerobic bacterla cytoplasm, Pyruvate + Energy-
[Link]
(ii) Fermentation takes place in mitochondria CO+HO
mitochondria
(iv) Fermentation is a form of anaerobic respiration cyloplasm Pyruvate + Energy
d, Glucose-
(NCERT EXEMPLAR) CO2tH0 + Energy
a. (i) and (ii) mitochondria
b.(1) and (iv) Pyruvate + Energy
Ans. (d) Glucose
c. () and (iv) d.() and () CO2+H0+Energy
Ans. (c) () and (iv) beings,
a 63. During deficiency of oxygen in tissues of human
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER acid in the:
pyruvic acid is converted into lactic
Fermentation is carried out by yeast in absence of air. Thus, it is (NCERT EXEMPLAR)

a form of anaerobic respiration. cytoplasm

a. [Link]
mitochondria
C. [Link] body
58. The correct sequence of anaer reactions in yeast is: Ans. (a) cytoplasm
(NCERTEXEMPLAR) Lack of oxygen in muscles often leads to cramps among
mitochondrla a 64.
a. Glucoseoplasm Puryato Ethanol+ cricketers. This results due to: (NCERT EXEMPLAR)

Carbon dioxide a. conversion of pyruvate to ethanol

cytoplasm,Pyruvate
b. Glucose Opas Pyruvate mitochondria Lactic acid b. converslion of pyruvate to glucose
yOplasm acticacid C. non-conversion of glucose to pyruvate
C Glucose Pyruvate
cytoplasm Pyruvate-Oplasm Ethanol + d. conversion of pyruvate to lactic acid
d. Glucose
Ans. (d) conversion of pyruvate to lactic acid
Carbon dioxide
Q65. Name the substances whose build up in the muscles during
Ans. (d) Glucose ytoplasm
Pyruvate Ethanol+ vigorous physical exercise may cause cramps:
Carbon dioxide a. ethanol +carbon dioxide + energ8Y
Q59. The breakdown of pyruvate to give carbon dioxide, water [Link] acid +energy
and energy takes place in: [Link] dioxide + water + energy
. cytoplasm
c chloroplast
b. mitochondria
s M3 d. pyruvate
d. nucleus Ans. (b) lactic acid + energy
Ans. (b) mitochondria
Q60. Which substances are produced by anaerobic respiration in
cT!P
build up of lactic acid
The in our muscles during sudden
yeast? activity causes cramps.
SNo. Carbon
dioxide Alcohol Lactic Acid Water Q 66. During vigorous physical exercise, lactic acid is formed
from glucose inside the muscle cells because:
a. there is lack of oxygen
b. there is lack of water
c. there is excess of carbon dioxide
d. None of the above
Ans. (a) there is lack of oxygen
Key= produced, X = not produced. Muscle cells respire anaerobically to produce
lactic acid in
Ans. (a) Carbon dioxide- Alcohol- Lactic acid-x Water-x the scarcity of oxygen during excessive physical exercise.
During anaerobic respiration in yeast, following equation a 67. Which of the following statement(s) is (are)
true about
shows the products synthesised: respiration?
H0 2C4,0H+2c0 ) During inhalation, ribs move inward
raised
and diaphragm is
a61. Anaerobic process: (CBSE 2020)
a. takes place in yeast during fermentation (i) In the alveoli, exchange of gases
takes. place, i.e
b. takes place in the presence of oxygen oxygen from alveolar air
diffuses into blood and carbon
Cproduces only energy in the muscles of human beings dioxide from blood into alveolar
air
d. produces ethanol oxygen and energy (ii) Haemoglobin has greater affinity for
Ans. (a) takes place in yeast during fermentation than oxygen carbon dioxide
 Science Class 10 Term 1 75

iv) Alveoli increase surface area respiratory system.

a74. The diagram shows part the
of human
far exchange of gases:
(iv) (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
a.() and b.(Git)
and ()
c 0) and (ii)
d.(i) and (i)
Ans.(d) (i) and (iv)
68, During respiration exchange of
gases take place in:
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
[Link] and larynx b. alveoli of lungs
calveoli and throat d. throat and larynx
Ans. (b) alveoli of lungs
O69. Which is the correct sequence
of air passage during
inhalation? (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
[Link]>larynxpharynx trachealungs
b. Nasal passage trachea pharynx- larynx-> alveoli What are W, X, Y and 2?
[Link]- nostrils-pharynxlungs
Rings of
d. Nostrilspharynx larynx- trachea alveoli [Link] Bronchus Bronchiole Larynx cartilage
Ans. (d) Nostrils> pharynx-> larynx- trachea-> alveoli
Z Y
KNOWLEDGE X
BOOSTER- W
W
Passage ofair through the respiratorysystem in human beings: b.
Nostrils Nasal passage Nasal cavity-> Pharynx> Larynx- W X z
C
Blood-Alveolit- Bronchioles-lungs-Bronchi'-Trachea
W X
Capillaries d. Z

Z. Bronchiole -Y, Larynx -W. Rings of

070. Vocal cords occur in:
Ans. (d) Bronchus
cartilage-X
a. pharynx b. gloottis bronchi
Larynx is at the beginning of trachea. After trachea,
C. bronchial tube d. larynx are found which further branch into bronchioles.
Ans. (d) larynx combines with
75. A biochemical compound that readily
071. Trachea do not collapse when there is not much air oxygen and distributes it throughout human body is:
because they are: a. water b. urea
a. thick and muscular .haemoglobin d. acetylcholine
b. having cartilaginous rings Ans. (c) haemoglobin
c. have valves
Q76. The respiratory pigment in human beings is:
d. supported by larynx a. carotene
Ans.(b) having cartilaginous rings 5b. chlorophyl
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER c. haemoglobin

Rings of cartilage ensure that the airpassage does not collapse. mitochondria
i.

Ans. (c) haemoglobin

a72. large quantity of one of the following is removed from
A Q77. The diagram shows a vertical section through the heart.
our body by lungs:
[Link] and H0 b.CO2 only
c.H0 only d. ammonia
Ans. (a) CO, and H,0
not involve
73. Which process occurring in human [Link]
energy from respiration?
a. Contraction of heart muscle
b. Diffusion of oxygen from the
alveoli into the blood
c. Digestion of bread
-
Left ventricle
d. Maintaining a constant body
temperature
Ans. (b) Diffusion of oxygen from the
alveoli into the blood
alveoli occurs due to
Exchange of O2 and C02 at the site of
inhaled air carries more 0 than
diffusion gradient as the
CO2 than the atmospheric
blood and blood contains more
are all energy requiring. What are the functions of the numbered blood vessels?
air. Processes in other options
76 IMASTERMND CHAPTERWISE OueeTION
BANK

Carries blood Caries blood Carrles blood Carles blood KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
SNo Right Right
tobody to lung5fron lungs frombodY Right
Atrium Ventricle
Deoxygenated
Deoxygenateo
tvaAtriurn
(relaxed) (contracts) (relaxed)
Blood
trom body)
4 2 Right
Body Parts Blood Circulation Ventricte
in Hunan Heart (contracts)
Aorta
Lungs
Lelt Left
Ans. (d) 3.1,4,2 Left Left
Atrium
AtriumOxygenated
Ventricle Ventricle blood
Vessel 1 is pulmonary artery and carries blood to lungs. (contracts) (relaxed) (contracts) (relaxed)
Vessel 2 is vena cava and carries blood from body to heart.
blood from the heart to
Vessel 3 is aorta and carries blood from heart to body. Q 81. A blood vessel whlch pumps the
Vessel 4 is pulmonary vein and carries blood from lungs to the entrie body:
heart. a. artery [Link]
CT!P. [Link] d. haemoglobin

Learn the labellings of human heart and also understand their Ans. (a) artery
through:
functions. 82. Bloog vessel carry blood from lungs to heart
a. pulmonary artery b. pulmonary vein
Q78. Which chambers of human heart contain oxygenated [Link] artery d. None of these
blood? Ans. (b) pulmonary vein
a. Left atrium and left ventricle Q 83. The table shows the characteristics of blood in one blood
b. Left atrium and right ventricle vessel of the body.
cRight atrium and left ventricle Carbon dioxide
d. Right atrium and right ventricle
Oxygen Pressure
Concentratlon concentration
Ans. (e) Left atrium and left ventricle
High Low High
Left atrium receives oxygenated blood from pulmonary
vein. This blood enters left ventricle before being pushed Which blood vessel contains blood with these
into aorta in order to supply the whole body characteristies?
Q 79. Which of the following statement(s) is Pulmonary artery
(are) true about a. Aorta feb.
heart? (NCERT EXEMPLAR) c. Pulmonary vein d. Vena cava

Left atrium receives oxygenated blood from different Ans. (a) Aorta
parts of bodywhile right atrium receives deoxygenated Oxygenated blood is carried back to the left atrium through
blood from lungs the pulmonary vein and is pumped into the left ventricle
before leaving the heart through the aorta. The thick
) Left ventricle pumps oxygenated blood to different
muscular wall of the left ventricle of the heart contracts to
body parts while right ventricle pumps deoxygenated
generate the highest pressure possible to pump blood into
blood to lungs
the aorta and to the rest of the body.
(in) Left atrium transfers oxygenated blood to right
84. Which one of the following statements is correct about the
ventricle which sends it to different body parts human circulatory system? (CBSE 2020)
(iv) Right atrium receives deoxygenated blood from a. Blood transports only oxygen and not carbon dioxide
different parts of the body while left ventricle pumps b. Human heart has five chambers
oxygenated blood to different parts of the body [Link] ensure that the blood does not flow backwards
a () b.(i) d. Both oxygen rich and oxygen deficient blood
gets mixed in
c (i) and (iv) d. () and (i) the heart
Ans. (c) i) and (iv) Ans. (c) Valves ensure that the blood does not flow backwards
a 80. What is the correct route for blood flow in a hur n? Q 85. What prevents backflow of blood inside the heart during
a. Left atrium- Left ventricleLungs-> Right ventricle- contraction? (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
Right atrium a. Valves in heart
b. Left atrium Left ventricle Right ventricle -Right b. Thick muscular walls of ventricles
atriumlungs C. Thin walls of atria

Right atrium Right ventricle Left ventricle Left d. All of the above
atriumLungs Ans. (a) Valves In heart
d. Right atrium> Right ventricle Lungs Left atrium- Q 86. The blood leaving the tissues becomes richer
Left ventricle in:
a. carbon dloxide
Ans. (d) Right atrium Right ventricle- LungsLeft atrium-
[Link] (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
C. haemoglobin d. oxygen
Left ventricle (a) carbon dioxide
Ans.
 Science Class 10 | Term 1 77
blood pressure is:
Q 87. The diagram represents a part
of circulatory a93. Instrument used to measure
system. Where is the blood pressure human a. barometer b. potometer
highest? d. sphygmomanometer
C. thermometer
D A Ans. (d) sphygmomanometer
Q 94. In the cardiac cycle, diastole
is:
a. the number of heart beats per minute
b. the relaxation period after contraction
of the heart
c. the forceful pumping action of the heart
d. the contraction period after
relaxation of the heart
contraction of the heart
B Ans. (b) the relaxation period after
(systolic/diastolic) is:
a 95. Normal blood pressure
a. 120/80 mm of Hg
b, 160/80 mm of Hg
Right side of heart Left side of heart
c. 120/60 mm of Hg d. 180/80 mm of Hg
a. A b. B c.C d.D
B
120/80 mm of Hg
Ans. (a)
Ans. (6) pressure
a 96. Which one indicates hypertension or high blood
a 88. In which of the following vertebrate group/groups, heart
(BP)?
does not pump oxygenated blood to different parts of the b. 110/70 c. 130/80 d. 140/90
120/80
a.
body? (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
Ans. (d) 140/90
a. Pisces and amphibians b. Amphibians and reptiles hypertension
Person having blood pressure 140/90, shows
blood pressure for
C. Amphibians only d. Pisces only or high blood pressure. The normal
Ans. (d) Pisces only humans Is 120/80.
Q 89. Single circulation i.e., blood flows through the heart only a 97. The blood has.. cells which plug the leakage in the
injury:
once during one cycle of passage through the body, is vessels by helping to clot the blood at the point of
exhibited by: (NCERT EXEMPLAR) a. red blood b. platelet
a. Labeo, Chameleon. Salamander c. white blood d. None of these
b. Hippocampus, Exocoetus, Anobas Ans. (b) platelet
cHylo, Rona, Draco KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
d. Whale, Dolphin. Turtle
| Platelets are responsible for blood coagulation.
Ans. (b) Hippocampus, Exocoetus, Anabas
a90. Choose the correct statement that deseribes arteries: a 98. Name a circulatory fluid in the human body other than
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
blood.
a. They have thick elastic walls, blood flows under high a. Platelets b. RBC c. Lymph d. Plasma
pressure: collect blood from different organs and bring it Ans. (c) Lymph
back to the heart
b. They have thin walls with valves inside, blood flows under CT!P
Blood is composed of plasma, blood cells and platelets while
low pressure and carry blood away from the heart to
various organs of the body lymph is a type offluid involved in transportation.
. They have thick elastic walls, blood flows under
low
organs of
pressure; carry blood from the heart to various Q 9. Which of the following is responsible for the transport of
the body water and minerals from roots to aerial parts of the plant?
blood
They have thick elastic walls without valves inside.
d. a. Xylem b. Phloem
flows under high pressure and carry blood away from the
Cortex
c. d. Both a and b
of
heart to different parts the body
inside, blood Ans. (a) Xylem
Ans. (d) They have thick elastic walls without valves rooted plants, transport of water and minerals occurs
In
high pressure and carry blood away from the
flows under through xylern.
heart to different parts of the body a 100. What are the functions of the Xylem?
Q 91. Veins can be differentiated from
arteries because the
[Link] Carrying Carrying Giving
veins:
b. have hard walls sugars water mineral ions Support
a. have valves
c. have pure blood in them 3. X

d. have thick walls b.

Ans. (a) have valves
Q 92. The sites of exchange of
wastes, nutrients, gases and
the blood and body cells are the d.
hormones between
=
b. arterioles c. capillarles
.,
d. veins
a. arteries Key a function of xýlem, X = not a function of xylem
Ans. (c) capillaries Ans. (d) X,
78 IMASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE OUESTION BANK

of human beings, whil

Xylem is a part of vascular tissue which not only supports a the main excretory organ
Kicdney is
organs
excretory
stem, but also transport water and mineral ions. Phloem Is other act as accessory
involved in the transport of sugars dissolved in water, Q 108. Structural and functional unit of
kidney is:
neuron d. urethra
Q [Link] process in which loss of water takes place in the form a. nephron b. ureter C.

of water vapour through stomata is called: Ans. (a) nephron

a. transportation b. transpiration
a 109. The filtration units of kidneys are called:
[Link] d. translocation d. nephrons
b. urethra C. neurons
a, ureter
Ans. (b) transpiration
Ans. (d) nephrons
Q 102. The process of transpiration in plants helps in: Q 110. Name the tube which connects the
kidneys to the urinary
a. opening of stomata
bladder:
b. absorption of CO from atmosphere d. ureter
a, urethra b. nephron c. tubule
[Link] conduction of water and minerals
Ans. (d) ureter
d. absorption of O, from atmosphere
Ans. (c) upward conduction of water and minerals
a 111. The diagram given below shows the human excretory
X:
system. Identify the function of part labelled as
Q 103. Which of the following is not a purpose of transpiration?
a. Supplies water for photosynthesis
b. Helps in translocation of sugar in plants Kidneys

[Link] leaf surface

d. Transports minerals from the soil to all the parts of the Ureters
plant
Ans. (6) Helps in translocation of sugar in plants
Transpiration is the loss of water in vapour form from the
leaves. Translocation of sugars in plant is not performed by
transpiration process
9A Aa. to excrete urea b. to produce urea
a 104. The diagram shows parts of a flowering plant. Where does C. to produce urine d. to store urine
the most transpiration take place?
Ans. (d) to store urine
bX
Lower
Uper Upper X given in the diagram is the part of human extretory

d
surtace system called urinary bladder. Its main function is to store
surface of leaf
of leaf Stem/N urine temporarily until it passed out through urethra.
a112. Choose the correct path of urine in our body:
C
Root (NCERTEXEMPLAR)

Ans. (b) Lower surface of leaf [Link]-ureters- urethra > urinary bladder
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER [Link] urinary bladder > urethra > ureters
C. kidney uretersurinary bladder urethra
Lower surface of leaf has more stomata than upper surface of leaf.
d. urinary bladder kidney uretersurethra
That is why,maximum transpiration occurs there. at/ Ans. (c) kidney uretersurinary bladder - urethra
a 105. The movement of food in phloem is called: Q 113. Which part of the nephron allows the
selective re-
a. transpiration [Link] 2absorption of useful substances like glucose, acids, salts
crespiration d. evaporation TE and water into the blood capillaries?
Ans. (b) translocation a. Tubule b. Glomerulus
a 106. Match thewords ofcolumn (A)with that ofcolumn (B): c. Bowman's capsule d. Ureter
Ans. (a) Tubule
Column (A) Column (B)
A. Phloem 0 Transport of water
CT!P-
Glucose, amino acids, salts and a major
amount of water are
B. Xylem Translocation of food
(10 selectively re-absorbed as the urine flows
along the tubule of
C Veins (u) Clotting of blood nephron.

D. Platelets (v) Deoxygenated blood

Q114. The function of the glomerulus and Bowman's
c-(v), D-(i) b. A-{(ii), B-(i), C-(iv). D-()
capsule of
a. A-(i1), B-(0). the nephron is to:
C.
,
A-(i), B-(iv). C-6). D-(i) d. A-(), B-(iv), C-6), D-(i) a. reabsorb water into
the blood
Ans. (a) A-i). B-(). C-(iv), D-(Gi) b. eliminate ammonia from
the body
a 107. Main excretory organ of humans is: [Link] salts and amino acids
a. kidney b. lungs C. skin d. liver d. Filter the blood
and collect the filtrate
Ans. (a) kldney Ans. (d) filter the blood and collect
the filtrate
 Scionco Class 10 Tarm 1 79
a 115. Choose the Incorrect pair:
a. ultrafiltration-glomerulus
Assertion and Reason Type Question
b. concentratlon of urlne-collecting
c. transport duct following qucstlons
of urine-urcter DIrectlons (Q. Nos. 120-163): Each of the
other ls
d. storage of urine-urinay
blacdder conslsts of two statements, one Assertlon A) and the
is

Ans. (b) concentration of urlne-collecting Reason (R). Glve answer

(R)
Concentration of urine
duct a. Both Assertlon (A) and Reason (R) are truc and Reason
takes place In Henlc's loop not in Is the correct explanatlon of ASsertlon
(A)
collecting duct. (R) are true but Reason (R)
b. Both Assertlon (A) and Reason
a116. Which substances willbe (a)
proscnt in the glomerular fltrate [Link] the correct explanation of Assertlon
from the kidncys of a mammal? C. Assertlon (A) Is true but Reason (R) Is falsc
(R) Is true
[Link]. d. Assertion (A) Is false but Reason
Glucose Protein
. Salts a 120. Assertlon (A): Raw materlals needed for
and mincrals.
photosynthesls

b.
are carbon dloxlde, water
utililsed for providing
Reason (R): Carbohydrates are
C
energy to the plants.
d. Ans. (6)
In green parts of
Key present, X = absent Q121, Assertlon (A): Photosynthesls takes place
Ans. ().X. the plants.
In leaves.
In mammals, the glomerular filtrate will consist of glucose Reason (R): Photosynthesls always takes place
and salts by the filteration of blood plasma. The proteins are Ans. (c)
In
not present in glomerular filterate because they are In a few plants, the stem Is green which also takes part
relatively larger in physical size. photosynthesls.
Q117. The processes by which blood is cleared of metabolic a122. Assertlon (A): Amoeba ls an omnivore organism.
wastes in case of kidney failure is called: Reason (R): Llon Is a carnivore organism.
Ans. (b)
a. artificlal kidney [Link] Amoeba an omnlvore organism, Its mode of nutritlon
Is
Is
C. transplantation d. filtration
holozolc. Lion a carnlvore organism
Is because it eats other
Ans. (b) dialysls
animals (meat eaters).
a 118. Figure given below is representing the dialysis machine
Common
for removing nitrogenous wastes in patient with a kidney
failure.
!Eror
Most students are unaware of the fact that Amoeba is an
Blood Dialysis omnlvore organism.
i fluid ou
a 123. Assertion (A): HCl sterllises food by killing pathogens and
other microbes.
Reason (R): HCI helps to emulslfy food and protects
against harmful bacterla.
Blood out
Ans. (6)
Dialysis fluid
in Cellulose ls not digested by carnlvores
Q 124. Assertion (A): Herblvores have longer small intestine than
Which substances out of the following in the dialysis fluld carnlvores.
should be at a lower concentration than in the blood of Reason (R): Carnivores can digest cellulose due to the
patient? presence of enzyme, cellulose.
a. Glucoseand urea b. Glucose and amino acids
Ans. c)
c. Salts and urea d. Glucose and salts
Cellulose Is not digested by carnivores.
Ans. (c) Salts and urea a 125. Assertion (4): Pancreatlc julcedigests starch, proteins and
The dlalysis fluld contalns glucose, water,
ions and various
concentration as the blood except fats.
substances in the same In the Reason (R): Pancreatic julce contalns digestive enzymes
whlch have low concentration
urea and excess salts, like pancreatic amylase, trypsln and lipase.
Urea is a nltrogenous
dialysis fluid when compared to blood.
removed from the body along with the excess Ans. (a)
waste to be
Salts Q 126. Assertion (A): The large intestine ls the largest part of the
is/are: alimentary canal.
0119. Example(s) of waste product in plants
b. oxygen Reason (R): Tiger has a shorter small intestine, than
a. rubber
d. All of these herblvores.
[Link]
Ans. (d)
Ans. (d) All of these
 80 IMASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE UESTION BANK

one of the end

Common(Error- Q 135. Assertion (A): In anaerobic respiration, nd
Most students are unaware of the concept, that small intestine product is alcohol.
ofglucose.
Reason (R):There is an incomplete breakdown
is thelongest part ofthe alimentary canat, Ans. (a)
Small intestine is the largest part of the alimentary canal. is used during tne process
Q136. Assertion (A): Energy of
Tiger which is a carnivores animal has a shorter small respiration.
intestine than herbivores. in the form of ATp
Reason (R): Respiration stores energy
a 127. Assertion (A): Walls of the small intestine has numerous
Ans. (d)
villi. process
a 137. Assertion (A): Respiration is a biochemical
Reason (R): These villi increase the surface area of:
digestion. opposite to photosynthesis.
respiration.
Ans. (c) Reason (R): Energy is released during
Al the digested food is taken up by the walls of small Ans. (a)
biochemical
intestine, which has numerous villi. These increase the Respiration is defined as the process of
occurs in the
surface area of absorption. oxidation of nutrients at cellular level It
temperature
Q 128. Assertion (A): Digestion breaks large complex molecules presence of specific enzymes at optimum in

metabolic activities
to simple smaller molecules which can be easily absorbed. the cells to release energy for various
Reason(R):Digestion is necessary for the absorption of energy in aerobic process is
allQ 138. Assertion (A): The release of
molecules. much more than in anaerobic process.
Ans. (c) Reason (R): Each glucose molecule produces 2 molecules
Digestion breaks large complex organic molecules to simple of ATP and 38 molecules of ATP in aerobic and anaerobic
smaller ones which can be easily absorbed. [Link] respiration, respectively.
molecules such as glucose, vitamin Cetc, do not need any Ans. (c)
digestion before their absorption. KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
Q 129. Assertion (A): Lipase help in emulsification of fats. one
In aerobic process 38 molecules of ATP are released per
Reason (R): Lipase converts fat into fatty acids and glucose molecule is much more than the 2 molecules of ATP pe
glycerol. one glucose molecule in anaerobicprocess.
Ans. (d)
Bile helps in emulsification of fats whereas lipases are the a 139. Assertion (A): The rate of breathing in aquatic organisms is
enzymes which converts fat into fatty acids and glycerol faster than that seen in terrestrial organisms.
a130. Assertion (A): Liver is known as largest gland of the body. Reason (R): The amount of dissolved oxygen is fairly low
Reason (R): It secretes salivary amylase. compared to the amount of oxygen in the air.
Ans. () Ans. (a)
Liver is known as the largest gland of the body, which 0140. Assertion (A): Blood takes up oxygen from the alveolar air
secretes bile juice. Salivary glands secrete salivary amylase. and release COz during exchange.
Q 131. Assertion (A): Carbohydrate digestion mainly takes place Reason (R): The concentration of O, is more in alveolarair.
in small intestine. Ans. (b)
Reason (R): Pancreatic juice contains the enzyme trypsin. a141. Assertion (A): Trachea does not collapse, when there is no
Ans. (b) air in it.
Q 132. Assertion (A): The accumulation of lactic acid in the Reason (R): Trachea is supported by rings of cartilage
muscles causes muscle cramps. Ans. (a)
Reason (R): During vigorous physical exercise. leg muscles a 142. Assetion (A): Lungs always contain a residual volume of
respire anaerobically. air.
Ans. (a)
Reason (R): It provides sufficient time for oxygen to be
Q 133. Assertion (A): Most of the [Link] carry out
absorbed and for carbon dioxide to be released.
aerobic respiration. Ans. (a)
Reason (R): Mitochondria is the site of aerobic respiration During the breathing cycle, when air is taken in and let out
in the cel the lúngs always contain a residual volume of air. It provides
Ans. (b) sufficient time for oxygen to be absorbed and for carbon
0 134. Assertion (A): Humans are not truly aerobic. dioxide to be released.
Reason (R): They produce lactic acid anaerobically. Q 143. Assertion (A): Haemoglobin is the respiratory pigment in
Ans. (6) human beings.
Humans are aerobically respiring animals, but sometimes
Reason (R): It transports oxygen in the humen body.
anaerobic respiration takes place in muscle cells to produce
lactic acid and energy from glucose. Ans. (a)
 Class 10| Term 1 81
TScience |

Haemoglobin is the
respiratory pigment in human [Link] (A): Phloem helps in transtocation of food from
151. Assertion
takes up oxygen from the air the leaves.
in the lungs and carries It to
tissues. to plant.
Reason (R): Phloem provides mechanical support
o 144. Assertion (AJ: Alveoli contain Ans. (c)
an cxtensive network of
blood vessels. Phloem does not provide mechanical support whereas
Reason (R): Alveoli is the site Xylem provides mechanical support.
where exchange of gases dissolved salts
occurs Q 152. Assertion (A):The movement of water and
Ans. (a) in xylem is always upwards.
is due to low
The alveoli of lungs are richly Reason (R): The upward movement of water
supplied with blood and are pressure created by transpiration.
the sites where exchange of gases (0
and CO,) occurs
between blood and atmosphere. Ans. (a)
o 145. Assertion (A): Ventricles have Q 153. Assertion (A): Transpiration is a necessary evil
thicker walls than auricles. absorption
Reason (R): It causes water loss but helps in
Reason (R): Ventricles have to pump blood into various water and minerals.
and upward movement of
organs with great pressure.
Ans. (a)
Ans. (a) is lost
Transpiration is a necessary evil It is so because water
a 146. Assertion (A): Capillaries are the thinnest blood vessels. in the form of vapours from the aerial parts of the plant
But. it helps in absorption and upward
Reason (R): Capillaries connect the branches of arteries through transpiration.
transpiration
and veins. movement of water and minerals creating
Ans. (b) pull
Q 154. Assertion (A): Translocation of sugar occurs through the
Q147. Assertion (A): In human heart, there is no mixing of
phloem.
oxygenated and deoxygenated blood.
Reason (R): It is achieved by diffusion of sugars through
Reason (R): Valves are present in the heart which allows
phloem.s
the movement of blood in one direction only. Ans. ()
Ans. (b) The transport or movement of soluble products
(sugar) of
There is no mixing of oxygenated and deoxygenated blood photosynthesis from leaves to other parts of the plant is
due to presence of interauricular and interventricular termed as translocation. It occurs in the part of vascular
septum. On the other hand, valves are present in the heart tissue known as phloem. The translocation in phloem is
which allows the movenment of blood in one direction only. mainly achieved by utilising energy by expenditure of ATP.
0148, Assertion (A): All the arteries carry oxygenated blood from Q 155. Assertion (A): In humans, major amount of water is
the heart to various organs. absorbed by tubular part of nephron.
Reason (R): Vena cava carries deoxygenated blood to the Reason (R): The amount of water reabsorbed depends on
how much dissolved waste is to be excreted from the body.
heart
Ans (d) Ans. (b)
Q156. Assertion (A): The Bowman's capsule and the tubule
The arteries carry oxygenated blood from the heart to
together make a nephron.
various organs, except pulmonary artery.
Reason (R): The function of tubule is to allow the selective
The veins collect deoxygenated blood from different organs
reabsorption of substances like glucose, amino acids, urea,
and bring back to the heart. except pulmonary vein. salts and water into the blood capillaries.
a149. Assertion (A): Valves are present in the arteries. Ans. (6)
Reason (R): Arteries carry oxygenated blood from heart to a 157. Assertion (A): The main organ of human excretory system
different body parts except pulmonary artery. is kidney.
Ans. (d) eason (R): Kidneys perform the function of removina
Valves are
are absent in arteries, whereas it
in arteries, is preserit
it is preserit in
in veins,
veins, excess water and nitrogenous wastes from the body.
which prevent back flow of blood.
Ans. (a)
150. Assertion (A): It is necessary to separate oxygenated and The main organ of human excretory system is kidney. The
deoxygenated blood in mammas and birds. major function performed by kidneys is to remove excess
are warm bloocdled animals water and nitrogenous wastes from blood in the form of
Reason (R): Mammals and birds
environment for their body urine.
and they depend on
temperature regulation. a 158. Assertion (A): Artificial kidney is a device used to remove
Ans. (c)
nitrogenous waste products from the blood through
to màintain their body dialysis.
Mammals and birds use enerEY
Reason (R): Reabsorption does not occur in artificial
temperature.
In amphiblans or many
reptiles. the body temperature kidney.
in the environment. Ans. (b)
depends on the temperature
82 IMASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE OuESTION
DANK

Kidney failure can be managed by artificial kldnèy. It is

a Ans. (b)
device used to remove nitrogenous waste products from reabsorbed by tho
blood through dialysis.
the Major amount of water ls selectively
In humans. It depends on tha
Artificial kidney is different from natural tubular part of nephron
kidney as the body and dissolved
amount of excess water present the
in ed
process of reabsorption does not occur In artificlal kidney.
body.
Q 159. Assertion (A):
Human body produces hlghly toxlc waste to be excreted from the
biological process by which
substances, which If not eliminated may cause the death. 0 162. Assertion (A): Excretion is the
Reason (R): Excretory organs removes nitrogenous waste harmful wastes areremoved from an organism's body.
from the body. Reason (R): The mode of excretion is
completely same inn
Ans. (b) both unicellular and multicellular
organisms.
The biological process which involves the removal Ans. (c)
of
harmful metabolic wastes from the body ls called excretlon. harmfu
If these harmful wastes
Excretion is the biological process by which
are not removed from the body. metabolic wastes are removed from the body.
The mode of
then it may cause the death of the organisms. in unicellular organisms.h
excretion completely
is different
Q 160. Assertion (A): Haemodialysis can
save the life of patlents unicellular organisms, waste products are diffused into
with kidney failure.
surrounding water through body.
Reason (R): Waste products like urea can be removed from
the blood by haemodialysis. a 163. Assertion Plants excrete various waste products
(A):
Ans. (a) during their life processes.
In case of kidney failure, haemodialysis is
the process of Reason (R): They produce urea just like humans.
purifying blood (or removing waste products ike urea) byan Ans. ()
artificial kidney. This can save the life of the patient. Like human beings and other organisms. plants also excrete
Q161. Assertion (A): In humans, major amount of water is various waste products during their life processes. The
absorbed by the tubular part of nephron. waste products include gums, CO2.O2, resins, rubber etc
Reason (R): Absorption of water depends on the dissolved Urea is produced in humans liver and excreted in the form of
waste to be excreted from the body. urine through urethra. Plants do not produce urea.

Case Based QUESTIONS

Case Study 1 Q1. in the process of photosynthesis:
Auto means self and trophos means nourishment. Plants [Link] light enerEy is converted to chemical energy
are called autotrophs because they make their food b. the light and heat energy are converted to mechanical
themselves. The making of food for themselves is called ener8V
the autotrophic nutritio. [Link] heat energy is converted to mechanical energy
Green plants prepare their own food. They make foodin
[Link] heat and light energy are converted to chemical
energy
the presence of sunlight.
Ans. (d) the heat and light energy are converted to chemical
The process by which green plants prepare food is called energy.
photosynthesis. During this process; the solar energy is Q2. Which of the following can be concluded from the image
converted into chemical energy and carbohydrates are above?
formed. Green leaves are the main sites of photosynthesis. a. Carbon dioxide is obtained from air and water is absorbed
The green portion of the plant contains a pigment from the soil as the raw materials to make glucose
chloroplast;,which contains chlorophyl. b. Both carbon dioxide and water are obtained from the soil
The process of photosynthesis is represented in the as raw materials to form glucose
following figure: [Link] oxygen and carbon dioxide are obtained from air to
form starch which is further converted into glucose
[Link] and oxygen are the raw materials to form glucose
Ans. (a) Carbon dioxide is obtained from air and water is absorbed
from the soil as the raw materials to make glucose
a3. Glucose is end product of the photosynthesis. It has:
a. 6 carbon
atoms
b. 5 carbon atoms
;c.3 carbon atoms
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of d. 7 carbon atoms
the following questions: Ans. (a) 6 carbon atoms
 Science Class 10 Term 1 83
a4. The first event during this process ls: carries it to the rectum and out of the body. The main
[Link] of water molecules into
hydrogen and oxygen function of this organ is to aid in digestion. All nutrients
b. absorption of light energy by
chlorophyll are usunlly ubsorbed into blood across the mucosa of the
[Link] of carbon dioxide small intestine. In addition, the small intestine absorbs
in
[Link] of oxygen water and clectrolytcs, thus playing critical role
Ans. (b) absorption of ight energy by chlorophylt maintenance of body water and acid-base balance.
Q5. Stomata have a great role in photosynthesis as: Read the above passage carefully. and give the answer of
a. the entry of carbon dioxide occurs through the following questions
them intestinal
b. both gaseous exchange and transplration are
done a1. Whlch of the following Is Incorrect regarding
through them vill?
[Link] and oxygen are released through them They help In rapld absorption of digested food
a.
d. the excess water is lost through them b. They Increase the surface area
Ans. (b) both gaseous exchange and transpiration are done c. They are supplled with capillarles
through them d. They only participate in digestion of fats

Case Study 2 Ans. (d) They only partlclpate In digestion of fats

Heterotrophic nutrition is a mode of nutrition in which 02. Which enzymes are likely to act on the baked potatoes
move
organisms obtain readymade organic food from outside eaten by a man, starting from the mouth as they
sources. The organisms that depend upon outside sources down the alimentary canal?
a. Pancreatic amylaseSalivary amylase- Lipases
for obtaining organic nutrients are called heterotrophs.
b. Disaccharidase like maltase-> Lipases Nucleases
Heterotrophic nutrition is of thre types: saprophytic,
c. Salivary amylase Pancreatic amylase
parasitic and holozoic nutrition.
Intestinal Juice
Read the above passage carefully and gve the answer of
d. Salivary maltase- Carboxypeptidase Trypsinogen
the following questions:
Ans. (c) Salivary amylase-> Pancreatic amylase->Intestinal Juice
Q1. In which of the following groups of organisms food
an
material is broken outside the body and absorbed? a3. After surgical removal of infected gall bladder, a person
a. Mushroom. green plants Amoeba must be especially careful to restrict dietary intake of:
Yeast, mushroom, bread mould
b. a. starch b. protein
c Paramecium. Amoebo, Cuscuta C. Sugar [Link]
d. Cuscuta, lice. tapeworm Ans. (d) fat
Ans. (b) Yeast. mushroom, bread mould
02 Which of the following is a parasite?
cT!P-
made
Bile in the liver and stored in the gall bladder helps to
a. Yeast b. Tope-worms emulsify or break the fats present in the food.
CAmoeba d. Earthworm
Ans. (6) Tape-worms Q4. The given flow chart shows the fate of carbohydrates
03. Which of the following is an example of saprotroph? during digestion in the human alimentary canal. Identify
the enzymes acting at stages indicated as A, B, Cand and
D
a. Grass b. Mushroom
cAmoebo d. Paramecium select the correct option.
Ans. (6) Mushroom
Starch
Q4. Heterotrophic nutrition involves:
sugar from inorganic compounds
a. production of simple
b. utilisation of chemical energy to
prepare food
plants
cutilisation of energy obtained by Lactose Maltose Sucrose
d. All of these
by plants
Ans. (c) utilisation of energy obtained
holozoic mode of nutrition?
Q5. Which of the following have
b. Amoebo Galactose Glucose Fructose
a. Giraffe
d. Al of these
Dog a. A-Amylase. B-Maltase, C-Lactase, D-Invertase
Ans. (d) Al of these
A-Amylase. B-Maltase, C-Invertase. D-Lactase
b.
Case Study3 A-Amylase, B-invertase, C-Maltase, D-Lactase
C.
tubular structure within the
The small intestine is a d. A-Amylase, B-Lactase. C-Maltase, D-Invertase
food in continuation with
abdominal cavity that carries the Ans. (d) A-Amylase, B-Lactase, C-Maltase, D-Invertase
from where the large intestine
the stomach up to the colon
84 IMASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE QUESTION DANK

Q5. The given diagram represents a section of small Intestinal correct statement?
04. Which of the following Is a as
shorter small intestine
mucosa. Identify A, B and C. they
a. Herbivores have eat
grasses as they eat meas
b. Carnlvores have larger small Intestine eat
small intestine as they eat grassa.
ses
C. Herblvores have large
d. None of these
as they eat grasse
Ans. (c) Herbivores have large small intestine
intestine convert the
5. The enzymes present in small
-Artery v proteins to. glycerol
-C a. fatty acids b. glucose c amino acids d.

Vein Ans. (c) amino aclds

a. A-Vili, B-Lacteal, C-Capillaries
b. A-Lacteal B-Vill, C-Capillaries
Case Study 5
This energ
c.A-Villi. B-Lacteal C-Crypts We need energy to perform various activities.
various components of
d. A-Crypts, B-Lacteal, c-Capillaries is derived from the catabolism of
Ans. () A-Vili, B-Lacteal C-Crypts food, e.g., proteins, carbohydrates, fats, etc, Oxygen i
required for catabolic processes and carbon dioxide is
Case Study 4 releas l in the process. So, the body requires
a continuous
The small intestine is the longest part of the alimentary exchange of gases, oxygen from the atmosphere is taken
produced is given out. In human
canal. It is a narrow tube of about 6 metres which lies coiled inside and carbon dioxide
in the abdomen. The length of small intestine varies in beings, respiratory pigment called haemoglobin present in

RBCs has very high affinity for oxygen. In tissues

different animals depending on the type of food they eat.
Read the given passage carefully and give the answer of exchange of gases occurs between oxygenated blood and
the following questions: tissue cells.
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
Q1. Humans are not able to digest cellulose whereas they are
be thefollowing questions:
able to digest starch due to: : 01. People living at sea level have around 5 million RBCs per
a. absence of enzyme celulase
b. alkaline pH in smallintestine
s cubic millimetre of their blood whereas those living at an
C presence of villi
altitude of 5400 metres have around 8 milion. This is
d. acidic pH in stomach
because at high altitude:
a. people eat more nutritive food, therefore more RBCs are
Ans. (a) absence of enzyme cellulase
formed
a 2. What will happen if the lining X shown in the figure of b. people get pollution free air to breathe and more oxygen
transverse section of gut is smooth instead of having such is available
foldings? C. atmospheric Oz level is less and hence. more RBCs are

needed to absorb the required amount of O2 to survive

d. there is more UV radiation which enhance RBC production
Ans. (c) atmospherlc 0 level is less and hence more RBCs are
needed to absorb the required amount of O2 to survive
a2. The given graph illustrates the changes in lung volume
during the process of breathing.

a. Surface area of absorption will be enhanced

b. Surface area of absorption will be reduced
c. Alkaline pH will be changed into acidic pH
d. None of these
Ans. (b) Surface area of absorption will be reduced
a3. Butter cannot be digested in the stomach as lipase and bile Volume of air
are:
a. released in small intestine The change from to ll indicates the:
II
a. movement of diaphragm away
b. inactive in stomach from the lungs
b. expansion of the thoracic cavity
[Link] in large intestine [Link] of air out of the lungs
d. absorbed in the stomach d. expansion of ribs
Ans. (a) released in small intestine Ans. (c) movement of air out of the lungs
 Term 1 85
P C Science Class 10

further and
a3. Which one of the following is a possibllity for most of us In cramp prevented Naren from running any
regard to breathing, by making a shatered his dream of winning the marathon.
consclous effort? answer of
a. One can breathe out alr
totally without oxygen Read the above passage carefully and give the
[Link] can breathe out air through Eustachlan tube by the following questions:
closing both nose and mouth Q1. The process which provides most of
the energy to Naren
[Link] can consclously breathe in and breathe out by movin8 for running the marathon is:
the diaphragm alone, without moving the ritbs at all a. anaerobic respiration
d. The lungs can be
made fully empty by forcefully b. aeroblc respiration
breathing out all air from them c. breathing
Ans. (c) One can consclously breathe In and breathe out by d. fermentation
moving the diaphragm alone, without moving the ribs at al Ans. (b) aerobic respiration
a little extra
energy to Naren
a 4. Refer to the given figure and answer the following 02. The process which provides race is:
guestion: for running very fast towards the end of
a. anaeroblc respiration b, aerobic
respiration
c. breathing d. fermentation
Ans. (a) anaerobic respiration
in the leg muscles
Q3. The substance which gets accumulated
of Naren that causes muscle cramp is:
a. pyruvate b. ethanol
C. carbon dioxide
d. lactic acid
Ans. (d) lactie acid
process of
Q 4. Which of the following is correct for the
Rekanaerobic respiration?
Which of these parts lot of energy is
[Link] always A
released
() are the actual sites of respiratory gas exchange? produced
(I) is the common passage for air and food? Yes No
(l11) is provided with incomplete cartilaginous rings?
relaxes and gets back to its original shape during
(IV)
. No Yes
No No
expiration?
Yes
M moves upwards and outwards during inspiration? d Yes
a. (0-s. (10-P. ()-9. (V)-r. (Vt
Ans. (c) No, No
b. ()-r. (1)-p. (1)-q. (V)-5. (V)t
Q5. Based on the data represented in the graph below, among
c.()-t. ()-q. (11)-r. (IV)-s, (V)-p A, B and C the products of respiration in C is likely to be:
d. (0-p. ()-q. (l)-r. (V)-5., (V)-t
Ans. (b) 0)-r. ()-p. (11)-q, (V)-5. (V)t 1t
P-pharynx, q-trachea, r-alveoli, s-diaphragm, t-ribs.
v
Q5. Which of the following sequences is correct to initiate
inspiration?
ribs
() The contraction of intercostal muscles raises the
and sternum
() Volume of thorax increases
(U) Intrathoracic pressure of the lungs decreases
(IV) Diaphragm contraction
Time
( Air rushes into lungs
[Link]+CO2 +38 ATP 6. lactic Acid +CO2 +2 ATP
b.(0). (01). (11). (v). (V) alcohol +CO2 +2 ATP d.CO2 +H0+ 38 ATP
a. (0).(00. (Iv). (V). (1)
C.

d.(V).(0). (0). (lu), (v) Ans. (d) co +H0+38 ATP

c (0. (IV). (0). (m). (v)
(l0). (V)
Ans. (c) (). (IV).
(01).
Case Study 7
Case Study 6 All living cells require energy for various activities. This
was running at energy is available by the breakdown of simple
Naren was participating in a marathon. He
position two, right from the beginning. Just when he was carbohydrates either using oxygen or without using
even faster so oxygen.
close to the finishing line, he started running
when he was about to win the Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
as to stand first. And
cramp in his leg. This the following questtons:
marathon, he got a severe muscle
S6 MaSTENAENO CHAPTERIWISE QVEaTIoN mANN

1 Enenyy n the case of higher plants and animats ls obtalned AnaerobicAervbic Amount of energy is high
dy and consistent in aerobic
and low in anaerabic
uthng [Link] respiration
Amount of energy is high
d. dgestion of foot Anaerobic | Aeroblc inconsistent
and
Ans (tisste resphutin anaerobiC nd lOw in
QThe graph below represents the blood lactie acld aerobic
cwncentration of an athlete during a race of 400 m and
shows a peak at point D. Ans (b) Acroblc Anaerobic Amount of energy is high and
consistent in aerobic
Respiration n athletics
Tthe blood of an athtete was tested before, during
and after in anaeroble
a 400 m race: Q4. The characteristic processes observed
respiration are:
( presence of oxygen

/ (au)
(1) release of carbon dioxide
release of energy
(I) release of lactic acid
a.0. ) onty
b.(0.(Gi).
d.(v) only
(Gid)
only
C.(i. Gi). () only
Ans (). Gi). () only
60 Q5. Study the table below and select the row that has the
Time (seconds) Incorrect information
Lactic acid production has occurred in the athlete whlle [Link] Aerobic Anaerobic
running in the 400 m race. Which of the following AMitochondria
processes explains this event?
[Link] Cytoplasm

[Link] respiration b. Anaerobic respiration End Product cO, and H:0 Ethanol andCO
[Link] d. Breathing Amount of ATP High LOw
Ans. (b) Anaerobic respiration
Oxygen Needed Not needed
a3 Study the graph below that represents thee amount of
energy supplied with respect to the time while an athlete Ans (a) Location Cytoplasm Mitochondria
is running at full speed.
100 Plot A Case Study 8
In fementation, the incomplete oxidation of glucose
achieved under anaerobic conditions by sets of reactions
where pyruvic acid is converted to CO and ethanol. The
enzymes pyruvic acid decarboxylase and aleohol
dehydrogenase catalyse these reactions.
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer
the following questions:
25 Q1. The glven experimental set-up
demonstrates
-Plot B
Soakedseeds
Stand Carbon
dioxide
Testtubes Soaked
Time running at full speed (min) seeds
Mercury
Mercury
Choose the correct combination of plots and Justification
Petridish
provided In the following table:
[Link]. Plot A Plot B Justfication
Aerobic Anaerobic Amount of energy Is low
and inconslstent in aeroblc a. photosynthesis
and high in anaerobic and b. aerobic respiration
low in anaerobic C. anaerobic respiration
Aerobic Anaerobic | Amount of energy is high d. ascent of sap
and consistent In aerobic Ans. (anaerobic respiration
 Science Class 10I Term1 87
minute ls the person taking when at
Q1. Howmany breaths per
a2 Fermentation is represented by the equation: rest?
[Link]+60 6Co,+6HO 686 kcat b. 15
25
[Link] 20HOH+2C0,+59 kcal
.17
d. 20
6CO+12 Lisht
Ans. (b) 15
Chloreph hHO 6H0 60 It ls clear from the given
groph that the person is taking
d.6CO+6HO (60 sec) he will take
breaths per 20 sec. so in minute
I
HO,+60 5
Ans ()CHuos 20H,OH+2C0 59 kcal 15 breaths (5/20 x 60)
In the graph (C,
D, E or F), shows
as Atest tube containing molasses solution and yeast Is kept Q 2. Which two polnts
in a warm place overnight. The gas collected from this Insplration and explration?
mixture: a. D.E
a. extinguishes the flame b. D. F
b. bursts into flame when ignited cCD
c. turns lime water milky d. E.F
d both a andc Ans. (b) D, F
Ans. (d) both a and c volume of lungs. thus at this
Point '0' shows increase in the
while point F shows
a4. Ethyl alcohol fermentation occurs in: point, inspiration is taking place
this point, expiration
a. Lactobacillus b. muscles of humans decrease in the volume of lungs. thus at
c. Yeast d All of the above is taking place.
Ans. (c) Yeast Q3. Which of the following
muscles help during inhalation?
Q5. Though vertebrates are aerobes, but their ( shows a. External intercostal muscles
anaerobic respiration during_() During this, _()_ of b. Internal intercostal muscles
skeletal muscle fibres is broken down to release lactic acid [Link] a and b
and energy. Lactic acid, if accumulates causes muscle d. None of the above
fatigue. Ans. (c) Both a and b
are specialised
Fill up the blanks in the above paragraph and select the External and internal intercostals muscles
corect option. set of muscles that help during inhalation.
(i) i) Q4. During vigorous exercise, the rate of breathing of normal
a. skeletal muscles heavy exercise glucose man is:
b. skeletal muscles mild exercise glycogen a. 20 to 25 imes per minute
heavy exercise glycogen b. 50 to 90 times per minute
c skeletal muscles
heavy exercise glycogen
d. cardiac muscles c 100 to 150 times per minute
heavy exercise glucose
Ans. (a) skeletal muscles d. 40 to 70 times per minute
Ans. (a) 20 to 25 times pet minute
Case Study 9 vigorous exercise.
which The rate of breathing increases during
During inhalation, the diaphragm is contracted This is because the body needs more energy
which can be
During
increases the volume of the lung cavity: oxygen reach the cells
relaxed which decreases the released only if greater amounts of
exhalation, the diaphragm is
given graph is related to For this purpose, the rate of breathing increases
volume of the lung cavity. The
a person at a rest This will increase the supply of oxygen to the cells
the changes in the volume of lungs of
Q5. Which is the correct sequence of air passage during
over a period of 20 seconds.
inhalation?
a. Nostrils larynx> pharynx trachea- lungs
b. Nasal passage- trachea pharynx- larynx> alveoli
c. Larynx-nostrils pharynx lungs
d. Nostrils pharynx>larynx trachea-> alveoli
Ans. (d) Nostrils pharynx- larynx trachea»alveoli

Case Study 10
The human heart is a muscular organ made up of cardiac
IHIIITIIIn
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
muscles. It is a four chambered organ to prevent
o intermixing of oxygenated and de-oxygenated blood.
3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
Time (second)
answer of A thick wall muscle called septunm that separates the two
carefully and give the sides left and right of the heart. Look at the picture.
Read the above passage
the following questions:
 with labele
88 IMASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE OUESTION BANK circulation in humansidentification
blood correct
Q1. The figure shows which gives
A to D. Select the
option
part.
functions of the
of label and
SUponor Aorta
vena cava Pulmonary
artery
PulmonaryY
vein

attud
Mitrml A
gh valvo

Aortio
valvo
Pulmon8
VUVO

Tncuspid eticla
valve

Poricardium
O) ens
Inferior vena cova
C
Body parts
Lumen
A t
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
the following questions:
are
a1. The upper two chambers and lower two chambers B

called: without muscle layer

and wall two cell
a. B-Capillary-Thin
a. Ventricles and auricles respectively
b. Auricles and ventricles respectively
layersthick in jerks/spurts
walled and blood flows
b. C-Vein-Thin to heart,
c. Ventricles and valves respectively vein-Takes oxygenated blood
c D-Pulmonary
d. Arteries and veins respectivelyy
PO2=95 mm Hg
Ans. (b) Auricles and ventricles respectively blood flows evenly
d. A-Artery-Thick walled and
a 2. The artery which carries de-oxygenated blood from the Ans. (c) D-Pulmonary
vein-Takes oxygenated blood to heart,
heart to the lungs is cal d: PO2=95mm Hg8
b. hepaticC artery different body part
a. pulmonary artery Artery, carries blood from heart to
.
renal artery d. vena cava
A
B Capillary, one cel layer thick
Ans. (a) pulmonary artery from different body parts to heat
Q3. Pulmonary vein brings:
Cvein, brings blood transport oxygenated blood to left
D-pulmonary vein,
a. oxygenated blood from the lungs to the heart
atrium.
b. deoxygenated blood from the heart to the lungs
02. Incomplete double circulation is seen in:
.oxygenated blood from the heart to the lungs d. amphibians
C. aves
d. deoxygenated blood from the lungs to the heart a. mammals b. pisces

Ans. (a) oxygenated blood from the lungs to the heart Ans. (d) amphibians
Q4. Which blood vessel does not carry any carbon dioxide? Q 3. Which of the following animals shows double circulatory
a. pulmonary artery b. vena cava
pathway?
cpulmonary vein d. all of these a, Snake b. Frog c. Eel d. Whale
Í
Ans. (c) pulmonary vein Ans. (d) Whale
a5. The de-oxygenated blood from the body organs first
enters:
Q4. The given figure is of circulatory c
system. Identify the labelled
right atrium of the heart through vena cava
a. into
parts (A-D) from the list (-VI).
b. into left atrium of the heart through vena cava
() Pulmonary circulation
cinto right ventricle of the heart through vena cava
d. into right atrium of the heart through aorta
(1) Systemic circulation -Heart

Ans. (a) into right atrium of the heart through vena cava
(1U1)
Superior vena cava
D
(IV) Inferior vena cava
Case Study 11
(V Aorta
Double circulation is a type of cireulating system in which (VI) Veins and venules
the blood passes through the heart twice before (VIl) Arterioles and capillaries
completing a full circuit of the body. Blood is pumped a. A-(V). B-(), c-(), D-(vi)
from the heart to the lungs and returns to the heart before b.A-(VI), B-(V). C-), D-(V)
being distributed to other organs and tissues of the body. c. A-(V), B-(). c-(0). D-(vi)
Read the above passage carefully and ghve the answer of d. A-(Vi). B-(). G(). D-(v)
thefollowing questions: Ans. (a) A-(V). B-(l1). C-()., D-(Vi)
 Science Class 10 Term 1 89

Q5. Select the option which properly represents pulmonary Q5. Blood pressure in the pulmonary
artery is:
circulation in humans. a. more than that of pulmonary veln

a. Left auricleucaygenatedLungs Vgenated less than that In the vena cava

b.
blood blood
Right same as that In aorta
C.
ventricle d. less than pulmonary vein
OvgenateLungs Deoxygenatca, veln
[Link] auricle Rlght Ans. (a) more than that of pulmonary
blood blood
ventrlcle
Case Study 13
[Link] ventricleeoxVgenated Lungs OxygcnatedLeft the wall of a vessel
blood blood The force cxerted by the blood against
aurlcle is called blood pressure. This
pressure is much greater in
ventricleygenated blood inside the
d. Right ing
DeoxVgCnatedpft arteries than in veins. The pressure of
blood blood (contraction) is called
auricle artery during ventricular systole
the artery during
Ans. (c) Right ventricle
Oeoygenated
Lung5
Oxygenated,
Left systolic pressure and pressure in
is called diastolic
blood blood ventricular diastole (relaxation)
auricle
pressure.
Case Study 12 give the answer of
Read the above passage carefully and
Given are the sections of two pipes, A and B. If you need the following questions:
Q1. Study the table given below and
select the row that has
to represent blood vessels with these, which of the pipes
incorrect information:
would correspond to the artery and which one to a vein.
Systolic blood Diastolic blood
Identify it and answer the following questions: [Link]. pressure pressure
. Average range 90-120 mm of
Hg
60-80 mm of Hg

A B
Reading of High Low
aris b.
blood pressure
Ventricles of Contract Relaxed

Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of heart
d Blood pressure Minimum Maximum
the following questions:
in arteries
Q1. Bis best defined as the vessel which
Maximum
a. always supply oxygenated blood to the different organs Ans. (d) Blood pressure in arteries, Minimum,
b. always carry blood away from the heart to
different correct combination to depiet the given figure:
02. Choose the
organs
a
calways break up into capillaries that reunite to form vein
d. always carry blood form one visceral organ
to another Pressure ressure
visceral organ In cuit
below 120 70
Delow 70
different
Ans. (5) always carry blood away from the heart to 120
organs 70
backward flow of blood
02. In A, valves are present to check
flowing at: Sounds Sound
b. high pressure stops
a. atmospheric pressure audible in
stethoscope
d. All of these
c. low pressure
Ans. (c) low pressure
Q3. Which ofthe following
statements is correct regarding A? (x) (y)
organ towards the heart
a. Carries blood from an a. x. Systolic pressure, y. Systolic pressure
b. Always carry oxygenated
blood with single exception
b. x. Systolic pressure, Diastolic pressure
y.
. Carries blood from heart towards the orgán
d. All of these
C.x. Diastoli pressure, y. Systolic pressure
the heart d. x. Diastolic pressure, y. Diastolic pressure
Ans. (a) Carries blood from an organ towards
following statements Is incorrect? Ans. (b) x. Systolic pressure, y. Diastolic pressure
Q4. Which of the are:.
a. A has typically larger
lumen than B 03. The characteristics observed in hypertension
b. Walls of B are elastic
erabling them to stretch and shrink 1. Constriction of arterioles
pressure
during changes in blood 2. Results in rupture of an artery
. Flow of blood is slower
in A than in B.
3. Causes internal bleeding
d. None of the above 4. Increased blood flow
Ans. (d) None of the above
90 IMASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE QUESTION
ANK

Choose the correct option based on the statements. arteries are divided aft.
a 3. The smaller vessels in which iter
a.1and 2 b. 1,2 and 3 c. Only 4 organs are called:
d. 2,3 and4 entering the body
Ans. (d) 2, 3 and 4 a. cytokinesls b. granumn
4. person travelling through a public transport suddenly
A [Link] d. arterioles
fainted. Upon check-up by a health care provider, it was Ans. (d) arterloles
found that his blood pressure was 152-95. Name Q 4. After entering into the tissues, the
arteries are divided
the
medical condition that the person is going through: into:
a. low blood pressure b. high blood pressure a. aorta b. atrium
C. low sugar level d. high sugar level . capillaries d. veins
Ans. (6) high blood pressure Ans. (c) capllaries
Q5. In the above case, the health care provider used an Q5. The blood vessels in which there are no
valves includes:
instrument to check the blood pressure of the patient. a, veins and capillaries
Name the instrument used by the health care provider: b. capillaries and arteries
a. stethoscope b. pulse oximetry oT [Link] and nerves
.
sphygmomanometer d. otoscope d. veins and arteries
Ans. (c) sphygmomanometer Ans. (b) capillaries and arteries

Case Study 14 Case Study 15

Arteries are the vessels which carry blood away from the The food which is prepared by the process of
heart to various organs of the body. Since the blood photosynthesis in the leaves of a plant has to be
emerges from the heart under high pressure, the arteries transported to other parts like stem, roots, branches, etc.
have thick, elastic walls. Veins collect the blood from Therefore, this food is transported to other parts of the
different organs and bring it back to the heart. They do not plant through phloem.
need thick walls because the blood is no longer under Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
pressure, instead they have valves that ensure that the the following questions:
blood flows only in one direction. On reaching an organ or
Q1. A fewdrops of sap were collected by cutting across a plant
tissue, the artery divides into smaller and smaller vessels
stem by a suitable method. The sap was tested chemically.
to bring the blood in contact with all the individual cels. Which one of the following test results indicates that it is
The smallest vessels have walls which are one-cell thick phloem sap?
and are called capillaries. Exchange of material between E
the blood and surrounding cells takes place across this thin
a. Acidic b. Alkaline si
C. Low refractive index d. Absence of sugar
wall. The capillaries then join together to form veins that Ans. (b) Alkaline
convey the blood away from the organ or tissue. KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
To the From the
heart
heart
pHofphloem sop is 7.5-86
Vein Artery
02. What is the direction of movement of sugars in phloem?
a. Bi-directional b. Non-directional

wascts
esnutrientslayer
ISSUes orygen nner
Outer layer
Muscle
[Link]
Ans. (a) Bi-directional
d. Downward

Venules pro
uc Arterioles Q 3. The given diagram shows a potato plant forming new
O tubers. Which route would be taken by most of the food at
this time?

Capillaries 9
O
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
the following questions:
Q1. A blood vessel which carries blood back to the heart is: Newtuber
a. artery b. vein c capillary d. platelet
Ans. (b)vein
02. Theblood vessel which carries oxygenated blood from the Old tuber
Lungs to the heart is:
a. main artery b. pulmonary artery a. 1-423 b.65-23
main vein d. pulmonary vein
C.

Ans. (d) pulmonary vein

c.145 6 d.65 41
Ans. (b) 65-2-3
 91
Science Class 10 | Term 1
affecting
o4 A girdled plant (upto bast) may Q5. Refer to the given graphs regarding factors
will eventually die, because survive for some time but It transpiration rate and select the correct option:
a water will not move downwards
b. water will not move upwards
[Link] and other organic
downwards materials will not move
d. sugars and other
organic materials will not move
upiwards
Ans(c)sugars and other organic
materials will not move
downwards
Q5 Phloem sap is mainly made of: Q-Atmospheric pressure
a. P-atmospheric temperature:
a water and sucrose temperature
b. P-Relative humidity:0-Atmospheric
b water and minerals Q-Light
c. P-Air movement:
.oligosaccharides and hormones
d.P-Atmospheric pressure: Q-Relative humidity
d sucrose onty Q-Atmospheric pressure
Ans. (a) P-atmospheric temperature:
Ans (a water and sucrose
Case Study 16 Case Study 17
other parts of the
Transpiration is the evaporative loss of water by plants. It The transport of food from the leaves to
translocate the food
acurs mainly through the stoma in the leaves. Besides the plant is called translocation. Phloem
cells joined
loss of water vapour in transpiration, exchange of oxygen made in the leaves. Phloem is made of many
in given figure.
and carbon dioxide in the leaf also occurs through pores end to end to form long tubes as shown
called stomata. Normally stomata remain open in the day
time and close during the night.
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
the following questions
01. Which of the following will not directly affect
transpiration?
a Temperature
b. Light
cWind speed
d Chlorophyll content of leaves
Ans. () Chloraphyll content of leaves
02 Water vapour comes out from the plant leaf through the Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
stomatal opening. Through the same stomatal opening. thefollowing questions:
carbon dioxide diffuses into the plant during Q1. Identify the correct pair of labelled parts with the help of
photosynthesis. Reason out the above statements using
this figure:
one of following options: a. W-Sieve plate. Y-Companion cell
a. The above processes happen only during night time b.X-Sieve plate. Z-Companion cell
night
[Link] process occurs during day time and the other at cY-Sieve tubes. Z-5ieve plate
not happen simultaneously
C Both processes can d.X-Companion cell Y-Phloem parenchyma
day time
d Both processes can happen together at Ans. (a) W-Sieve plate. Y-Companion cell
(d) Both processes can happen together at day time
Ans.
true for stomatal The given figure is LS. of phloem in which W represents
Q3. Which of the following statements is not
sieve plate. X represents sieve tubes Y represents
apparatus? companion cell and Z represents phloem parenchyma.
a. Guard cells invariably
posses chloroplasts and
mitochondria 02. Name the labelled part which contains cytoplasm but no
b. Guard cells are always
surrounded by subsidiary cells nucleus:
exchange
c Stomata are involved gaseous
in a. sieve tube b. companion cell
cells are thick
d Inner wall of guard c phloem parenchyma d. sieve plate
Ans. (b) Guard cells are always
surrounded by subsidiary cells Ans. (a) sieve tube
purpose of transpiration?
Q4. Which of the following is nota Sieve tubes (X) are living cells which contain cytoplasm but
transport in plants
a Helps in absorption and no nucleus
b. Prevents loss of water Q3. In which direction phloem translocates the food?
structure of plants by keeping the
c Maintains shape and a. Upward b. Downward
cells turgid cBackward d. Either (a) or (b)
d Supplies water for photosynthesis Ans. (d) Either (a) or (b)
Ans (6) Prevents loss of water
92 IMASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE QUESTiON BANK

The movement of food in phloem can be upward or (11) Micturltlon

downward depending on the needs of the plant.
initiate tha
Q4. The phloem tissue in plants is responsible for the (V) CNS passes on motor messages to
transport smooth muscles of bladder and
of contractlon of
sphincter.
a. amino acids b. simultaneous relaxation of urethral
hormones
. sugar d. All ofthese The correct sequence of the events is:
b. (V)-> ()-> ()->
(9
Ans. (d) All of these a. (0-> ()- (1) -> (V)
The phloem translocates the food (sugar) made In C. (10)- ()> (V)-> (l) d. (1)- (0)>(00>(V)
the
leaves. Besides food molecules. phloem also transports Ans. () (1)()- (V)-> (")
amino acids. hormones synthesised in shoot tips
and root Q 3. A person who is not taking food or beverages will have
tips and other metabolites n
urine:
5. Which of the following is not a part of phloem? a. little glucose b. less urea
a. Companion cells b. Tracheids C. excess urea d. little fat
c. Sieve plate d. Sieve tube Ans. (b) less urea
Ans. (b) Tracheids Q4. Glomerular filtrate is first collected by: ry
Components of phloem are sieve tubes, companion cells distal convoluted tubule
a.
phloem parenchyma and sieve plates. Tracheids
are proximal convoluted tubule
b.
constituent of xylem tissue. c. Bowman's capsule

Case Study 18 .d. loop of Henle

Ans. (c) Bowman's capsule
Out body needs to remove the wastes that build up from
cell activities and from digestion. It these wastes are not Q5. The given figure represents a single nephron from a
removed, then our cells can stop working and we can get mammalian kidney. ldentify the labelled parts, match
very sick. The organs of our excretory system help to them with the options (1-IV) and select the correct answer.
release wastes from our body. The excretory system
consists of a pair of kidney, a pair of ureters a urinary
bladder and a urethra. Each kidney is made up of nearly
one million complex tubular structures called nephrons.
The formation of urine involves various processes that
takes place in the different parts of the nephron. Each
nephron consists of a cup-shaped upper end called
Bowman's capsule containing a bunch of capillaries -D
called glomerulus. Bowman's capsule leads to tubular
structure-proximal convoluted tubule, loop of Henle d
distal convoluted tubule which ultimately joins the
collecting tubule.
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of: P
the following questions: 93
e
Q1. The following substances are the excretory products in
animals. Choose the least toxic form:
a. urea b. uric acid
() The site of ultrafiltration
(11) Collect the urine and make it more concentrated
C. ammonia d.CO2
Ans. (b) uric acid (U1) The main site for the reabsorption of glucose and
02. The outline of principal events of urination is given below amino acids
in random manner: (IV) Largely responsible for the maintenance of blood pH
(1) Stretch receptors on the wall of urinary bladder send a. (0-A. (1)-E. ()-C. (IV)-D
b. ()-A, (1)-B. (11)-C. (V)-D
signals to the CNS. c.0)-8, u)-C, (v)-E d. ()-E. (1)-B. (iM)-D. (IV)-A
(1)-
Ans. (a) (0-A. ()-E. ()-C, (V)-D
(11) The bladder fills with urine and becomes distended.
 Llah
10
Scan the Code QR
to know more about this Chapter

Light-Reflection and Refraction

Fastrack REVISICN
Po5itionO
Kewhich fall gn he process of bouncing back of the light raysFormation of Image by Concave Mirror for Different
on the polished surface of the Objec
an object is called reflectionof
light.
Position of Image ature and Size of
Positlon of Object Image
Laws of Reflection: The laws of reflection of light are:
1. The angle of reflection is equal to 1. Object at infinity Image formed at |Real, inverted,
is
the angle of incldence 1.e., etremelyy
the focus or in the diminished
see fig. (a) in size
focal plane
2. The incident ray, the normal to the mirror at the point of and
2. Object beyond the Image is formed Real, imverted
incidence and the reflected ray, all lie in the same plane. centre of curvaturebetween the fousdiminished
object: Anything which gives out light rays is called an object i.e,a but at a finite and the centre of
|distance [see fig. (b)] ]curvature
bulb, a candle etc.
formed at Real, inverted and
3. Object at the centre Image ís size as
Images: The point at which the reflected rays converge or the point
of curvature |the centre of of the same
Curvature that of object
from where the reflected rays appear to diverge is known as Image'. seefig. (
Images are of two types-real image and virtual image. The image inverted and
Object between the Image is formed Real, larger than object
which can be obtained on a screen is called real image while the focus and the beyond the centre
image which cannot be obtained on a screen is called a virtual image. centre of curvature of curvature
Mirror: The mirror is a shiny polished surface which can reflect the (see fig.(]
rays of light. Mirrors can be plane (reflecting surface is plane) or 5. Object at the focus Image is
formed at |Real, inverted and
infinity extremely
a
spherical (reflecting surface is part of hollow sphere). Spherical see fig. (e)] magnified
mirrors can be of two types: (1) goncave mirror (reflecting surface is Virtual, erect and
6. Object between the Image is formed
curved inwards) and (2) convex mirror (reflecting surface is curved
pole and the focus behind the mirror magnified
outwards). see fig. (01
Characteristics of Image Formed by a Plane Mirror: image formed Mirror
by a plane mirror is: Ray Diagrams for the Image Formation by a Concave M

virtual and erect. D

G) laterally inverted.
At
Gi) of the same size as the object. infinity

v) as far behind the mirror as the object is in front of it.

Special Rays for Formation of Image: The intersection of at least
bwo reflected rays gives the position of image of the
point object. (a)

Any two of the following rays can be considered

for locating the
D
image.
reflection, will pass
) A ray parallel to the principal axís, after
appear
through the principal focus in case of a concave mirror or
focus in case of a convex mírror.
to diverge from the principal
a concave mirror or a
Gi) A ray passing through the principal focus of
focus of a convex C) d) M
ray which is directed towards the principal M
parallel to the principal axis.
mirror, after reflection, will emerge
Gii) A ray passing through the centre of
curvature of a concave mirror
curvature ofa convex
or directed in the direction of the centre of
mirror, after reflection, is reflected back
along the same path.
AL

(iv) A ray incident obliquely to the

príncipal axis, towards the pole of mfinty N

a convex mirror is refilected (e)

mirror, on the concave mirror or
the
obliquely.
94 MASTER MIND CHAPTERWISE COUESTION
DANK

Formation of Image by Convex Mirror for DIfferent Positlons Rectangular Glass Slab; When a light .
Refractlon through a ray isy
the Oblect: of glass slab, then the emergent is paralla
obllquely incident on a it is shifted slightly sidadlle
lncident ray, but
Position of Object Positlon of Image | Nature and Size to the directlon of twice, first, when the ray enterrd
of Here, refractlon takes place when it exits from the glass she
second,
Image glass slab from alr and have been shown in the given ito
1. Object at infinity Image is formed at Virtual, erect and cases of refraction
alr. Both the
see fig. (a)] the principal focus, extremely ray of light at opposite parallel
The extent of bending of the
behind the mirrordiminished AB and CD of rectangular glass
slab is equal and opposite. Hes
CD becomes parallel to the inciden
Object between Image is formed Virtual, erect and the ray emerging from face
infinity and the pole |between the
|diminished but shifts slightly sldeward.
(i.e., at a finite Principal focus and
distance) Incident
the pole, behind the GeRt
Isee fig.(b)] mirror ra
ra Alr

Ray diagrams for the image formation by a rare

convex mirror:

Glass slab
(denser)

c Air
DI
At
N
(rarer)
infinity Emergent
(a) dIsplacement
Lateral
M
ra
Refraction through a Rectangular Glass slab
P where, =Angle of incidence,
***~.
r=Angle of refraction,
e=Angle of emergence.
N Laws of Refraction: Refraction of light occurs according to the
(D)
Following laws:
1. The incident ray, the refracted ray and the normal to the interface
Uses of Concave Mirrors:
of two transparent media at the point of incidence, all lie in the
) Used in torches, search-lights and vehicles headlights to get same plane.
powerful parallel beams of light. 2. The ratio of sine of angle of incidence to the sine of angle of
(i) Used as shaving mirrors to see a larger image of the face. refraction for light of a given colour is constant Fora given pair of
(ii) Used by dentists to see large images of the teeth of patients media (Snell's law). It is expressed as;
(iv) Used to concentrate sunlight to produce heat in solar furnaces. sin-Constant( or n)
Use of Convex Mirrors: Used as rear-view (wing) mirrors in vehicles sinr
because they always give an erect and diminished image. Also, they This constant is knawn as refractive index (w). It can alsobe
have a wider field of view as they are curved outwards. expressed as:
or Speed
of light in vacuum or air
Mirror Formula: It is a relation between distance of object, distance Speed of light in medium
of image from the pole of the mirror and its Focallength i.e, relation Lens: The transparent refracting medium bounded by two surfaces
between 'u','v' and fF is given by in which at least one surface is curved, is called lens. Lenses areof
1
two types:
fuv 1. Convex lens is thicker at the centre and thinner at
the edges.
2. Concave lens is thinner at the centre and thicker. at the edges.
Magnification or Linear Magnification: It is defined as the ratio of
height of image to the height of the object. It is represented by 'm'. Concave lens is a diverging lens (diverges the light) and convex
lens is a converging lens (converges the light).
Itis also related to the distance of object (u) and distance or imdge Special Rays for Formation of Image: For drawing ray diagrams in
(v)i.e., lenses, alike of spherical mirrórs, we consider any
Magnification (m) =Height of
image (h,) two of the
following rays:
Height of object (h,) () A ray of light From the object, [Link] the
principal axis, after
Imagedistance(-v) refraction from a convex lens, passes through
the principal focus
Object distance (u) on the other side of the lens. In case
of a concave lens, the ray
appears to diverge from the principal focus
Refraction: Bending of light ray when it passes from one medium to located on the same
side of the lens.
another is called refraction. When light travels from a rarer medium (i) A ray of light passing through a principal
to a denser medium, it bends towards the normal (i> r) and when it focus, after refraction
from a convex lens, will emerge parallel
travels froma denser medium to a rarer medium, it bends away from to the principal axis. A ray
of light appearing to meetat the principal
after refraction, will emerge parallel to thefocus of a concave lens
the normal (i« r), principal axis.
where, i= Angle of incidence, and (ii) A ray of light passing through the
optical centre of a lens wil
r= Angle of refraction. emerge without any deviation.
 | Class 10 Term 1| 95
Scionce
M
rmation of Image by
Forma Convex Lens
Object: for Different Posltions of
the i
osition of ject Position of B
Size of Image Nature ofF
Image Image
1. Objectat Image is
infinity Extremely
formed at Fa diminished Real and N
|inverted
see fig.) (0)

2
object beyond Image is Diminished Real and M
2F (at a finite formed
inverted
distance) between F2
see fig.(b)]L and 2F2 2F2
C C2 g
3. Object at 2F Image is
Same size Real and
B' 2F1 FB
see fig.(c)]_ formed at 2F inverted
N
object Image is Magnified Real and
between F formed inverted
and 2F1 beyond 2F2 Lens for Different
Positions of
see fig.(d)]L Formation of Image by Concave
Object at F the Object:
Image is Highly Real and Size of Nature of
see Fig. (e)] formed at magnified inverted Position of Object Position of
Image Image Image
infinity
Virtual and
object Image is Magnified |Virtual and 1. Object at Image is formed Highly erect
diminished
between lens formed on the erect infinity : at the focus on
and F same side of (see fig. (a)] the same side of
Isee fig. ( the lens as the |lens as the object
Virtual and
object Object Image is formed Diminished
between the erect
Ray Diagrams for the Image Formation by a Convex Lens: anywhere
between Focus and the :
optical centre optical cèntre and
and infinity on the same side
C2 see fig. (b] of lens as the
|object
Ray Diagrams for the Image
Formation by a Concave Lens:
M
M

(a)
M
A
2F15

A 6 (6)

Lens Formula: represents the relationship between the object

It
focallength (). It can be
() distance (u), the image distance (v) and the
expressed as,
111
V uF
2F2 of image to the height
CaB Linear Magnification: The ratio of the height
(m).
2F1 of object is known as linear magnification
1

N
Linear magnification (m)or
converge or diverge light
(C)
Power of a Lens: The ability of a lens to (P) lens. It is always
M
rays after refraction is known as power of the
the reciprocal of focal length.
1 100 itt 3
C P-flm) flcm)
2F, B
The unit of power of lens is dioptre (D).
One dioptre is the power of a lens whose focal length
is 1 m and is

represented by 'D ". Power of a convex lens is positive and that of

a
(d) concave lens is negative.
96| MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE UESTION BANK

Objective TYPE QUESTIONS

or more:
Multiple Choice Questions Q8. A real Image is formed when two
a. reflected rays meet
b. refracted rays meet
Q1. A mirror which can produce a magnification C. reflected rays appear to meet
of +1 is:
a. convex mirror d. Both a. and b.
b. concave mirror Ans. (d) Both a. and b.
C. plane mirror S. The image of our face in a plane
mirror is: 3
d. both concave and plane mirror [Link] b. magnified
Ans. (c) plane mirror . diminished d. None of these mD
02. A ball is held
50 cm in front of a plane mirror. The distance Ans.
(d) None of these
between the ball and its image is: CT!P-
a. 100 cm b. 150 cm Image formed by a plane mirror is of the same siz e as the
c200cmn d.O cm
object
Ans. (a) 100 cm
Q10. What is the nature of the image formed by a plane mirror?
CT!P-
For plane mirror, distance between object and image
a. Virtual and erect b. The same size as the object

CLaterally inverted d. All of these

= 2x distance between object and mirror Ans. (d) Al of these
Q11. The image formed by a plane miror is:
Q3. The angle of reflection is the angle between:
a. the reflected ray and surface of mirror [Link] behind the mirror and enlarged
b. virtual behind the mirror and of the same size as the
[Link] incident ray and surface of mirror object
c. thenormal to the surface of the mirror and incident ray creal at the surface of the mirror and enlarged
the
d. normal to the surface of the mirror and reflected ray d. real, behind the mirror and of the same size as the
Ans. (d) the normal to the surface of the mirror and reflected ray object
Q4. A virtual image is always [Link] respect to the Ans. (b) virtual, behind the mirror and of the same size as the
object object
a. on the same side of the plane mirror
b. on the opposite side of the plane
CT!P:
mirroragito vet Learn the characteristics of image formed by a plane mirror.
c. inside the plane mirror
d. top of the plane mirror Q 12. A man 180 cm high stands in front of a plane mirror. His
Ans: (b) on the opposite side of the plane mirror eyes are at a height of 172 cm from the floor. Then to see
Q5: The laws of reflection hold true for: (C8SE 2020) his full image for minimum length of mirror, the lower end
a. plane mirrors only [Link] mirrors only of the mirror should be placed at a height of:
[Link] mirrors only d. all reflecting surfaces a. 86 cm from the floor b. 94 cm from the floor
Ans. (d) all reflecting surfaces c4 cm from the floor d.8 cm from the floor
Ans. (a) 86 cm from the floor
a6. Find the angle of incidence and angle of reflection from
the diagram: Length of mirror for full size image is 180 =90 cm. The
2
lower end of mirror is 180-(90+ 4)-86 cm from the floor.
a13. Two vertical plane mirrors are inclined at an angle of 60
with each other. A ray of light travelling horizontally ls
Mirror
reflected first from one mirror and then from the other
surface 35
mirror. Then, the resultant deviation is:
a. 180 b. 240
a. 35.35 b. 55. 55
Ans. (b) 240
c60 d . 120
c60,60 d. 30. 30
Mi
Ans. (6) 55.55
4-90°-35° 55
i=t=55
07. The amount of light reflected depends upon:
a. the nature of material of the object a12060a030
O
the nature of the surface
b.
cthe smoothness of the surface 60 60
d. All of the above
Ans. (d) Al of the above Total deviation is 120° +120° 240
 eleScience Class 10 | Term 1| 97
mirror. The
object is placed 20 cm in front of a plane
a 14. The radius of curvature of concave mlrror Is 12 cm. Then, a 21. An
the object. The
distance
the focal length will be: mirror is moved 2 cm towards images
original and final
a. 12 cm between the positions of the
b.6 cm C,-24 cm d.-6 cm
(d)-6 cm seen In the mirror is: d. 22 cm
Ans. c. 10 cm
a.2 cm b.4 cm
Given. radius of curvature, R 12 cm
We know that the focal length of concave mirror nas Ans. (a) 2 cm Distance
Required distance = Distance of original image -
negative value.
Hence, focal length. of final Image
20-18 2 cm

.-6cm a 22. The figure glven

alongside shows
correct
the image of a clock
time is:
as

a
015. An object is placed at a distance of 10 cm In front of plane seen In a plane mirror, The
b. 2:35
mirror, then the distance of Image from mlrror wll be: a, 2:25
d. 9:25
a.5 cm b. 0 cm .645
c. 20 cm
d.0 Ans. (d) 9.25
mirror is
Ans. (b) 10 cm Incident ray and the plane
a 23,The angle between an and
The distance of image Is equal to the distance of object between the incident ray
from mirror. Therefore, the distance of Image from mirror 35°. The totat angle
is 10 cm. reflected ray will be: d. 110
b. 70 c. 105
a. 35
a16. A man is 6.0 ft tall. What is the smallest size plane mirror
Ans. (d) 110
he can use to see his entire image?
a. 3.0 ft b.6.0 ft c.12ft d. 24 ft CommonAEror- conside
Ans. (a) 3.00ft
Students do not read the
question carefully and
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER Zi=35° and proceed further.
Minimum size of plane mirror required to see full object
Size of object

Q17. Focal length of a plane mirror is: 1 j 0 55°

X35°
a. zero b. infinite 35°X
c 25 cm d.-25 cm M O N
Ans. (b) infinite From the figure, i = s=55°
CT!P- 4+4r 55°+ 55° 110
perpendicularly on the
Focal length of plane mirror is infinite. a 24. A ray of light falls normally or
is not true
surface of a mirror. Which of the following
a flower is
Q18. Two plane mirrors are set at right angle and regarding this?
placed in between the mirrors. The number of images of
ya. The angle of incidence for such
a ray of light is zero
light is zero
the flower which will be seen is: [Link] angle of reflection for such a ray of
one
. two c. Such ray of light reflects back along the
same path
. three .four
d.A ray of light in this
case does not follow law of reflection
Ans. (c) three Ans. (d) Aray of light in this case does not
follow law of reflection
Number of images
360 When a ray of light falls normally or perpendicularly on the
surface of a mirror, then the angle of incidence (i) and
where, 0 is the angle between the mirrors. zero. The ray of light reflects back
angle of reflection (r) are
Number of images= 36-1=4-1=3
90° along the same path without any deviation. Therefore
is follows the law of reflection.
a 19. The sideways reversal of the image by plane mirror
a 25. is an imaginary line perpendicular to the surface:
called: b. Incident ray
b. parallax a. Normal
a. lateral inversion
c. Reflected ray d. Refracted ray
coptical illusion d. None of these
(a) inversion Ans. (a) Normal
Ans. lateral
between: Q 26. When light falls on a smooth polished surface, most of it:
Q 20. The angle of incidence is the angle
the surface of the mirror a. is reflected in the same direction
a. the incident ray and
and the surface of the mirror b. is reflected in different directions
b. the reflected ray
surface and the incident ray [Link] scattered
.the normal to the reflected ray
d. the normal to the surface and the d. is refracted into the second medium
surface and the incident ray same direction
Ans. (c) the normal to the Ans. (a) is reflected in the
98 MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE QUESTION BANK
convex mirror is
a27. Image formed by reflection from a plane miror is: magnification produced by a image of a
ASthe therefore. a futl length
[Link] and inverted b. virtual and erect always less than one. definltely be seen by using a
[Link] and erect d. virtual and Inverted distant tall bulding can
Ans. (b) virtual and erect convex mirror. concave mirror. Tha
60 cm in front of a cm in front
a 28. An object is placed at a distance of 0.25 m in front of a Q34. An object ls placed
mirror is located 30
ont of
plane mirror. The distance betwecn the obJect and image real image formed bythe magnification?
object's
will be: the mlrror. What Is the
a. +2
b.-2
a.0.25 m b. 10 m c.0.5 m d. 0.125 m ,-0.5
Ans. (c) 0.5 m C.++0.5
Distance between object and image
Ans. (d)-0.5
-0.25+0.25 0.5m CommonEror formulo of
magnificotion, ie,
Q [Link] angle of incidence for a ray of light having zero Usually students apply wrong
reflection angle is: case of spherical mirors.
a. b. 30 c. 45 .90
m=in
T
em.v-30C
Ans (a) 0
For reflecting surface i =4
U-60cm. e
Q30 A child is standing in front of a magic mirror. She finds the
image of her head bigger, the middle portion of her body -= -0.5 J 6d
of the same size and that of the legs smaller. The following
in front ofa convex mirror is
is the order of combinations for the magic mirror from the Q35. The image of an object placed
top. (NCERTEXEMPLAR)
formed:
a. Plane. convex and concave a. at the object itself
in front of the mirror
b. Convex, concave and plane b. at twice the distance of the object
in front of the mirror
cConcave. plane and convex .at half the distance of the object
d. Convex plane and concave d. behind the mirror
Ans. ( Concave. plane and convex Ans. (d) behind the mirror
a 31. Magnification produced by a rear view mirror fitted in 36. An object is placed 40.0 cm in front a
of convex mirror. The
vehicles: (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
image appears 15 cm behind the mirror. What is the focal
a. is less than one length of the mirror?
b. is more than one a. +24 cm b. +11 cm
cis equal to one c-11 cm d.-24 c
d. can be more than or less than one depending upon the Ans. (a) +24 cm
position of the object in front of it
Ans. (a) is less than one CT!P- Ev
Focal length is positive for a convex mirror
a 32. Rays from Sun converge at a point 15 cm in front of a
concave mirror. Where should an object be placed so that cm. v =15 cm
size of its image is equal to the size of the object?
Here, u40 tia
Using mirror formula,.
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
1,1
a. 15 cm in front of the mirror
b.30 cm in front of the mirror
CBetween 15 cm and 30 cm in front of the mirror 40 15
-3+ 8
d. More than 30 cm in front of the mirror
120
Ans. (b)30 cm in front of the mirror 120
As rays from Sun converge at a point 15 cm in front of a
f 24 cm
concave mirror, therefore,f-15 cm.
a 37. No matter how far you stand from a mirror, your image
For size of object equal to size of image,
appears erect. The mirror is likely to be: (NCERTD

U=C =2f = -30 cm a. only plane b. only concave

Object should be placed 30 cm in front of the mirror.
conly convex d. either plane or convex
a 33. A full length image of a distant tall building can definitely Ans. (d) either plane or convex
seen byusing:
be
a. a concave mirror
rtt: (NCERTEXEMPLAR)
a 38. When an object is kept within the focus of a concave
mirror, an enlarged image is formed behind the mirro.
b. a convex mirror
This image is: (CBSE2020)
ca plane mirror
a. real b. inverted
d. Both concave as well as plane mirror
c. virtual and inverted d. virtual and erect
Ans. (b) a convex mirror
Ans. (d) virtual and erect
 Science Cass t0iTemt 99
Q T studants ASaickoussad adistant
buding ona
STan n te del of a conane miror. To detvmine
fcallenth of the concave mimor they mezsarad the
stances s ghendelow:
Sudet : Rrum mior to the sreen Pstve sign denotes that image is fomed bettd the
Studet Fron bilding to the screem
udet Fron tuilšing to the min QAnodjoct is pacad 20 cm from the concave mirror of faxal
Wo measend the fical length correty? length 10 cmy the image is fommed
Oy tAands dSandC abetind the airror
b behveen tthe rrror md
tocuus

Q nthe tllening codumns, the position of anodject is ghen

n Cotamnland the nature ofimage fomei ina ncave d at the centre of cunvature ef niror
mior is gien in Column lI: Ans (d) at the centre of curvature of miror
Gven, focal length of concave maror,
Column Cotumn f 10cm
(Pesition of odjact) Nature of image)_ Distance cf otject from concave miror
tinino Raal -20cm
From the mror formla

At centre of
Dirinishad

DAtocus Enlarsad
v=-20cm V=U
D Thas the dnnage is formad at the centre of cunature of

T.S
-CommonAEror-
Students get confsed bedveen the crtesion sipn conertion
s IT.S
ofcorane cnd amer eirors
Q44. A virtual image three times the size of the object is
ob ned with a concave mirror of radius of curvature
Q 41. In torches, searchh lights and headlights of vehicles, the 36 cm. The distance of the odject from the mirror is:
NERTEREMPLAN)
bulb is placed: a 20 cm
a beween the pole and the focus of the reflector C2cm d5 cm
venyneEr to the focus of the refector Ans ()12 cm
cbetnesn the fousand centreof curvature of the reñector Let cbjact distance be -u
dat the centre of auneture of the refecter
n ) veny nser to the foas of the reñector
We know that f-
Q2
a
An object is placed 20.0 cam in front of concave mirror
whese focal length is 25.0 cm Where is the image
f18
Located?
Magnification m=3- Va+
a 10 x10 cm in front of the mirror Using miror formula,
b 1010 am behind the mitor
c5010'am in front of the mTor uf
d 50x10' am behind the mirrTor
Ans (b) 10 x70 cm behind the mirrer
CT!P
Reod the çuestion corefuly ond urderstand whct
is being
1
csied in the question. Be ccrefil nhie
substituting volues in u-12 cmn
Q45. A convex mirror of focal length' produces an image
the formulas
Here. u=-20 cm f =-25am of the size of the object. The distance of the object from
Using themirror formula
the miror is:
a b.(n+f cn-1)f d-
100 IMASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE QUESTION BANK
spherica
rical mirror
Ans. a part of the
()(n-)f Q50. Centre of urvature is not
Given, magnification (m)= mirror.
ratherit [Link]
boundary of b. Inslde
a. on the
d. None of these
[Link]

.
V Ans. (c) outslde beam of light
can make a paralel
n
By using mirror formula, Q51. Which of the following incident on it?
source is
rA when light from a point (NCERT EXEMPLAR)

-n a. Concave mirror as well

as convex len
f concave lens
mirror as well as
i0- b. Convex
C. Two plane mirrors
placed at 90° to
each other
concave lens
Required =
distance=-u (n -1)f [Link] mirror as well as
convex lens
Q46. An object is placed at the centre of curvature of a concave Ans. (a) Concave mirror as well as
mirror. The distance between its image and the pole is: KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
focus of concave mirror
a. equal
tof b. between fand 2f When a point source oflight is placed at the
.equal to2f can be obtained.
d. greater than 2f ora convex lens, parallel beam oflight
Ans. (c) equal to 2f
An object is at C

Mirror formula, 1 v
For concave mirror, fis negative
1111 v
2f vertically in front of a
Q 52. A 10 mm long awl pin is placed
concave mirror. A 5 mm long image of the awl pin
is

formed at 30 cm in front of the mirror. The focal length of

V=-2f (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
thie mirror is:
Distance of image from pole is 2f.
a.-30 cm b.-20 cm
Q 47. An object is placed 60 cm in front of a convex mirror. The
C-40 cm d.-60 cm
virtual image formed by the mirror is located 30 cm behind
Ans. (b)-20 cm
the mirror. What is the object's magnification?
. +0.5 Here, height of object, h =10 mm
a. +2 b.-2 d.--0.5
Height of image, h'= -5 mm
Ans. (c) +0.5
Image distance, V =-30 cm
Here, u-60 cm, v =30 cm

m= - -05
Let the object distance be u and focal length of the mirror
be f

a 48. An object is placed 20.0 cm in front of a concave mirror As m-

whose focal length is 25.0 cm. What is the magnification (-30) x1U=-60cm
of the object?
a. +5.0 b.-5.0 C. +0.20 d -0.20 Now, using mirror formula,
Ans. (a) +5.0 1 1
Here, u-20 cm, f = -25 cm -30) -60)
Using mirror formula,
-1 1
=2-13-1
60 60 20
220
V = 100 cm
or f-20 cm
Q53. Under which of the following conditions, a concave mirror
m- 00 5 can form an image larger than the actual object?.
(NCERTEXEMPLAR)
Q 49. An object is placed at the radius of curvature of a concave [Link] the object is kept at a distance equal to its radius
spherical mirror. The image formed by the mirror is: of curvature
at the focal point of the mirror
a. located [Link] object is kept at a distance less than its focal length
b. located between the focal point and the radius of cWhen object is placed betweern the focus and centre of
Curvature of the mirror curvature
kept at a distance greater than its radius
d. When object is
C. located at the center of curvature of the mirror
of curvature
d. located out beyond the center of curvature of the mirror
Ans. (c) When object is placed between the focus and centre or
Ans. (c) located at the center of curvature of the mirror. Curvature
 olonce CAnss 10 en 1| 101
Q64, The mlror used by a dentist to
person lsi exanlne tho toutly of a
t0ntave
GCOVeX niror
nror b, plane nmlrron
palinted mtror
,
Ans. (a) co1tave mrrOr
KNOWLIDGHBOOSTUR
Detlst mlor is (a small concave
mhor Jlted In a frone wi
long handle to give a mnngnified Imange
of tooth

a 66. Thve polnt on the prlnclpal axls, wlere mys nro parallel to D P
the prlnclpal axls converge or appear to dlvergo nltor
reflectlon, Is called:
a. centre of curvature
[Link] C [Link] D
C. apertur
d,focus [Link] A [Link] B cfigyre
Ans. (0) foeus Ans, (d) figuro D
60. The focal length of a spherlcal mlrror wliose radlus of KNOWLEDOI BOOSTER-
neflecton,vll pass through
Curvature Is 20 cm ls
a. 40 em b.30 cm .20 cm A ray porallel to prnclpol axls,ofter
d. 10 cm
tIe a
princlpal Jocus of concavemirros
Ans. (0) 10 cm
mrror 1s used by a dentist t
f
10 cm a61, Whlch of the follovAng
oxamlne a small cavity?
a 67. an object ls placed 15 cm In front of a concave mlror of
If a, Conyaz mirror
focal length 30 cm, the Image wltl be: [Link] mrror
a. dimlnished, upright, virtual cConcave rmirror
b. enlarged, uprlght, real d, Cornbinatlon of convez and concave rnirror
C. diminished, virtual, real Ans, (c) Concave mrror
hedd
d, enlarged, uprlght, real nConcaye mirror forms erect and enlarged imss vhen
Ans. (b) diminlshed, uprlght, virtuat close to the cavity.
Here, obfect ls placed between pole and focus, Thus, Image a 62. Whlchmirror can producs a virtusl, srect snd magnifisd
formed will be virtual, erect (uprlght) and enlarge0 Image of an object?
(magnified) a. Concave mirror
a 58. At what distance In front of a concave mlrror must an b. Convex ml

object be placed so that the Image and obfect are of the C, Plane nirror

same slze? [Link] concave and convez mirrors

a. At focal length Ans, (o) Concave mirror
b. Half a focal length
Concave mirror forms a virtual, erect and magnified inage
vhen obfoct is placed betv/een pole and the focus
c. Twice a focal length
Js a 63. Image is formed in front of the mirror, then the image
[Link] than half a focal length irF9d 1f the

distance vMl be:

Ans. (c) Twice a focal length
a. posittve or negathve depending on the size of the object
a 59. For an incldent ray directed towards centre of curvature of
ray: b. neither positive nor negstive
a spherlcal mirror, the reflected
C. positive
a. retraces lts path
d. negptive
b. passes through focus
Ans. (d) nepative
[Link] through pole
d. become5 parallel to the
princlpal axis a 64, Focal Length of a concave mirror is:
Ans. (a) retraces its path 3. negative
diagrams Is correct for the ray b. positive
60, Whlch of the following ray
concave miror as shoin In figure? C. depends on the postion of object
of lIght Incldent on a
(NcERT EXEMPLAR) t d, depends on the posltlon of Image
Ans. (a) negative
a 85. A polnt object is placed at a distanca of 20 cm from a
convex mirror of focal Longth 20 cm. The image wil form
ti t a, at infinity b, ot focus
[Link] the pole dbehind the mirror

wwww
102 IMASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE QuESTION BANK

in size
Ans. (d) behind the mirror Ans. (c) virtual, uprlght and diminished erect diminished
virtual,
CT!P. Lonvex mlrror always forms a
of object in front of
it.
image irrespective of the posltion
For convexmirors, image is always formed behind the mirror. Q71. The nature of the image formed
by concave mirror when
between the focus (F) and centre of
Q6. If an incident ray passes through the focus, the reflected the object is placed
curvature (C) of the mirror observed by us is:
ray will:
a. real, Inverted and diminished
a. pass through the pole
b. virtual, erect and smaller in size
b. be parallel
to the principal axis
[Link], inverted and enlarged
[Link] its path d. virtual, upright and enlarged
d. pass through the centre of curvature
Ans. (c) real, inverted and enlarged
Ans. (b) be parallel to the principal axis real, inverted and
When object lies between Cand the
F,

enlarged image is formed beyond C

Q72. The image formed by concave mirror is

real, inverted and
The position of
of the same size as that of the object.
C
object should be:
a. at the focus
b. at the centre of curvature
(a) (b) C. between focus and centre of curvature

d. beyond centre of curvature

67. magnified real image is formed by a concave mirror
A
when the object is: Ans. (c) between focus and centre of curvature
a. atF b. between Fand C When object lies at Cof a concave mirror, image is also
.at C d. Both a. and b. formed at 'C' and having same size, real and inverted.
Ans. (d) Both a. and b. a 73. A concave mirror of focal length 20 cm forms an image
When object is at C, real inverted and same size Image is having twice the size of object. For the virtual position of
formed by concave mirror. So, according to question object, the position of object will be at:
option (a) and (b) both are correct. a. 25 cm b. 40 cm c. 10 cm d. at infinity
68. If a man's face is 25 cm in front of concave shaving mirror Ans. (c) 10 cm
producing erect image 1.5 times the size of face, focal For virtual image,
length of the mirror would be:
a. 75 cm b. 25 cm c. 15 cm d. 60 cm
m u +2V=-2u
Ans. (a) 75 cm AS
V
In concave shaving mirror, virtual erect and large size
image, behind the mirror is obtained 73 7-
using
u-2u-20
m= V15-E
U 2 2u-20
U=-10cm
V
cm
75
a 74. A concave mirror of radius 30 cm is placed in water. It's
Now, from mirror formula, focal length in air and water differ by:
a. 15 b. 20
75122575 30 d.O
cm
f-75 Ans. (d) 0
Hence, focal length of concave mirror is 75 cm. KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
a 69. As light travels from a rarer to a denser medium it will
The focal length of spherical mirror does not depend on the
have:
decreased velocity) surrounding medium.
a. increased velocity b.
i wavelength d. Both b. and [Link] tea
[Link]

Ans. (d) Both b. and c.

Q75. An object at a distance of +15 cm is slowly moved towards
When light ray travel from rarer to denser medium, its the pole of a convex mirror. The image will get:
velocity and wavelength both decreases. a. shortened and real b. enlarged and
real
a 70. The nature of image formed by a convex mirror when the .enlarge and virtual d. diminished and virtual
object distance from the mirror is less than the distance Ans. (d) diminished and virtual
between pole and focal point (F)of the mirror would be: Convex mirror always form virtual and diminished
image.
a. real, inverted and diminished in size Q76. An object at a distance of 30 cm from a concave
b. real. inverted and enlarged in slze
mirror gets
its image at the same point. The focal length of the mirror
Cvirtual, upright and diminished in size is:
d. virtual, upright and enlarged in size
a.-30 cm b,30 cm C.-15 cm d.+15 cm
 Class 10 Term 1| 103
Science|
Ans. ()-15 cm
When object is placed at 2F,
the image formed by concave Glven, V U +10
mirror Is also at 2F. 1 1
So 2F-30 or F -15 cm -u -(u+ 10)) -12
077. Fora real object, which ofthe following
can produce a real U+10+ u
image?
a. Plane mirror
(u+ 10)u 12
b. Concave mirror u-14u-120 0
c. Concave lens
d. Convex mirror u 20
Ans. (b) Concave mirror
Only concave mirror produces u 20 cmn and v = 30 cm
a real Image for any
position of object between 30
its focus and infinity.
78. Choose the wrong statement.
Magnification-
202
a. A concave mirror can Hence, m =1.5
form a magnified real Image cm high real image
b. A concave mirror can
form a magnified virtual Image Q 83. A concave spherical mirror forms a 40
c.A convex mirror can form a diminished virtual Image is 10 cm. The radius of the
d. A convex mirror can
of an object whose height from the object to its
form a diminished real image mirror is 60 cm. Find the distance
Ans. (d) A convex mirror can
forma diminished real image image.
Q 79. An object 20 cm from a spherical mirror gives rise to a a. 90 cm b.112.5 cmn
virtual image 15 cm behind the mirror. The type of the c. 97.5 cm d.75 cm
mirror and its focal length is: Ans. (b) 112.5 cm
a. concave, 8.5 cm
C. concave, 60 cm
b. convex, 30 cm
d. convex., 60cm
Here,
40
10 =m
m
Ans. (d) convex, 60 cm
V=4u
Taking new Cartesian sign conventions U
=
=375 cm and v 150 cm
Distance between object and its image
V-U=150-37.5 112.5 cm
3+4 a distance of 3 m
60 f=60cm Q84. candle flame 3 cm high is placed at
A
the wall must a concave mirror
The mirror is convex. ite from a wall. How far frommay form an image of the flame
Q 80, An object 4 cm high is placed at a distance of 15 cm in front
be placed in order that it
9 cm high on the walU?
of a convex mirror having a radius of curvature of 10 cm.. b. 150 cm C. 225 cm d. 300 cm
a. 450 cm
Then the image formed is at a distance of:
Ans. (a) 450 cm
a. 7.5 cm behind the mirror concave
Let u be the object distance from the pole of the
b. 3.75 cm in front of the mirror
mirror.
c.7.5 cm in front of mirror Wall Candle flame
d. 3.75 cm behind the mirror
Ans. (d) 3.75 cm behind the mirror
3 m3 Ucm
cm 3.75 cm (behind the mirror)

Q81. A person standing in front of a mirror finds his image Then the image distance is clearly (u +3
the
thinner but with normal height. This implies that Magnification, m= or
mirror is:
a. convex and cylindrical with axis
vertical
U=1.5
b. convex and cylindrical with axis
[Link] and spherical
d. concave and spherical
Ans. (a) convex and cylindrical with
Convex and cylindrical
normal height
mirror
horizontal

axis vertical
gives
.
thinner image and of
r
u
Distance of wall from the mirror is

[Link] value 450

4.5mu+3
cm. is

85. At what distance from a concave mirror of focal length

10 cm must an object be placed in order that an image
double its size may be obtained?
Q 82. A real image of an object placed
on the principal axis of a a. Either 5 cm or 15 cm cm b. At 10
12 cm is formed at a point
concave mirror of focal length C.5 cm d. 15 cm
from the mirror than the
which is 10 cm more distant Ans. (a) Either 5 cm or 15 cm 37
image is:
object. The magnification of the
a. 2 b. 1.5 C.1 d. 2.5
m0
Ans. (6) 1.5 u= -15 cm
Let u be the object distance
and v be image distance, then
104 IMASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE CueOTION BANK

or 11
u 2u
U-5
10o
10
cm
2u10
Either 5 cm or 15 cm Is correct cholce
[Link] convex mlrror or a
d. a plane mlrror
Ans. (b) a concave miror but not a
concave mirror

convex mirror

.. distance from a concave

Q [Link] distance from the pole to focus Is called 93. An objoct Is placed at 35 cm
mirror will produce:
pole b. aperture mlrror of focal length 15 cm. The
c. focal length d. princlpal axls
magnlfled real Image
a.

Ans. (c) focal length ba magnifled virtual Image

C. a dlminished real Image
CT!P- d. an Image of same slze as the object
While studying spherical mirrors, lay stress on understanding the
Ans. (c) a diminished real Image
meaning ofterms such os focal length,[Link] etc. Here, f 15 cm, C 15 x2 =30 cm
of curvature
a 87. t means object Is placed beyond centre
The magnification m of an image formed by a spherical A diminlshed and real Image ls formed.
mirror is negative. It means, the Image ls:
a. smaller than the object b, larger than the object T!Pand understand the characterlstics of image formed by
Learn
erect d. inverted
Ans. (d) inverted concave/convex mirror for different positions of the object.

CT!P- 94. Aray of light is travelling from a rarer medium to a denser

fthe magnification has a plus sign, then the image is virtual and| medium. While entering the denser medium at the point of
erect.
Ifthe magnification has a minus sign, then the image is real and
incidence,
a.
t
goes straight into the second medium
inverted. b. bends towards the normal

[Link] away from the normal

Q 88. A point object is placed on the principal axis of a spherical d. does not enter at al
mirror. The object-distance u is: Ans. (b) bends towards the normal
a. definitely negative a 95. A student does the experiment of tracing the path of a ray
b. definitely positive
of light passing through a rectangular glass slab for
positive if the object is the left of the centre of curvature different angles of incidence. He can get a correct measure
d. positive
positive if the object is to the right of the centre of
curvature 130 of the angle of incidence and the angle of emergence by
following the labelling indicated in figure:
Ans. (a) definitely negative
a89. f-s valid:

a. for convex mirrors but not for concave mirrors

b. for concave mirrors but not for convex mirrors
[Link] both convex and concave mirrors
d. neither for convex mirrors not for concave mirrors
Ans. (c) for both convex and concave mrrors
Q90. A ray of light is incident on a concave mirror. If it is parallel
to the principal axis, the reflected ray will:
a. pass through the focus
b. pass through the centre of curvature T
C. pass through the pole
V
d. retrace its path
a. b. II c. IlI d, IV
Ans. (a) pass through the focus
Ans. (d) IV
curvature of
a91. Ifan incident ray passes through the centre of a 96. When object moves closer to convex lens, the image
spherical mirror, the reflected ray
a. pass through the pole
wil:.antA s formed by it shifts:
a. away from the lens
b. pass through the focus .
b. towards the lens
C. retrace its path c. first towards and then away from the
d. be parallel to the principal axis
lenst
d. first away and then towards the lens
Ans. (c) retrace lts path
Ans. (a) away from the lens
a 92. To get an Image larger than the object, one can use: As oblect moves from hfinlty towards optical centre of the
a. convex mirror but not a concave mirror convex lens image Is shlfted away from Its focal point and
b. a concave mlrror but not a convex mlrror towards Inflnity.
 Science Class 10 Term 1| 105
Q97. When object moves closerto
a concave lens the image byit
shift:
a. away from the lens on
the same side of object
b. towards the lens b.
caway from the lens on the other
slde of lens
d. first towards and
then away from the lens
Ans. (b) towards the lens
When object is at infinity. image is formed
at the focus of
concave lens when object is
moved towards lens, the
image is also moved from its focus towards d.
lens and Its C.
size increases.
a 98. If the power of a lens is -2 D, what is its focal length?
a. +50 cm b.-100 cm
C-50 cm d.+100 cm
Ans. (c)-50 cm
-05m Ans. ()
cm
=-50
98. A
spherical mirror and a spherical lens each have a focal
length of-10 cm. The miror and the lens are likely to be: a convex
Parallel rays after refraction meet at the focus of
a. both concave
lens.
b. both convex
Q 105. Large number of thin strips of black paint are
made on the
c the mirror is concave and the lens is convex surface of a convex lens of focal length 20 cm to catch the
d. the mirror is convex and the lens is concave The image will be:
image of a white horse.
Ans. (a) both concave a. a zebra of black strips
Q 100. When the object is placed between F and 2F of a convex
b.a horse of black strips
lens, the image formed is: ca horse of less brightness
a. at F b. at 2F d. a zebra of less brightness
c beyond 2F d. between O and F
Ans. (c) a horse of less brightness
Ans. (c) beyond 2F Complete image of the white horse is formed but of less
a 101. Magnifying power of a concave lens is: intensity.
a. always>1 b. always <l Q 106. You are given three media A, B and C of refractive index
d. can have any value
calways 1 1.33, 1.65 and 1.46. The medium in which the light will
Ans. (6) always<1 travel fastest is:
CT!P A b. B
d. equal in all three media
concave
A lens forms images which are always smaller than the C

object,so the magnification produced by a concave lens is olways Ans. (b) B

less than 1. CT!P

Light will travel faster in a medium having lower refractie
Q 102. The image formed by a convex lenx can be:a index.
a. virtual and magnified
b. virtual and diminished Q [Link] refractive index oftransparent medium is greater than
.virtual and of same size one because:
d. virtual image is not formed a. speed of ight in vacuum <speed of light in transparent
Ans. (a) virtual and magnified medium
a 103. A divergent lens will produce: b. speed of light in vacuum> speed of light in transparent
a. always real image medium
b. always virtual image speed of light in vacuum = speed of light in transparent
c both real and virtual image medium
d. frequency of light wave changes when it moves from
d. None of the above
Ans. (b) always virtual image rarer to denser medium
a virtual, erect Ans. (b) speed of light in vacuum> speed of lght in transparent
Diverging (concave) lens will alway forms
medium
and diminished image. Speed of ight in vacuum (c)
centre and point of
Q 104. The distance between the optical
convergence is called focal length.
In which of the Speedof light in medium (v)

following cases it is correctly shown? AS CV S0.H>1.

106 MASTERAPND CHAPTERWISE JUEestiON BANK

.
a108 The retracthe index ofwater is 1.33. The speed of light In Study the glven ray dlagrams and select the correct
water will be: statement from the following: (CBSE 2017)

a 133 1 ms
btoms
c.226 10 ms
d 268x1o m/s
Ans ( 226 «to m/s
As

109
V cm
133 20 m 25

a. Device Xis a concave mirror and device Yis a convex

2.26108 m/s
lens, whose focal lengths are 20 cm and 25 tm
Q109 A convex lens A of focal length 20 cm concave lensB
anda respectively
of focal length 5 cm are kept along the same axis with a [Link] Xis a convex lens and device Yis a concave
distance dbetween them. Ifa parallel beam of light falling mirror, whose focal lengths are 10 cm and 25 cm.
on Aleaves B as a parallel beam, then the distance d in cm respectively
C. Device Xis a concave lens and device Y is a convex
will be:
mirror, whose focal lengths are 20 cm and 25 cm
a 25 b.15 respectively
30 d 50 d. Device Xis a convex lens and device Yis a concave
Ans (b) 15 mirror, whose focal lengths are 20 cm and 25 cm
The situation is shown in figure. In the absernce of concave respectively
lens the parallel beam will be focussed atF ie. at a Ans. (d) Device Xis a convex lens and device Yis a concave
distance of 20 cm from the lens A The focal length of mirror, whose focal lengths are 20 cm and 25 cm
concave lens is 5 cm ie. if this lens is placed at 5 cm from respectively
Fthen the beam will become parallel So, d=15 cm. 2112. Which of the following statements is true?
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
a. A convex lens has 4 dioptre power having a focal length
0.25 m
b. A convex lens
has-4 dioptre power having a focal
length 0.25 m
cA concave lens has 4 dioptre power having a focal
length 0.25m
d. A concave lens has-4 dioptre power havinga focal
length 0.25 m.
-20 cm
Ans. (a) A convex lens has 4 dioptre power having a focal length
15 cm +s am 0.25 m
Q113. A beam of light is incident through the holes on side A
0110. When you focus the image ofa distant flag, whose shape is and
emerges out of the holes on the other face Bof the box as
given below, on a screen using a convex lens, the shape of
shown in the figure. Which of the following could be inside
the image as it appears on the screen is: (CBSE2017)
the box? (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
a. Concave lens b. Rectangular glass slab
[Link] d. Convex lens

. D.

Box
Ans. (d) Convex lens
d. Q114. Velocity of light in air is 3x 10 m/s. While
its velocity in a
medium. is 1.5x 10 m/s. Then, refractive
index of this
medium is:
P b. 5
Ans. (a)
a. 3 iC.0.5 d. 2
 Science
|
Class 10 Term 1| 107
Ans. (d) 2 Medium B
[Link] than unity
Refractive index of medium C. equal to unity
with respect to air,
Speed of light inair d. zero
Speed of light in medium Ans. (a) greater than unity Medium A
3x10 Since, ray of light bends
1.5 102 towards the normal when it
goes from medium A to medium the medium
B., A is rares

-T!P.
Practice ample
and medium Bis denser
light in
amount ofnumericals based on refractive
Index Speed of light in rarer medium (v,) > speed of
denser medium (v2)
a115. An object is situated at a distance of f/2 n 1
from a convex lens
of focal length f. Distance of image will V2
be:
a. +(f/2) b+(f/3) +(f/4) a121. Beams of light are incident A
d.-f cO
Ans. (d)-f through the holes A and B and
For a spherical lens,-1.1 emerge out of box through the DO
Vu f holes C and D respectivelyas
Box
For convex lens, u = f shown in the figure. Which of the
-and fis positive
following could be inside the box?
(NCERTEXEMPLAR)

a. A rectangular glass slab

b. A convex lens
Ve-f CA concave lens
a 116. A
spherical mirror and a thin spherical lens each have a d. A prism
focal length of -15 cm. The mirror and the lens are likely Ans. (a) Arectangular glass slab
to be: a [Link] statement best describes the property of light
a. both concave waves illustrated in the diagram below?
b. both convex
.
the mirror is concave and the lens is convex
d. the mirror is convex. but the lens is concave
Ans. (a) both concave
0117. Which of the following lenses would you prefer to use
while reading small letters found in a dictionary?
a. A convex lens of focal length 50 cm materials absorb light waves
a. Some
b.A concave lens of focal Jength 50 cm Some materials refracted by some materials
b.
cA Convex lens of focal length 5 cm CLight waves are refracted by some materials
d. A concave lens of focal length 5 cm d. Light waves are emitted by some materials
Ans. (c) A convex lens of focal length 5 cm. Ans. () Light waves are refracted by some materials
0118. Where should an object be placed in front of convex lensa Q123. Astudent was asked to drawa ray diagram for formation of
to get a real image of the size of the object? image bya convex lens for the following positions of the
a. At the principal focus of the lens
object
b. At twice the focal length
(i) Between F and 2F (ii)At F
cAt infinity
d. Between the optical centre of the lens and its principal (ii) At 2F (iv) Between Fand O
focus The position for which virtual image can be formed among
Ans. (b) At twice the focal length
these is:
T!P-and understand the characteristics of image formed
Learn by
between Fand 2F
a.
at 2F
b. at F
d. between Fand O

convex/concave lenses for different positions of the object. Ans. (d) between Fand 0

surface a124. A convex lens:

Q119. A ray of light travelling in air falls obliquely on the a. is thicker at the edges than at the middle
of a calm pond. It wil b. has uniform thickness all through
[Link] into the water without deviating from its path cis thicker at the middle than at the edges
b. deviate away from the normal d. is called diverging lens
c deviate towards the normal Ans. (c) is thicker at the middle than at the edges
d. turns back on its original path
Ans. (c) deviate towards the normal a125. Refractive index of diamond with respect to glass is 1.6. If
medium B as shown in the absolute refractive index of glass is 1.5, then the
0120. A light ray enters from medium to
A
medium B relative to A will absolute refractive index of diamond is:
figure. The refractive index of (NCERTEXEMPLAR)
a. 14 b. 2.4
be:
c3.4 d. 4.4
a. greater than unity
108 I MASTER MIND CHAPTERWISE UueSTION BANK

Ans. (b) 24 Ans. (b) focus

after refraction
Given. g = 16 and u g = 1.5 parallel ray coming from the 5un, focus.
Refractive index of diamond with respect to glass he
through the convex lens converge at
its
Absolute refractive index ofdiamond is correct for the ray
Q 132. Which of the following ray diagrams
Exemplar
Absolute refractive index of glass ( g in figure. (NCERT
of light incident on a lens shown
So. absolute refractive index of diamond
Refractive index of diamond glass
ang)xAbsolute refractive index of glass ()
H =1615 -24
0 126. If the refractive indices for water and diamond relative to
air are 1.33 and 2.4 respectively, then the refractive index
of diamond relative to water is:
a.0.55 b. 1.80 .3.19 d. None of these
Ans. (b) 180 B.
Refractive index of water w.r.t air is
wHo =133
Similarly. dHo =24 (2)
(1)
Divide eq by eq (2), we get _,.
dHH=24
dH 133 1.80 C.
Q 127. Light rays A and B fall on optical component X and come
out as Cand D.

a. Figure A b. Figure B
x
CFigure C
[Link]
Ans. (a) Figure A
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
The optical component is a: A ray of light passing through a principal focus, after refraction
a. concave lens b. convex lens
from a convex lens will emerge parallel to the principal axis.
c convex mirror d. prism
Ans. (a) conczve lens a 133. The given figure shows a ray of light as it travels from
From the figure. ight rays A and B diverges after medium A to medium B. Refractive index of the medium B
refraction from optical component X. This means Xis relative to medium A is: (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
diverging lens or concave lens.
Q 123. A ray of light is incident on one of the parallel face of
rectangular glass slab. It emerges out of the opposite
parallel face making angle of emergence: 459
a. equal to angle of incidence 45 Medium B
b. greater than angle of incidence 30°
60
Medium A
9
Csmaller than angle of incidence E
d. equal to zero
Ans. (a) equal to angle of incidence
Q 129. A Lens has: a. 3/2 b.2/
a. only one focus b. two focus C1/2 d.2
c three focus d. four focus Ans. (a) 3/2
Ans. (b) tvwo focus According to Snell's law.
a 130. An object is placed before a concave lens. The image Refractive index of medium B relative to
formed: medium A.
a. is alvays inverted b. is always erect ngA sini
sinr
cis alvays real d. may be erect or inverted
where iand rare angles made by incident rayTE
Ans. (6)1s always erect and
0 131. Light from the Sun falling on a convex lens will converge refracted ray with the normal respectively.
ata point called: Here,
i =60°,r=45
[Link] of curvature b. focus
sin 60
ngA
Cradius of curvature [Link] centre sin 45°
 Science Class 10| Term 1 109
o 134. The correct sequencing
emergence, angle of angle of Incidence, angle of Ans. ()
of refraction and lateral displacement As the lght ray undergoes two refractions, one at air-glass
shown inthe following diagram
by digits 1, 2,3 and 4 Is: interface and the other at glass-air interface, therefore. path
(CBSE2017) traced by student X is correct. Also, the emergent ray is
parallel to incldent ray and laterally displaced in the diagram
of student Xonty.
Q 138. You are given water, mustard oil, glycerine and kerosene.
In which of these media a ray of light incident obliquely at
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
same angle would bend the most?
a. Kerosene b. Water
c. Mustard oll d. Glycerine
Ans. (d) Glycerine
a.2.4,1.3 b. 2.1,4,.3 c.1.2,4,3 d. 2, 1,3,4 depends upon the refractive index of
As the bending of light
(6) 2. 1,4.3 be
Ans. the medium, so, out of the given choices, bending witl
a135. Astudent very cautiously traces the path of a ray through aa most in glycerine for same angle of incidence:
glass slab for different values of the angle of incidence
(4). He then measures the corresponding values of the 0139. To form an image twice the size of the object, using a
angle of refraction (4r) and the angle of emergence (Ze) convex lens of focal length 20 cm, the object distance
for every value of the angle of incidence. On analysing must be:
these measurements of angles, his conclusion would be: a.<20 cm
(CBSE2017) b.>20 cm
a. Li> Lr> Le b. i = Le> r C<20 cm and between 20 cm and 40 cm
c4<s<Le d. i 4e<is d. cannot say
Ans. (b) i= Ze>Lr Ans. (c)<20 cm and between 20 cm and 40 cm
In a glass slab. emergent ray is always parallel to the For virtual image, u <fand for real image, u lies between F
incident ray, and 2F
ie 4i-Le a 140. The refractive index of dense flint glass is 1.65 and for
Also, when a light ray travels from rarer to denser alcohol, it is 1.36 with respect to air, then the refractive
medium, it bends towards the normal. index of the dense flint glass with respect to alcohol is:
Hence. Zi> Lr ..131 b..1.21 1.11 d. 1.01

Zi= Le> r Ans. (b) 1.21

136. A student obtains a blurred image of a distant object on a Given,
screen using a convex lens. To obtain a distinct image on Refractive index of flint glass with respect to air. n =165
the screen, he should move the lens: rh(CBSE 2017) Refractive index of alcohol with respect to air, ng 136
a. away from the screen
b. towards the screen
Dro 121
1.36121
. to a position very far away from the screen Thus, the refractive index of dense flint glass with respect
d. either towards or away from the screen depending upon to alcoholis 1.21
the position of the object a141. Power of a convex lens of focal length 50 cm is:
Ans. (d) either towards or away from the screen depending d. +0.5 D
upon the position of the object
a-2D b-0.5 D C+2D
Ans. (c)+2D
0 137. The path of a ray of light coming from air passing through
a rectangular glass slab traced by four students are shown
is correct?
iP -20
as W, X, Yand Zin figure. Which one of them(NCERTEXEMPLAR)
-CommonAEror -

Students either forget to convert focat length from em'to 'm'or to

convertformulaofpowerjrom 100
fm) fcm)

0142. How will the image formed by a convex lens

be affected if the upper half of the lens is Black
paper
wrapped with a black paper?
a. The size of the image is reduced to
one-half
b. The upper half of the image wil be absent
C. The brightness of the image is reduced

d. There will be no effect

C. Y d. Z Ans. (c) The brightness of the image is reduced
. W b.X
 110 I
MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE QUESTION DANK materlals A, B, c..
Indlces of four
respectively. When the
li
Q 143. Match the following: The refractive and1.52
147. 1.33, 1.43, 1.71 materials, theyrefnta
into these h
Column Column lI
pass from alr
B
Power of convex maximum In: b. material
(A) (p) Positive power materlal A materlal D
mirror a.
C
d.
C. materlal
8) Power of concave (q) Negative power C maximum in the
mirror Ans. (c) materlal light rays will be index. Now, out nt
refraction of
Power of plane
The hlghest refractive
( Zero power substance having highestrefractive index. 5o, the
mirror Cand [Link] the will be maximum in material
c.
Power of convex refraction of Ught glass and carh
() Infinite power water, suphuric acid,respectivelo
lens a 148. Refractive indices of
1.53 and 1.63 The
a. A-p. B-q, Cr, D-p b. A-q. B-p, Cr, D-p disulphide are 1.33, 1.43,
in:
C.A-q. B-p. C-p. D-r d. A-p, B-q, C-p, D-r light travels slowest b. glass
a., sulphuric acid disulphide
Ans. (b) A-q. B-p. C-r. D-pP d. carbon
C. water
a 144. In which of the following, the image of an object placedat disulphide
Ans. (d) carbon 3
infinity will be highly diminished and point sized?
refractive index of glass with respect to air is and e
(NCERT EXEMPLAR) Q 149. The
with respect to air is
a. Concave mirror only inrefractiveindex of water he
b. Convex mirror only respect to water will be:
c Convex lens only refractive index of glass with
b. 1.225
d. Concave mirror, convex mirror, concave lens and convex a. 1.525
d. 1.125
lens .1425
Ans. (d) Concave mnirror, convex mirror., concave lens and Ans. (d) 1.125
Given:ngo refractive index of glass
with respect to air, ie.
Convex lens

n"372
nw=refractive index of water with respect to air
ngw = refractive index of glass with respect to water=?
Now, using formula
wogw ag =1
and substituting the given values, we have lb

1
Pgw4 x2 *8
gw1.125
Q 150. If the magnification produced by a lens. has a positive
Image of an object placed at infinity will be highty diminished value, the image will be:
and point sized in all the four cases, ie, concave mirror, a. virtual and inverted b. virtual and erect
convex mirror, concave lens and convex lens. C. real and erect d. real and inverted
Q 145. A ray of light passes froma medium A to another medium Ans. (b) virtual and erect
B. No bending of light occurs if the ray of light hits the
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
boundary of medium Bat an angle of:
a. 0 b 45 c.90 d.
120 For lenses,if magnification has positive value, the image is virtua
Ans. () 90 and erect. if magnification has negative value, the image wIl
No bendingof light when light is incident normally
«
real andinverted.
or perpendicularly on a boundary of two media since angle Q151. An object AB is placed in
of incidence and angle of refraction both are zero. front of a convex lens at its focus
as shown in figure.
Q146. The refractive indices of four substances P, Q, R and Sare
1.50, 1.36, 1.77 and 1.31 respectively. The speed of light
is the maximum in the substance:
a:P b.
.R d. 5
Ans. (d) 5
The speed of ight will be maximum in the substance which
has the towest refractive index. So, the light will travel
fastest in substance S
 Science Class 10| Tem 1| 111
Which of the ray
refraction through diagram below correctly deplcts the a 154. Which of the following correctly represents graphical
of
the lens L? relation between sine of angle of incidence (/) and sine
angle of refraction (r)?

a.
b
b.
sin i
X
Sin Sin r

d.

d.
sini sin i
Ans (a) X
Q 152. Aconcave lens has focal length of 15 cm. At what distance
Sin r Sin

should the object from the lens be placed so that it forms

an image at 10 cm from the lens?
a. 30 cm b. 15 cm C. 45 cm d.60 cm Ans. () a.
Ans. (a) 30 cm
Here, V =-10 cm, f =-15 cm sin
sin
Using lens formula.-=
The relation between sine of angle incidence and sine of
(i)
(r) can be defined by Snell's Law,
or iT angle of refraction
according to which,

30
S=constant=n
sinr
cm when, n is the refractive index of the medium
*U=-30is D are placed in
Thus, object distance 30 cm. a 155. Two thin lenses of power, +3.5 D and -2.5
Q 153. In order to obtain a magnification of -0.75 with a convex contact, then the power and focal length of the lens
lens of focal length 8 cm, the object should be placed: combination is:
a. +1D, +100 cm b. +2 D,+150 cm
a. at less than 8 cm
b. between 8 cm and 16 cm C.+1D,+200 cm d+2D,+100cm
Ans. (a)+1D, +100 cm
c beyond 16 cm
Given, power of lens 1. P=+35D
d. at 16 cm
and power of lens 2.P2=-2.5D
Ans. (c) beyond 16 cm So. power of the combination of the lenses
P P+Pa=+35D-2.5 D=+ 1.0D
CT!P- i to P +1.0D
focal length ofa convex lens is positive. Now, focal length of the combination*1.0D+1.0m 1
gra Ltd
Let object distance be-
m -075,
oot
f =+8 cm a 156. The angle of incidence
=+1m=+100cm
Given that
i and refractionr are equal ina
transparent slab when the value of i is
-075 -u
45
4 90
V=
Su
4
[Link] on the material of the slab
Ans. (a) 0°
Using lens formula. When the incident ray falls normally on the glass slab. it
will refracted without deviation, ie, along the normal in
V the glass slab. So, 4i==0
trn 4 1 r Q 157. An object is 0.09 m from a magnifying lens and the image
is formed 45 cm from the lens. The magnification
4 +3 produced is:
8 4 5 500 d. 400
cm
u-1867
3
Ans. (b) 5
m V45C-5
9 cm
112 WASTERIP CGHAPTERVISE
OusTN LA
cf real cje nc
Assertion and Reason Type Questions Pare mirrr forms rtal image
irrage cf drat ctiec

Directiors ([Link]. 158-190): Ecch cf the follzwirg qetions consics

914. Aserien (A: A ray c Eget ircidert
alcrg he era
tmo sements, cre is Asertian (A) and the cther i Recson
fSelecz inr.
cf ighn alerg tte cermal tas
the carect cncwer to tes2 GEstians from the cdes (4), GJ. ( angle
Cc s given belon e2cn :A reyard terce, it rztraca ton e h
a Ecth Aserticn and Fezscn are true and Reason s correct icidence a 2
Expiarzticn cf Aserticn
reectian frem mirror.
a ecth Asserticn and Paascn are true but Pezsons ner the
ngle cf icicerce = rgle betneenritertaf rea
correct erçlanation cf Asserticn
CAssertion s true but Pazscn is false he rrirrar= O"
a
d Acsericn is false bs Razscn is true 015. Asserica (4}:ta reycf Ectsráceten ccorni
along is prircipalars, tten the argle cf irciCece
Q 152. Asserticn (A): A ray ircidernt along rormal to the miror be zerz
retreces its path as the argle cf refecion for a rzycf Egtwil
Pezscn j: A raf ct Eg geirg towards tte czc
Reascn R): in reflection, angte cf incidence is atways
a
CLrreture cf zirr s refeced badk alcng e
corve
eqalt angte of reflection.
Same pa
Ars a)
Ars
Wihen Ggt ray incident alcng narmal to the [Link] af
015 Assertion(A}:Linezr agriicaicn cfa mirer ne rees
inciderce =C Acccrdng to len cf refetian 4-
therefore ande of refñection cr= ie, the incdet rey Rezscn R]: The rašo cf heigit cf te image tsie hegt
reees iS pah of the cjet is the iear czgriizica rcéced b
mircr.
Q1 Assericn (A) Keeping apoint cbject fixed, ifa plane minor Ans (e) Linear magificeian af a mirer is te reto df egts
is moved, the imege wil also more.
the imiege (cm) and the hegt cf the cheagirdte
Reascn (R):n case cfa plane mirror, distance cf object and
s image is equal from ary poirt on the miror. a 157. Assertion (A): For cbserving treicz ccr back, we pree
Ars to use a correx mirc.
The image fermed in a plæne mirroar is athe szne istence Reason (R):A corexmirr bas ameca erge fedcdvie
benind the mirar as te ctject is n te froit of the mirer. than a plane miror cor a conczve ciror.
iegad a
tie cojea are EqLal dsznces irom a plen
Ans )Tme neure af tre inege fomed àe uameni
a 162
miTer
Asserion (A): In iffused reflection, a parallel beam of
daes not drenge win dhangng dsere C ceete ts
awas virudl eea and smela. TneaiarE TMEt ni
incidet ight is reflected in different direction are used far bark vier. tnoea lare feld cf viscn
Reascn (R): The diffused refiection of light is due to the a 162 Assertion (A): When a concavemiror is beld urcer wats
failure cf the lzws of reflection. its focal Length wil inaease
Ans ( Reason (R): The focal tength cfa concare mirer deperds
DLse refieccion is ceused by the roughness "(or an the medium in which it is pleced
irregularites) in tme reñecting suriece af an object The les Ans ()Focal lengh is the preperY cf mirrar,andisiniepeat
f rerectian are valid at ezch point even on the rouEh af the meãum in wiich tis pleced
suufece of an cbject
0 169. Assertion (A): We can dedide the nature cf a mirer by
Q161. Assertion (A):A plane mirror nefther converges parallel observing the size of eret image in the mirror.
rays of light nor diverges them.
Reason (R): The focal length of a plane mior can be
considered to be infinite.
Ans. (a)
Q 162. Assertion (A): If both plane mirror and object are moved
through a distance x, then the image moves through a
distance 2x. m <1
covexmiTar
m-
plane miror
m>
Reason (R): When the object is fixed and plane miror is concevemiror
moved through a distance x. Then, the image is also Reason (R): The minimum distance between a real objec
moved through the distance 2x.
and its real image in a concave mirror is zero
Ans(c Ans. (d)
a 163. Assertion (A): Plane miror may form real image The nature of image formed by comvex mirror is erect and
Reason (R): Plane mirror forms virtual image, if object is dirninished when objectis placed at C. image is also formed
real [Link]. dstance between real objectand real image is zere
Ans. (5)
 Science Class 10 Term 1 113
a
o170. Assertion (A): If a ray of light is
Incident on a convex mirror Q 179. Assertion (A): An object is placed at a distance offfrom
convex mirror of focal length f. its image will form at
along its principal axis, then
the angle of Incidence as we infinity.
as the angle of reflection for a ray
of light will be zero. in convex mirror can
Reason (R):A ray of light golng Reason (R): The distance of image
towards the centre of never be infinity.
curvature of a convex mirror Is
reflected back along the

Ans. (b)
same path. ,Ans. (d)
Image Is formed between the principal focus and
the pole of
convex mirror,
o171. Assertion make-upP
(A): Large concave mirrors are
used to a 180. Assertion (A): Concave mirrors are used as
concentrate sunlight to produce mirrors.
heat in solar cookers.
focus of a
Reason (R): Concave mirror converges
the light rays falling Reason (R): When the face is held within the
concave mirror, then a diminished image of the face is
on it to a point.
Ans. (a) seen in the concave mirror.
Ans. (c)
Q172. Assertion (A):A point object is placed at a distance of 26 cm Enlarged image is obtained in this case.
from a convex mirror of focal length 26 cm. The image wil: lights are
Q 181. Assertion (A) The mirrors used in search
not form at infinity. parabolic and not concave spherical
Reason (R): For above given system the equation Reason (R): In a concave spherical mirror the image
v =o formed is always virtual
gives Ans. (c)In search lights, we need
an intense parallel beam of light.
Ans. (c) If a source is placed at the focus of a concave spherical
mirror, only paraxial rays are rendered parallel Due to large
a173. Assertion (4): The height of an object is always considered
aperture of mirror, marginal rays give a divergent beam.
positive.
But in case of parabolic mirror, when source is at the focus
Reason (R): An object is always placed above the principal beam of light produced over the entire cross-section of the
axis in this upward direction. mirror is a parallel beam.
Ans. (a) Q182. Assertion (A):A pencil partly immersed in water appears to
be bent at the water surface.
Q174. Assertion (A):A convex mirror is used as a driver's mirror.
Reason (R): Light from different points on the pencil
Reason (R): Because convex mirror's field of view is arge immersed in water refracts and appears to come from a
and images formed are virtual, erect and diminished. point above the original position.
Ans. (a) Ans. (a)
0 175. Assertion (A): In the case of concave mirror, the minimum 0183. Assertion (A): Higher is the refractive index of a medium or
distance between real object and its real image is zero. denser the medium, lesser is the velocity of light in that
medium.
Reason (R): If concave mirror forms virtual image of real
object, the image is [Link] Reason (R): Refractive index is inversely proportional to
i velocity.
Ans. (c) If object is placed at centre of curvature of concave
Ans. (a)
mirror, its image is at the centre of curvature. Thus,
a 184. Assertion (A):A convex lens can form a magnified erect as
minimum distance between object and its realimage is zero.
well as magnified inverted image of an object placed in
If object is between pole and focus of concave mirror, its
front of it.
image is virtual and magnified.
Reason (R):A magnified and erect image can be obtained
176. Assertion (A): Mirror formula can be applied to a plane by a convex lens when an object is kept between F and
mirror. 2F
(C)
Reason (R):A plane mirror is a spherical mirror of infinite Ans.
focal length. Magnified and erect image is obtained when object is kept
between lens and Fi
Ans. (a)
a concave mirror is a 185. Assetion (A): Property of converging a convergent lens
Q 177. Assertion (A): The image formed by does not remain same in all media.
certainly real if the object is virtual.
Reason (R): Property of lens whether the ray is diverging
concave mirror is
Reason (R): The image formed by a or converging is independent of the surrounding medium.
certainly virtual if the object is real Ans. (¢) A convex lens made of glass behaves as a convergent
Ans. (c) lens when placed in air or water. However when the same
a driver's mirror. lens is immersed in carbon disulphide (n = 1.63), it behaves as
Q178. Assertion (A):A convex mirror is used as a dlivergent lens. Therefore when a convergent lens is placed
a wider field of view as
Reason (R): Convex mirrors have inside a transparent medium of refractive index greater than
They also give an erect, though
they are curved outwards. that of material of the lens, it behaves as a divergent lens.
diminished image. Behaviour of a lens depends on the refractive index of a
Ans. (a)
surrounding medium.
114 I
MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE QuEBTION BANK

Q 186. Assertion (A): Llght travels faster In glass than In alr. no unlts.
109. Assortlon (A): Refractlvo Index has
Reason (R): Glass is denser than air. ls a ratlo of two slmllar
Reason (R): The refractlvo Index
Ans. (d) quantltles.
Refractive index of glass is higher than of alr, so lUght will Ans. (a)
travel faster in air. virtual object formed by a
Q 190, Assertlon (A): The Image of a
Q187. Assertion (A): Higher is the refractive Index of a medlum
thln converglng lens ls always
real.
or
denser the medium, lesser If the velocity of lght
Reason (R): In the case of a thin lens
In that
medium.
Reason (R): Refractive Index ls Ihversely proportlonal to Ans. (b) For virtual object
velocity.
Ans. (a)
According to Snell's law
sini n2C/VV
sinr n cv V2

n nv2
This shows that higher is the refractive index of a medium or
denser the medium, lesser is the velocity of light in that Object-x-
medium.
u+X,F =+f
a 188. Assertion (A): Red light travels faster in glass than green
light.
Reason (R): The refractive index of glass is less for red
r or 1
light than for green light. V>0lt means Image ls real H
g37 :

Ans. (a)

Case Based QUESTIiONS

Case Study 1
The curved surface of a spoon can be considered as a focus polnt and centre of curvature
b.

spherical mirror. A highly smooth polished surface is pole and oblect

C.

d. oblect and Image

called mirror. The miror whose reflecting surface is
curved inwards or outwards is called a spherical mirror. Ans. (b) focus polnt and centre of curvature
Inner part works as a concave mirror and the outer bulging Q3. The focal length of a mirror is 15 cm. The radius of
part acts as a convex mirror. The center of the reflecting curvature s:
surface of a spherical miror is called pole and the radius a. 15 cm b. 30 cm c.45 cm d. 60 cm
of the sphere of which the mirror is formed is called radius Ans. (b) 30 cm
of curvature.
Glven that, f=15 cm
Radius of curvature of a spherlcal mirror ls glven as
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
the following questions R-2F
2 x15 -30 cm
R
Q 1.
When a concave mirror is held towards the sun and lts
Q4. The normal at any point on the mirror passes through:
sharp image is formed on a piece of carbon paper for some
time, a hole is burnt in the carbon paper. What the name
Is a. focus .pole
mirror and carbon C. centre of curvature d. any point rrt
given to the distance between the
paper? Ans. (c) centre of curvature
In a spherlcal mirror, normal drawn at any polnt passes
a. Radius of curvature
b. Focal length
through the centre of curvature.
Principal focus
c.

d. Principal axis
Normal
Ans. (b) Focal length
The focal length of a concave mirror is the dlstance between
its pole and principal focus.
a
a2. The distance between pole and focal point of spherlcal
mirror equal to the
is distance between:
a. pole and centre of curvature
 Science Class 10
|
Term 1
115
Q5. In a convex spherical
mirror, reflection oflight takes place a. Plane, convex and concave
at:
b. Convex, concave and plane
a.a flat surface b. a bent in surface c. Concave. plane and convex
C.a bulging-out surface d. an uneven surface d. Convex, plane and conave
Ans. (c) a bulging out surface
Ans. () Concave, plane and convex
magic
Case Study2 As the Image of head is blgger. the upper portion of
is of
mirror is concave. The middle portion of the image
The spherical mirror forms different plane. Now,
types of images when same size, so middle portion of magic mirror is
the object is placed at different portion
locations. the image of legs looks smaller, therefore, the lower
When the image is formed on screen,
the image is real and of magic mirror is convex.
when the image does not form on screen,
virtual. When the two reflected rays
the image is Q4. To get an image larger than the object, one can use:
meet actually, the a. convex mirror but not a concave mirror
image is real and when they appear to meet, the
image is b. a concave mirror but not a convex mirror
virtual.
A concave mirror always forms a real and inverted image [Link] a convex mirror or a concave mirror
for different positions of the object. But if the object is d.a plane mirror
Ans. (6) a concave miror but not a convex mirror
placed between the focus and pole, the image formed is
virtual and erect. Q5. A convex mirror has wider field of view because:
A convex mirror always forms a virtual, erect and a. the image formed is much smaller than the object and
diminished image. A concave mirror is used as doctor's large number of images can be seen
head miror to focus light on body parts like eyes, ears, b. the image formed is much closer to the mirror

nose etc., to be examined becauise it can form erect and c Both a. and b,
magnified image of the object. The convex mirror is used d. None of the above
as a rear view mirrors in automobiles because it can form Ans. (c) Both a. and b.
an small and erect image of an object.
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of: Lase study 3
the following questions: Mirror formula is a relation between object distance (u),
Q1. When an object is placed at the centre of curvature of a
image distance (v) and focal length (f) of a spherical
concave mirror, the image formed is: mirror.
a. larger than the object It can be written as+ where, R is the radius
b. smaller than the object

same size as that of the object rsi is of curvature of the mirror.

d. highly enlarged This formula is valid in all situations for all spherical
Ans. (c) same size as that of the object t a mirrors for all positions of the object. Consider the case, in
M which a mirror forms a real image of height 4 cm of an
object of height 1 cm placed 20 cm away from the mirror.

M
Principal
axis

When the object is placed at the centre of curvature of N

of the
concave mirror, the image formed is real, inverted and
same size as that of the object
--V----
a mirror, your image
02. No matter how far you stand from
appears erect. The mirror is likely to be: Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
a. plane b. concave the following questions:
d. either plane or convex Q1. The distance from the object to its image is:
[Link]
Ans. (d) The image is erect in a plane
mirror and also in a convex a. 20 cm b.80 cm c.60 cm d. 70 cm
object Ans. (c) 60 cm
mirror, for all positions of the
03. A child is standing in front of a magic
mirror. She finds the Here h=1cm, h2 =-4 cm. u=-20 cm
m
image of her head bigger, the middle
portion of her body
legs smaller. The following
We have,
ie
of the same size and that of the
isthe order of combinations for the magic mirror from the
or VE-80cm
S0. Iv-ul=I(-80)-(-20)1=60 cm
top.
116 I MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE QuESTION BANK
a2. The focal length of mirror is:
a.-16 cm b. 12 cm
-T!P-
waste time in solving questions
which can be
answera
Don't chapter.
C.-15 cm d. 10 cm concepts taught in this
using the theoretical
Ans. (a) -16 cm
Here, we have 1 When an object is placed at
the focus of a concave mirror,
at infinity.
the image is formed
diagrams is correct for the Tay
F-20-80 41-5 02. Which of the following ray
of light incident on a
concave mirror as shown in
figure

f-=5-16
5
cm

Q3. The radius of curvature of the mirror is:

a.-16 cm b.-14 cm 1 F
C-30 cm d.-32 cmn
Ans. (d)-32 cm
i

Radius of curvature, R =2f

-2(16)=-32 cm
Q4. The magnification of the image is:
a.3 .-6
.4 d.8
Ans. (c)-4
Figure B

m -V -80
=-4 e Figure A
-20
05. At what distance must an object be placed from mirror in
order that a real image double its size may be obtained?
3
a.-24 cm b. 32 cm
C.-40 cm d. 45 cm
Ans. (a)-24 cm
Figure
m _V-2v=2u Figure C? nt D

t a. Figure A b. Figure B [Link] d. Figure D

S0.
2u lg Ans. (d) Figure D
When a light ray parallel to the principal axis is incident on a
16) =-24 cmlt concave mirror, it passes through the principal focus after
reflection. Therefore, figure D is correct.
Case Study 4 Q3. If the magnification of an image is -2, the characteristicof
The relation between distance of an object from the mirror image will be:
(u), distance of image from the mirror (v) and the focal a. real and inverted b. virtual and enlarged

length (F) is called mirror formula. This formula is valid [Link] and inverted d. real and small
in all situations for all spherical mirrors for all positions of Ans. (a) real and inverted
If mis negative, the image will be real and inverted.
the object. The size of image formed by a spherical mirror
Q4. The mirror formula holds for:
depends on the position of the object from the mirror. The
a. concave mirror b. convex mirror
image formed by a spherical mirror can be bigger than the
object, equal to the object or smaller than the object. The [Link] mirror d. All of these
Ans. (d) Al of these
size of the image relative to the object is given by the
Q5. A parallel beam of light is made to fall on concave mirrot.
linear magnification (m). Thus, the magnification is given a
An image is formed at a distance of
by the ratio of height of image to the height of object. If 7.5 cm from the mirror.
The focal length of the mirror is:
magnification is negative, image is real and if it is
a. 15 cm b.7.5 cm
positive, image is [Link] c.3.75 cm d. 10 cm
Read the above passage carefuly and give the answer of Ans. (b) 7.5 cm
the following questions: The distance of object from mirror =
an
01. What is the position of image when an object is placed Using -4 o

at a distance of 20 cm from a concave mirror of focal uf ezt

length 20 cm?
d. Infinity
1(
a. 5 cm b. 20 cm C. 10 cm
f 7.5 cm
Ans. (d) Infinity
 Science Clacs 10 Term 1
117
during cvertaking
Case Study 5 provides assistance to the driver
Generally, vehicles alsw have 2
Ravi wanted to fix the
rear-view mirror of his scooter. Hc parking in everve gear etc. are
the body from outside. They
knows that rear-view mirror is
an essential safety deviCe pair of mirors attached tn Mimors
Outer Rear View
in the vehicle and allows him
to see objects at the backside popular as "síde rnirrors cn
purpose. Almost all
of his vehicle. (ORVM) which serve the same
modesn cars mount their side
mirors othe
doors-normally at A-pillar rather than the wings (the
well).
portion of the body above the wheel

He bought two mirors M, and M2. out of which M, is

curved inwards and M, is curved outwards.
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of the ansver of
the following questions: Read the above passage carefully and give
the following questions:
a 1. Based on the given situation, hich mirror should Ravi the following can produce a real!
need to fix as his rear-view mirror? Q1. Fora real object, which of
a. b. image?
[Link] miror
Both M, and M2 d None of these a. Plane misror
Ans. (b) 42 c Concave lens d Corrvex mirrcr
a
02 IfRis the radius of curvature of spherical mirror andfis Ans. (b) Concave miTor
slowly moved towards
its focal length, then: 02 An object at a distance of +15 an is
image will get:
the pole ofa comvex mirror. The
aR=f b.R-2f cR-3f dR- a. shortened and real
Ans. (b) R =2f [Link] and real
a
03. What is the formula for magnification obtained with cenlarge and virtual
miror? d diminished and virtual
distance
aImage b.2 xFocal length Ans. (d) diminished and virtual
Obect distance
a3. A comvex mirror is used:
Height of object d. None of these a. by a dentist
Height of image [Link] shaving
Imagedistance casa rear view mirrar in vehides
Ans. (e)
Object distance) beam of ight
d. as a ight refiector for obtaining a parallel
mirror M, and
4. Ravi did some preliminary experiment ith Ans. (c) as a rear view mirror in vehides
image of an object
found that magnification of the real Q4. The word 'AMBULANCE' is written
on the vehicle as:
distance is the
placed 10 cm in front of it is 3, at what
at a. ECNALUBMA b.30AUaA
imagelocated? AMBUJAM03 d None of these
a. 30 cm d-30 cm
Ans. (b) 3DAAJUEMA
Ans. (d)-30 cm Q5. Mark the corect statement:
m=-3(:image is real). u=-10 a Comvex mirror conform images of objects spread over a
cm
We know that, m=
-V
3= V=-30
u 10
large area
b. Convex mirrors are used by dentist
has a plus sign, then the in size, erect and
Q5. If the magnification of miror cIn convex mirror image is formed larger
a
is:
nature of image formed by it real
b. virtual and inverted
a. real and inverted [Link] miror forms real image.
d. real and erect over a
c virtual and erect Ans. (a) Convex mirror conform images of objects spread
Ans. (c) virtual and erect large area

Case Study 6 Case Study 7

that allows the driver to see Convex mnirors are used as rear-view mimrors in vehicles.
Rear view miror is a device
finds its place at the top of The image formed in a convex mirror is diminished (ray
rear ward It usually
This device is one of the most diagram is shown here) due to which it gives a wide field
windscreen inside the cabin.
devices in the vehicle. It
basic but essential safety
118 MasSTERMIND CHAPTERWISE CuEOTION BANK

ofviewmirmor
of the traffic belhind the vehicle. Consider a
Cxamine his tecth and gums from a variety ol angles. Ha
convex used on a moving autonmobile with radius
inds out that the mirror gives a magnilicad rellection of tha
of curvatune 2 m and a tuck is coming from behind it by mouth wlhich is cusier for the dentist to sce.
maintaining a constant distance of 3.5 m.
M

Read the above passage carefiully and give the answer

of
the following questions:
He decided to make a dentist mirror. He bought three
Q1. The distance behind the mirror where the image is formed
mirrors, M, M2 and M out of which M, was curved
is:
inwards, M2 was curved outwards and M3 shows lateral
a. 0.28 m b. 1.5 m c.0.78 m d. 7.8 m inversion.
Ans. (c) 0.78 m
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
Radius of curvature, R =2m the following questions
As 1 andR =2F Q1. Based on the above diagram, what kind of mirrors would
u
Tanmay need to make the dentist mirror?
R
*-35
4.5
a. Plane mirrors b. Concave mirrors
[Link] mirrors d. Acoustic mirrors
V 3.5 Ans. (6) Concave mirrors
V V=078 m
02. The laws of reflection hold good for:
02. The nature of the image formed is: a:M only b. Ma only
a. virtual and erect c. M2 only o [Link] M2 and Ma
b. real and inverted Ans. (d) M, M2 and Ma
[Link] erect and enlarged Q3. A full length image of a
distant tall building can definitely
d. None of the above be seen by Tanmay using:
Ans. (a) virtual and erect a. mirror M b. mirror M2
03. The size of the image relative to the size of the truck is: C. mirror Ma d. Both My and Ma
.030 b. O.5 c0.78 d.0.22 Ans. (b) mirror Ma
Ans. (d) 022 04. Magnification produced by mirror M, is always:
Magnification, m==- m0.22 0.78
a. less than one
b. more than 1
[Link] to 1
d. more or less than 1
Q4. The focal length of the mirror is: Ans. (c) equal to 1
a.0.5 m b.1m C. 1.5 m d. 2 m Q5. Under which of the following conditions
Ans. (b) 1m can M, form an
image larger than the actual object?
Focal length of the mirror 2 R
f=5-G=1m a. When object is placed between
focus and centre of
Curvature
Q5. If instead of 3.5 m, truck maintains a distance of 2 m, the [Link] object is placed at a distance equal to
image formed will be: its radius of
curvature
a. real. erect and diminished [Link] object is placed at a distance less
b. virtual inverted and diminished than its focal
length
creal erect and enlarged d. When object is placed at a
distance greater than its radius
d. virtual, erect and diminished of curvature
Ans. (d) virtual, erect and diminished Ans. (a) When object is placed between
focus and centre of
A convex mirror always produces a virtual erect and Curvature
diminished image.
Case Study9
Case Study 8 When the rays of light travels from
Tanmay went to a dentist for regular cleaning where he one transparent
medium to another, the path of ight is
observes that the dentist uses a small, hand-held mnirror to deviated. This
phenomena is called refraction of light.
The bending of
 Science Class 10 Term 1 119
it
light depends on the optical The bottomof a pool of water appears to be less deep than
density of medium through
which the light pass. actually is due to refraction.

Rarer
Denser Case Study 10
one medium to
The refraction of light on going from
which are
another takes place according to two Jaws
These laws are:
known as the laws of refraction of light.
1. The ratio of sine of anglc of incidence
to the sine of
media
Denser angle of refraction is always constant for the pair of
Rarer
in contact.
Sin = tant
The speed of light varies from medium to medium. A sin r
the second
medium in which the speed of light is more is optically This constant is called refractive index of
rarer medium whereas in which the speed of light is less is medium with respect to the first medium.
optically denser medium. Whenever light goes from one Refractive index is also defined as the ratio of speed of
medium to another, the frequency of light does not change light in vacuum to the speed of light in
medium.
however, speed and wavelength change. It concluded that 2. The incident ray, refracted ray and normal
all lie in the
change in speed of light is the basic cause of refraction. same plane.
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of This law is called Snell's law of refraction.
answer of
the following questions: Read the above passage carefully and give the
following questions:
01. When light travels from air to glass, the ray of light bends: 4the
a. towards the normal b. away from normal Q1. When light travels from air to glass:
c anywhere d. None of these a. angle of incidence> angle of refraction
Ans. (a) towards the normal b. angle of incidence <angle of refraction
When a ray of light travels from air (rarer) to glass (denser) C. angle of incidence
= angle of refraction

it bends towards the normal i. can't say

02. A ray of light passes from a medium A to another medium Ans. (a) angle of incidence> angle of refraction
B. No bending of light occurs if the ray of light hits the According to Snell's law of refraction,
boundary of medium Bat an angle of: sini sin i> sinhr
d. 120 sinr
1or
.0 b. 45 c90
Ans. (c) 90 or i>r
or
No bending of light occurs when light is incident normally 02. When light travels from air to medium, the angle of
perpendicularly on a boundary of two media since angle of incidence is 45° and angle of refraction is 30°. The
incidence and angle of refraction both are zero. refractive index of second medium with respect to the first
a 3. When light passes from one medium to another, the medium is:
frequency of light: a. 141 b.1.50
a. increases b. decreases d. 1
c.123
d. None of these
c remains same Ans. (a) 1.41

Ans. (c) remains same As, 142 sinr

When light goes from one medium to
other medium, its
frequency does not change. sin 45 1/N2 141
Q4. When light passes from glass to
water, the speed of light: sin 30
1/2
a. increases Q3. In which medium, the speed of light is minimum?
b. decreases a..Air b. Glass
[Link] same c. Water d. Diamond

d. first increases then

decreases Ans. (d) Diamond
Ans. (a) increases As diamond has maximum value of refractive index,
when light passes from glass to
The speed of light increases therefore it has minimum speed of light.
rarer medium.
water as water is optically Q4. If the refractive index of glass is 1.5 and speed of light in
filled with water appears to be
Q5. The bottom of pool air is 3x 10 m/s. The speed of light in glass is:
*******

light.
due to refraction of a. 2 x10 m/s b.2.9 x10 m/s
b. deeper
a. shallower c 4.5 x10 m/s d.3 x10 m/s
d. empty
.at same depth Ans. (a) As, H glass = 1.5,.c =3 x10 m/s
Ans. (a) shallower
120 MASTER
D CHAPTER WISE OvESTION BANK

íotfan
dsante 2Fn
or15--10 When an cbject is placed a ata doace Ente
then theinege formed 6
y-2 10 m/s
Es.
side cf the lens corcare er,
object in frort cf
Q5. Refractive index of a with respect to b is 2. Find the
O5. At which location of optical certre is forme
refractive index of bwith respect to a. tmage betvveen focus and
and irtnity
04 05 c025 d2 a 2yvhere betveen certre
Ans. (b) 05
.a1 F
Given refractive index of owith respect to bis a, #2
ca 2F
Refractive index cf bwith respect to o is
[Link] ardirfniny
H 05 Ans. (a) anyuherebetneen certre ten
adoptial ete
image f formed between fons ETE
bztNeen opZ
Case Study 11 ject is placed anyuhere
infinity.
The lenses forms different types of images when object is
placed at different locations. When a ray is incident Case Study 12
formetion oí iistnps
parallel to the principal axis, then after refraction, it passes
through the focus or appears to come from the focus.
Shivani wanted to study the
images by sphericel lenses. So
she bouzit D e
i5 paci 10 i
and Y. Out of which wbea a oject
When a ray goes through the optical centre of the lens, it imape is real iveed maied
trot oflens X, thedistznce.
passes without any deviation.
fomad at a grea But zbn the szme otje
image fcmed is
If the object is placed between focus and optical centre of placed 10 cm in froat of leas Y. he
the convex lens, erect and magnified image is formed. As inverted and of same size as the objea
the cser
the object is brought closer to the convex lens from Read the above passage carefally od gire
infinity to focus, the image moves away from the convex the following questions
lens from focus to infinity. Also the size of image goes on Q1. What is the focal length of lens
increasing and the image is always real and inverted. A b.5 an c20 cn d 15cn
a 10 cm
concave lens always givesa virtual, erect and diminished Ans. (e) 1Dm
Xs concER n zre becaus2 mee r
image imespective to the position of the object. h eE
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of miror, wha objert s plared et fons. imaz s íomed a
mfinite ie ata grezt dsence hs foellengm di XSD
thefollowing questions:
Q1. The Location of image formed by a convex lens when the
object is placed at infinity is: 02 What is the focal tength cf lens Y?
a. at focus b. at 2 .5 an b.20 an c5n
cat optical centre d between Fh and 2 Ans. () 5 n
Ans. (a) at focus Xis concave in natre because image isreel When chjgt
placed at Centre dí areire imag2 šrel imaedanda
Vhen an object is placedat infinity of convexlens. image will
be formed at focus F same size as object.
Thus, redius of aurveture df mirTor Yis 1D m
02. When the object is placed at the focus of concave lens, the
image formed is:
a. real and smaller b. virtual and inverted
5em
0 3. Which one of the following materials cannot be used t
C virtual and smaller [Link] and erect make a lens?
Ans. (b) virtual and inverted Clay [Link] CPlastic d Bcth a andc
Virtual and inverted image is formed, vwhen object is placed
Ans. (a) lay
at focus of the concave lens
04. Linear magnification produced by Lens Ycan be:
a3. The size of image formed by a convex tens when the object
a. less than 1or more than1
is placed at the focus of convex lens is:
a. small b. point in size
b. less than1or equal to1
chighly magnified d same as that of object cless than 1. more then 1 or equal to 1
d. more then 1 or equal to 1
Ans. (c) highly magnified
When object is placed at focus of a convex lens. highly Ans. () less than 1. more than 1 or equal to 1
enlarged or magnified image is formed Q5. Lens X produces a magnification of +5.
The object
object is placed at 2Fin front of comvex tens, the placed:
04. Whenthe
Location of image is: a beyond 2FK [Link] less than F
a..at F [Link] 2F on the other side cbetween Fh and 2 d at foas
cat infinity d between Fand optical centre Ans. (b) at less than F
Ans. (b) at 2F on the other side
 Science Class 10 I Term 1 121
and
Case Study 13 c. Thenature of the imnage formed wil be virtuat erect
diminished
Aditya and his friend Manoj real, inverted and
placed a candle fName in front
of a convex lens at various distances from it and obtainea d. The nature of the image formed vill be
diminished
the image of the candle Mame on whitc scrcen. Image formed will be virtual, erect and
a Ans. (b) The nature of the
He noted down the position
of the candle, screen and the magnified
Iens as under
following observations at different positions
Position of candle = 20 cm Q5. Manoj noted of
Position of convex lens = of candle from the lens. Atcording to Aditya one set
50 cm Find out if Aditya is right or not.
Position of the screen = 80 cm observations is incorrect.
Distance of the flame from the lens 60 cm:
a.
Distance of the screen from the lens 20 cn
Convex lens lens = 45 cm:
Distance the
of flame fron the
***
[Link] of the screen from the lens 22.5 cm
lens= 30 cm
c. Distance of the flane from the
Distance of the screen from the lens
20 cm
the lens = 10 cm
d. Distance of the flame from
15 cm
Distance of the screen from the lens
the lens = 10 cm
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of Ans. (d) Distance of the flame from
= 15 cm
the following questions: Distance of the screen from the lens v =15.
For this observation
The observation (d) is incorrect. formed
01. What is the position of the image formed from the convex and the object must be
ie. the image is at the focus
lens? at infinity and not 10 cm.
a. 80 cm b. 50 cm c30 cmm d. 60 cm
Ans. (c) 30 cm Case Study 14
a film or slide
Image distance, v = Position of screen - Position of convex; An overhead projector (OHP), like
projector; uses light to project an enlarged image on a
lens a page-sized
V=80-50 cm screen. In the OHP, the source of the image is with
=30 cm sheet of transparent plastic film (also known foils)
as
printed or
the image to be projected either
02 What is the focal length of the convex lens? hand-written/drawn. These are placed on the glass surface
a. 30 cm b.15 cm C-16 cm d. 16 cm has a light source below it and a
of the projector, which shown in
Ans. (b) 15 cm projecting mirror and lens assembly above it as
Object distance, u = Position of convex lens Position of the figure.
candle
U=-(50-20)--30cm Plane mage-
mirror
Focus FScreen
lens
. f=15 cm
0 3. Where will the image be formed, if he shifts the candle Object
towards the lens at a position of 35 cm?
a. At focus b. Between focus and pole

cAt infinity d. Between f and f

Ans. (c) At infinity
of
When the candle is shifted towards the lens at a position
35 cm.
Object distance, u=-(50-35)=-15 cma Concave
mirror

Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of

A =0 the following questions:
f=(Infinite) Q1. Based on the diagram shown, what kind of lens is usedto
at infinity.
When object is placed at focus, image is formed make the overhead projector?
describes the best about a. Concave lenses [Link] lenses
04. Which of the following statementif Aditya shifts the candle [Link] lenses d. Flat lenses
the nature of the image formed
towards the lens to 36 cm? Ans. (b) Convex lenses
formed will be virtual, inverted
a. The nature of the image 02. The image obtained will be erect and reaL How?
and magnified a. The image when passed through the lens was erect and
b. The nature of the image
formed will be virtual erect and
was directly obtained on the screen
magnified
122 MAsIERMIND CHAPTERWISE CunBTION BANK
ad glve
carefiully and give the answer
passage
b. The Imge Rrad the aove
when passed througth the lens was hverted of
and then it
the scree
gets reflected on the mirror to be obtained on

c. The screen used autonmatically makes the Image

the following
Q1. Dased on the
questions:
dlagram shown,
what kind of lenseswould
telescope?
.
the
real
erect and
Sumatl necd to make [Link]
d. Both b. and c. a. Concave lenses d. Flat lenses
Ans. (b) The image when passcd through the lens was c. Difocal lenses
Inverted
and then it gets reflectcd on the mirror to be obtained Ans. (b) Convex lenses
on the lyand L are in the ratioand
ofa..
screen Q 2. Iftho powers of the lenses focal length of L,
ratlo of the L
Q3. Why is concave mirror used and not convex mlrror? what would be the c.2:1 d. 1:1
a. Because concave mirror can give real lmage ,4:1 b. 1:4

[Link] convex mirror can glve real Image Ans. (b) 1:4
L, and L2 be f and f respectivey
[Link] concave mirror cannot glve real Image Let the focal length of
d. Because convex mirror cannot give virtual We know that,
image
Ans. (a) Because concave mirror can give real image. P-
Q4. Ifthe radius of curvature of concave mirror is 12 cm. Pa "
the focal length will be:
Then,
Pand
f
a. 12 cm b.6 cm C.-24 cm d.-6 cm Pa
Ans. (d)-6 cm
We know that It Is given that
6cm
But the sign of focal length of concave mirror is negatlve.
Therefore,f e-6 cm
Q5. The power of a convex lens is .. and that of a concave
lens Is. or
a. positive. negative b. positlve. positlve
Q3. What is the formula for magnification obtained with a
[Link]. positive d. negatlve, negative
lens?
Ans. (a) positive, negative
a. Ratio of height ofimage to height of object
Case Study 15 b. Double the focal length
c. Inverse of the radius of curvature
Sumati wanted to see the stars of the night sky. She knows
d. Inverse of the object distance
that she needs a telescope to sce those distant stars. She
finds out that the telescopes, which are made of lenses, are Ans. (a) Ratio of height of image to helght of object
called refracting telescopes and the ones which are made Q4. Sumati did some preliminary experiment with the lenses
of mirrors are called rellecting telescopes. and found out that the magnification of the eyepiece ()is
So, she decided to make a refracting telescope. She bought 3. If in her experiment with L, she found an image at 24 cm
two lenses, Li and L2. out of which Lj was bigger and L from the lens, at what distance did she put the object?
was smaller. The larger lens gathers and a. 72 cm b. 12 cm
bends the light,
.8 cm cm
while the smaller lens magnifies the image. Big, thick
Ans. (c) 8 cm
.6
lenses are more powerful. So to see far away, she needed a
big powerful lens. Unfortunately, she realised that a bigg We know that,
m
lens is very heavy.
Lens
324
mage u=8cm
Q5. Sumati bought not-so-thick lenses for the telescope and
polished them. What advantages, if any, would
she have
with her cholce of lenses?
a. She will not have any
advantage as even thicker lenses
would glive clearer Images
Eyeplece b. Thicker lenses
would have made the telescope easler to
To eye La
handle
c. Not-so-thick lenses
would not'make the telescope very
Heavy lenses are hard to make and difficult to hold in the heavy and also allow considerable
d. Not-so-thick lenses amount of Ught to pass
right place. Also since the light is passing through the lens, will glve her more magnification
the surface of the lens has to be extremely smooth. Any Ans. (c) Not-so-thick lenses
would not
flaws in the lens will change the image. It would be like heavy and also allow considerable make the telescope very
amount of Ught to pass.
looking through a dirty window. (CBSE SQP 2020)
11 The Human Eye and
the Colourful World
Scan the QR Code
to know more about this Chapter

Fastrack REVISIGN
was the first to use a
dd ransparent material bounded by five plane surfaces Recomblnatlon of Whlte Light: Isaac Newton
AP
(two triangular bases and three rectangular lateral surfaces) glass prism of obtaln the spectrum
of sunlight. He found that when
in the path of dispersed light then
after
inclined at some angles. an inverted prism is placed
recombine to form white light. He
When a ray of light passes through a glass prism, refraction (or passing through prism, they
while the violet colour
bending) of light occurs twice, once when it enters the prism and observed that the red colour bends the least
then when it leaves the prism. bends the most. Screen
The diagram shows refraction of a ray of light through a prism, Pp (Second prism)

light
White
H
slit White light
N--. M

Emergent Pi(First prism)

Incident
Ray
Kay NM R
Recombination of the Spectrum of White Light
seven colours (Violet, Indigo,
Spectrum: The rainbow is an arc of
Blue, Green, Yellow, Orange and
Red), visible in the sky due to
This arc
Here, PE = Incident ray, dispersion of sun's light by raindrops in the atmosphere.
FS = Emergent ray, (called VIBGYOR) is known as spectrum.
Angle of incidence, by the
Li =
Atmospheric Refraction: The refraction of light caused
Angle of emergence, densities) is
Le
Earth's atmosphere (having air layers of varying optical
=

EF Refracted ray,
atmospheric refraction. Twinkling of stars, the stars seem higher
ZA = Angle of prism,
than they actual are and advanced sunrise and delayed sunset
are
r Angle of refraction,
some phenomena based on atmospheric refraction.
LD= Angle of deviation. of
angle ofScattering of Light: When a ray of light passes through path
a
The angle between incident ray and emergent ray called
is
suspended particles, it spits up in various random directions. Sucha
deviation.
ray is parallel to the phenomenon is known as scattering of light. In this situation,
In refraction througha glass slab, the emergent
incident ray but in refraction through a glass prism, the emergent scattering depends upon the size of the particles as in the case ofa
ray is not parallel to the incident ray. true solution and a colloidal solution. According to Rayleigh's law of
Dispersion: The splitting of white light into its
components due to scattering, the amount of scattered light is 1/(wavelength).
different bending ability of colours when it passes through a prism,Tyndall Effect: The phenomenon of scattering of light by colloidal
is called dispersion. particles is known as Tyndall effect.
The scattering of blue component of the white sunlight by air
molecules present in the atmosphere causes the blue colour of the
sky.

In outer space, the sky looks black instead of blue beause there is
light| no atmosphere to scatter sunlight.
White During sunrise/sunset the sun is near the horizon, light has to travel
Glass prism the greatest distance through the atmosphere to reach us. Most of
Sheet with pin hole White screen
the blue light is scattered away from our line of sight. The red light
Dispersion of white light by Glass prism. does not get scattered and reaches our eyes.
124 MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE CUEsTION BANx

Objective TYPE QUESTIONS

-
Multiple Choice Questions

01. A
prism has:
a three triangular surfaces and two rectangular surfaces
b three rectangular surfaces and two triangular surfaces a.() b.(i) [Link]) (iv)
c tvo triangular and two rectangular surfaces Ans. (b) (i)
d three rectangular surfaces and three triangular surfaces Out of the following orientations. figure (i) represents the
Ans. (b) three rectangular surfaces and two triangular
surfaces case in which, after dispersion, the third colour from the too
a2 The rectangular surfaces of a prism are known as: is blue. i e. colour of the sky.

a reflecting surfaces b. dispersing surfades

crefracting surfaces d. None of these
Ans. (c)
The refraction of ight takes place through rectangular
surfaces
Q3. The angle between the two rectangular surfaces of a
prism
is called:
a angle of prism [Link] angle
CT!P-
Show the path of emergent beam from the glass prism and
cBoth a and b d None of these find out the [Link] dispersion of white light.
Ans. () Bath a and b
4. The angle of deviation of a prism is the angle between:
07. When a ray passes through a prism:
a. it goes undeviated
a. incident ray and refracted ray
b. it remains parallel to the base
b. emergent ray and refracted ray
cincident ray and emergent ray produced
cit bends towards the base
d. None of the above
[Link] of the above Ans. () it bends towards the base
Ans. (c) inddent ray and emergent ray produced Q8. The angle at which the ray gets deviated is called:
a5. In the following diagram, the correctly marked angles are a. angle of deviation b. angle of dispersion
(CBSE2017) cangle emergence d. refracted angle
Ans. (a) angle of deviation
09. The angle between two refracting surfaces of prism is:
a. prism b. emergence
c deviation d. incidence
Ans. (c) deviation
Q10. A transparent refracting material which
is bounded by two
plane refracting surfaces is:
a. prism b. convex lens
Cglass slab d. None of these
a. all b. only Ziand ZA Ans. (a) prism
ci. 4rand A d. 41LA and 2D a11. The ratio of real depth to apparent depth is
Ans. (c) Zi. 2r and 2A called:
a. refractive index [Link] angle
Q 6. A prism ABC (with BC as base) is placed in different [Link] displacement d. None of these
orientations as shown in figures. A narrow beam of white Ans. (a) refractive index
light is incident on the prism as shown in figure. In which a12. A student traces the path a
of the following cases, after dispersion, the third colour of ray througha glass prism for
four different values of angle of incidence.
from the top corresponds to the colour of the sky? On analysing9
the diagrams, he is likely to conclude
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
ray:
that the emergent
B
parallel to the incident ray.
a. is always
b. is always
perpendicular to the incident ray.
() [Link] always parallel to the refracted ray.
d. always bends at an angle to
the direction of incident ray.
Ans. (d) always bends at an angle to the direction
of incident ray.
 Sclonoo Claso 10 | 1om 125
a13. Astudent is observlng phenomona of llght are tnvolvod in
the dlagram showlng the patlh of a Q17, Whlch of tho followlny (NCERIIXEMPIAR)
ray of lght passing
through a glass prlsna, He would fm tho formatlon of a ralnbow?
that for al angles of lncidcnce
the ray of llght bends: Rellocton, ulracton and tlisporslon reftlection
a. towants the normat [Link], (dloperslon nnd tutal Internal
while entering nto the pr bsnm an oned temal reflectlon
away from the normal
while emergn, out of tUe prlsin, C, telretion, tlisporslon
b. away from the normal [Link], scatterhg and total Internal rellectlon
while entering nto the prbsnn an linternal relertlon
towarids the normal vhite
emerglng out of the prlsnn. Ans. (c) telractlon, tllperslon and iand
c. away trom the normal of ralnbow, watur droptets refract
whlle enterlng as well as Inte the fornaton Internally and
cmerging out of the prism lsperse lhe lncldent unllglht, ten out a t ralnbow
reflect
livilly rofract It agaln wlen l comes the
d. towards the normal while cntering as well as wlle regardlng the
emerging out of the prlsm Q 10. Whleh of the followlng statoments ls correct
lUlgtat of different colours of whlte lIght In
Ans. (a) towards the normal while entering lnto the prisi and propagatlon of (NCERTEXCMPLAR)
away from the normal while emerging out of the prlsm alr?
a. Red ght moves lastest.
Q14. In the following diagram, the path of a ray of llght passing green Ught.
b. Dluo Uglht moves faster thin
through a glass prism is shown: C, Al tho coldurs of the whlte Ught move with the Some

[Link] lght moves wlh thhe mean speed as that of the red
and the vlolct Ught.
A Ans. (c) All the colours of the whlte llght move wilth the same
specd In alr
a 19. Spllttlng of whlte llght Into seven colours on passlng
through a glass prlsm Is called:
a. rellectlon b. refractlon
d. dlisperslon
C. Scalterlng

In this diagram, the angle of Incldence, the angle of Ans. (d) dlsperslon
emergence and the angle of deviation respectivcly arc: a 20. In whlch of tho following casos wll no dlsperslon tako
a. X, R and T b. Y.Q and T placo when sunllght passes through It?
[Link] P d. Y,Q andP
Ans. (d) Y. Q and P
-T!P-
Students should practice the diagram for refraction of light
through a prism along with its various rays and angles. Prism Glass slab

a15. After tracing the path of a ray of light through a glass prism
a student marked the angle of incldence (21), angle of
refraction (2r), angle of emergence (2e) and the angle of
devlation (2D) as shown in the dlagram. The correctly
marked angles are:
Prism Prism
seven colour on passing
Ans. (b) The splltting of whlte light Into
through a transparent medlum like a glass prlsm.
a 21. Whlte llght Is Incldent at an angle to tho surfaco of a
trlangular plece of glass. Whlch colour of lght devlatos
most from Its orlglnal path after leaving the glass?
b. 2l and Le a. Red [Link] [Link] Blu
a. l and zr Ans. (d) Blue
Ze and 2D d. Z. Lrand Ze
C.
The colour with least wavelength devlates more,
Ans. (b) 2l and 2e
of a ray of light through
KNOWLEDGE BOO STER
Q 16. In an experiment to trace the path
valucs of angle of Incldence a Wavelength ofblue llght wavelength of red lightely s0,
a glass prism for different
emergent ray: blue llghtdevlatesthemostfrom Its orlglnal path.
student would find that the
ray
a. is parallel to the incident a 22. Tho colourod llght that reflects most whle passling
b. is perpendicular to the Incldent ray
through a prlsm is:
refracted ray
c. is parallel to the a. yellow b. violet [Link] d. red
d. bends at an angle to the
directlon of Incldent ray
Ans. (b) vlotet
directlon of Incldent ray
Ans. (d) bends at an angle to the
 MASTERMNO CHAPTERWISE
ueSTION BANK
126
a23. Sunlight Is a mixture
of . visible colours: Which of the follawing position of PQR ill again yety
a. 5 G c7 d.1tone of these white lIght7
Ans. ()7
0 24. The effect of glass prism is only to separate the seven
colours of
a. white Ught [Link] from bulb
.sunlight d. All af these
Ans. (d) Al of these
0 25. The..Colour is at the top and colour is at the
bottom of spectrum.
a. red, violet b. red. blue
Cviolet, red d. None of these
Ans. (c) violet., red

-T!P- R
Leorn oll the colours of white light spectrum in sequence ie.
VIBGYOR. Ans. (b) Atríangular glass prism POR and another simiar
position cn
prism P'Q'R'is placed atongside it in the iverted
a 26. Who discovered the experiments with glass prism that its vertex P. So that it's refracting surface is in the oppost
white light consists of seven colours? direction.
[Link] [Link] cMaxwell [Link] 0 32. Rainbow is caused due to:
Ans. (a) Nevton a. reflection of sunlight through air molecules
a 27. When the wavelength of a colour of light is higher, the b. dispersion of sunlight from vrater drops
refractive index is: c refraction of sunlight from water drops
a. smaller [Link] cconstant [Link] of these d. diffraction of sunrays from water drops
Ans. (a) smaller Ans. (b) dispersion of sunlight from water drops
a 28. Which of the following colours is the least deviated on Each vater drop acts as a tiny glass prism. splitting the
passing through a prism? sunight into a spectrum
a. Red b. Yellow cViolet d. Indigo 0 33. Rainbow is formed due to:
Ans. (a) Red a. scattering and refraction
029. When Newton colour dise is rotated fast, the different [Link] internal reflection and dispersion
colours: creflection only
a. can be separated d. diffraction and dispersion
b. can be differentiated Ans. (b) total internal reflection and dispersion
c can not be differentiated Both a. and b. are responsible for the twinkting of star.
d. None of the above a34. Twinkling of stars is due to atmospheric: (NCERT EXEMPLAR)
Ans. (c) can not be differentiated a. dispersion of light by water droplets
b. refraction of ight by different layers of varying refractive
0 30. White light passes through an equilateral prism then: indices
a. dispersion takes place at first refracting surfaces and
refraction at second refracting surface c scattering of light by dust particles
d. internal reflection of ight by clouds
b. refraction takes place at first refracting surface and
Ans. (b) reffaction of light by diífferent layers of varying refractive
refraction at second refracting surface.
indices
c. dispersion takes place at both refracting surfaces.
d. refraction takes place at both refracting surfaces Tvinkling of stars is due to atmospheric refraction of lightby
different layers of varying refractive indices
Ans. (a) dispersion takes place at first refracting surfaces and
refraction at second refracting surface a 35. Stars appear to twinkle because:
Only dispersion takes place at first refracting surface. The a. of atmospheric refraction
b. movement of air
second refracting surface merely refracts the colours
produced after dispersion, cBoth a. and b.
d. None of the above
a31. Two identical prisms PQRand PO'R are given. White light
is passed through POR as shown below. Ans. (c) Both a. and b.
Q 36. Which of the following is not the cause of atmospheric
refraction?
a. Apparent image of Sun is formed closer
light to the earth.
White b. Dawn or dusk are formed.
cSun can be seen 2 minutes before actual sunrise and 2
minutes after actual sunset
Q d. Clouds look white
 Scionco Class 10 Torim 1 127
Ans.(d) Clouds look white
Q 42. Whlch of the following phenomena contrlbutes
Clouds look white signlflcantly to the reddlsh appearance of the sun at
because water droplets present in the
atmosphere scattered all (NCERTEXEMPLAR)
wavelengths due to their large sunrlse or sunset?
size. a. DIsperslon of light
Q 37. The air layer of atmosphere b. Scattering of Ught
whose temperature Is less
than the hot layer behave as optlcally: Total Internal reflectlon of light
c.
a. denser medium Reflection of Ught from the earth
d.
b. rarer medium
c. inactive medium Ans. (b) Scatterlng of llght
d. elther denser or rarer medlum
Reddish appearance of the sun at sunrise or sunset due to
Ans. (a) denser medium is
present In the
The cold air layer of the scatterlng of Ught by the particles
atmosphere acts as a optically
denser medium than hot air because the molecules are atmosphere
closely packed together. Q 43. The sky appears dark to passengers flylng at very hlgh
(CBSE 2020)
a 38. Refraction of light by the earth's atmosphere due to altitudes mainly because:
variation in air density is called: a. scattering of Ught Is not enough at such helghts.
a. atmospheric reflection b. there is no atmosphere at great helghts.
C. the size of molecules Is smaller than the wavelength
of
b. atmospheric dispersion
visible Ught.
catmospheric scattering
the light gets scattered towards the earth
d.
d. atmospheric refraction
Ans. (a) scattering of light is not enough at such heights.
Ans. (d) atmospheric refraction
Q39. Atnoon the sun appears white as: (NCERTEXEMPLAR) - Common/LError-
a. light is least scattered
Students do not revise the underlying concept of scattering of
b. all the colours of the white light are scattered away tight and its associated examples. They get confused in such
C. blue colour is scattered the most
questions
d. red colour is scattered the mostm af
Ans. (a) light is least scattered a 44. Consider the following reasons for the reddish appear of
At noon, the sun appears white because light from the sun the Sun at the sunrise or the sunset:
travels relatively shorter distance in atmosphere and () Light from the sun near the horizon passes through
therefore is least scattered. thinner layers of air.
a40. The clear sky appears blue because: (NCERT EXEMPLAR) (ii) Light from the sun covers larger distance of the Earth's
a. blue light gets absorbed in the atmosphere atmosphere before reaching our eyes.
b. ultraviolet radiations are absorbed in the atmosphere
(i) Near the horizon, most of the blue light and shorter
Cviolet and blue lights get scattered more than lights of all wavelengths are scattered away by the particles.
other colours by the atmosphere iv) Light from the sun near the horizon passes through thicker
d. light of all other colours is scattered more than the violet
layers of air.
and blue colour light by the atmosphere (CBSE 2020)
Ans.(c) violet and blue lights get scattered more than lights of all The correct reasons are:
a. () and (ii) only b.(i). (i) and (v)
other colours by the atmosphere d. (1) and (v) only
The clear sky appears blue because violet and blue lights get
c.() and () only
Ans. (b) (i), (in) and (iv)
scattered more than lights of all other colours by the
atmosphere. Q 45. The bluish colour of water in deep sea is due to:
(NCERT EXEMPLAR)
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER
a. the presence of algae and other plants found in water
The sunlight while travelling from the earth's atmosphere
b. reflection of sky in water
scatters blue light more than red. So, sky looks blue.
scattering of light
d. absorptlon of light by the sea
Q41. The danger signals installed at the top of tall buildings are
Ans. (c) scattering of light
red in colour. These can be easily seen from a distance
The bluish colour of water in deep sea is due to scattering of
because among all other colours, the red light:
(NCERT EXEMPLAR) ight.
scattered the most by smoke or fog
a. is
Q 46. Thesunlight which reaches earth is yellowish, rather than
b. is scattered the least by smoke or fog
white. It is because due to scattering, the sunlight is
or fog deficient in:
cis absorbed the most by smoke a. violet colour [Link] colour
d. moves fastest in air
fog c. blue colour d. violet, indigo and blue colour
Ans. (b) is scattered the least by smoke or
light is scattered Ans. (d) violet, indigo and blue colour
The danger signals are red because the red
therefore can be easily seen As the vialet, indigo and blue colours scatter, the sunlight
the least by smoke or fog and reaching the earth is deficlent and hence appears yellow.
from a distance.
128 MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE QUESTION BANK

danger. It
Q 47. The scattering of light takes place only when a ray of unlversal Indlcator for
particularwavelength strikes a partlcle whose dlameter ls:
64. Red lIghts ls used as
a. smaller than the wavelength of light because:
wavelength and scatters most
lght has lcast
b. equal to the wavelength of ight red
b. red Vght has maximum
wavelength and scatters most
[Link] than the wavclength of light wavelength and statters least
C. red Vght has maximum
d. None of the above
d. it Is matter of convention
and there Is not sclenti
Ans. (c) bigger than the wavelength of light
principles.
Scattering of a wave of light is only posslble when wavelength and scatters lcast
the Ans. (c) red lIght has maxlmum
diameter of particle on whlch it ls incldent is bigger than lts fog or mist
Red Ught can casily penetrate through
wavelength.
Q48. During sunset of sunrise the sun appears reddish
a. at this time sun is not very hot
because: Assertion and Reason Type Questions
b. sun produces red light at this time
Dlrectlons ([Link]. 55-66): Each of the föllowing questions
conslstg
[Link] longer passage in atmosphere, even red light in the ls Reason
of two statements, one Is Assertlon (A) and the other
(R).
suntight scatters (a).
Select the correct answer to these questlons from the codes (b).
d. None of the above
Ans. () due to longer passage in atmaspheré, even red light in the ( and (d as glven below
a. Both assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true and
Reason (R)
suntight scatters
Is the correct explanation of Assertlon
(A)
During sunset or sunrise the light travels through large
[Link] Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true but Reason
(R)
distance of atmosphere. In this process all the colours of
is not the correct explanation of Assertion
(A)
white light scatter. However, the red light which is of longest
C. Assertlon (A) Is true but Reason
(R) Is false
wavelength scatters close to the eye. Thus, the Sun, as well
(A) Reason (R) is true
as the sky appear red. d Assertion is false but
Q 49. The deflection of light by minute particles and molecules Q 55. Assertion (A): There is no dispersion of light refracted
ofthe atmosphere in al directions is
Light
called.. of through a rectangular glass slab.
Reason (R): Dispersion of light is the phenomenon of
a. dispersion b. scattering splitting of a beam of white light into its constituents
cinterference d. Tyndall effect colours.
Ans. (b) stattering Ans. (b)
a50. One cannot see through the fog, because: After refraction at two parallel faces of a glass slab, a ray of
a. refractive index of the fog is very high light emerges in a direction parallel to the direction of
[Link] total reflection at droplets incidence of white light on the slab. As rays of all colours
c fog absorbs light emerge in same direction, hence there is no dispersion only
d. ght is scattered by the droplets lateral displacement takes place.
Ans. (d) ight is scattered by the droplets Q 56. Assertion (A): Higher the refracting of the prism material
Objects are not visible through the fog because droplets lower is the angle of deviation.
scatter the ight rays due to Tyndall effect. Reason (R): The angle of deviation is inversely
Q51. Which of the following colours is least scattered by fog, proportional to the angle of prism.
dust or smoke? Ans. (d)
a. Violet b. Blue [Link] [Link] Hlgher the refractive index of the prism material, greater is
Ans. (c) Red the angle of devlation.
Q52. When the sunlight enters at atmosphere the colours which Q57. Assertion (A): The white light is dispersed seven
scatter first are: into
constituent colours when passed through the prism.
a. violet. indigo and blue b.,
blue and green
Reason (R): Different colours of light bend through
red, orange and yellow d. only red
C.
different angles as they pass through a prism.
Ans. (a) violet, indigo and blue
Ans. (a)
Light with shortest wavelength scatter first as there are no
particles in upper atmosphere whlch could scatter green, Q58. Assertion (A): A beam of white light
glves a spectrum on
yellow, orange or red light. passing through a hollow prism.
53. The sky generally appears blue, because the colour which Reason (R):Speed of light outside the
prism is same as the
scatters closed to eye is: speed of light Inside the prísm.
a. violet b. Indigo Ans. (d)
cblue d. violet and Indigo Dlsperslon of ght cannot occur on
Ans. (c) blue
passing through air
contained In a hollow prism. Dispersion
takes place because
i First violet and jndigo colours scatter. However, blue colour
Scatters closest to the eye. Thus, the sky appears blue.
the refractlive, Index of medium for different
different.
colours s
 Science Class [Link] 1
129

Assertion (A): The rainbow is seen when

the sun is behind
59. Assertion (A): The light of violet colour deviates the most Q 63.
and the light of red colour the least,
while passing through the observer.
a prism. due to dispersion of
Reason (R): Rainbow is produced
hanging in the air after the
white light by small rain drops
Reason (R): For a prism material, refractive Index
highest for red light and lowest for the violet light. s rain.
small droplets of
Ans. (c) For a prism materlal refractlve index is highest for violet Ans. (b) Just after the rain, a large number of
air. Each drop acts ike a
light and lowest for the red light. water remaln suspended in the
on these drops the white
Q 60. Assetion (A): The planets twinkle while the stars do not. small prism. When sunlight fal
The dispersed light froma
Reason (R):The planets are much closer to the earth then Ught splits Into seven colours.
a continuous band of seven
the stars. large number of drops forms
Ans. (0) Stars are so much farther away from Earth that they
colours.
2 minutes
twinkte but planets are closer to earth. Due to a large a 64. Assertion (A):The Sun is visible to us about
2 minutes after the
distance, stars appear [Link] points of light and before the actual sunrise, and about
atmospheric refraction.
that ight is more easily disturbed by the effects of the actual sunset because of
actual sunset and
Earth's atmosphere Reason (R):The time difference between
Q61. Assertion (A): The twinkling of stars is due to the fact that the apparent sunrise is about 4 minutes.
refractive index of the Earth's atmosphere fluctuates Ans. (c)
Reason (R): When light propagates from one medium to wavelengths of
Q 65. Assertion (A): The scattering of longer
another its direction of propagation changes. particles increases.
light increases as the size of the
Ans. (a) The continuously changing atmosphere is able to cause lights of all
variation in the light coming from a point-sized star because Reason (R): Large particles scatter
of which the star appears to be twinkling
wavelengths equally well.
an Ans. (b)
62. Assertion (A): Rainbow is' example of the dispersion of of light
sunlight by the water droplets. a 66. Assertion (A): The scattered light makes path
Reason (R): Light of shorter wavelength is scattered much ira relvisible. of Tyndall
more than light of larger wavelength. F1 Reason (R): Scattering of light is the result
Ans. (6) The rainbow is an arch of seven colours visible the
in sky
effect.
which is produced by the dispersion of Sun's ight by
Ans. (b)
in
raindrops the atmosphere.

Case Based QUESTIONS

are involved in
Case Study 1 02. Which of the following phenomena of light
the formation of a rainbow?
The triangular glass prism is a transparent object made of a. Reflection, refraction and dispersion
glass having two triangular ends and three rectangular Refraction, dispersion and total internal reflection
b.
are c. Refraction, dispersion and internal reflection
sides. The opposite faces of a triangular glass prism
d. Dispersion, scattering and total internal reflection
not parallel to one another. (c) Refraction, dispersion and internal reflection
Ans.
When a ray of light passes through a prism, it bends Refraction, dispersion and internal reflection are involved
in
consisting
towards the base of prism. But when white light the formation of a rainbow
colour in it is
of seven colours falls on a glass prism, each a3. Which of the following coloured light has the least speed
that seven
refracted by a different angle, with the result in glass prism?
The red colour
colours are spread out to form a spectrum. a. Violet b. Yellow C. Red d. Green
the least and the violet colour is deviated
the Ans. (a) Violet
isdeviated
maximum. Violet coloured light has the least speed in glass prism.
give the answer of
Read the above passage carefully and Q4. The colour of light which undergoes least bending on
the following questions: passing through the glass prism is:
angle between: a. green b. violet [Link] d blue
Q1. Angle of deviation in a prism is the
Ans. (c) red
a: incident and reflected ray Red coloured light undergoesleast bending on passing
b. reflected and emergent
ray
through the glass prism.
Cincident and emergent ray
Q5. Based on the different orientations of a prism ABC given
d. incident and refracted
ray 3
below, in whih of the following cases, after dispersion,.
Ans. (c) incident and emergent
ray
the third colour from the top corresponds to the colour of
incident and emergent ray is called as the
The angle between the sky?
prism.
angle of deviation in a
130 I MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE QuEBTION DANK

through a prism, then:

Q3. When a ray Is refracted
a. Zl= 28 [Link]= Le + 48
d. Zi> zr
Incident
Light
ncident
White

white
Light Ans. (d) 1> r rarer medium (air) to denser
As the ray of light enters from
incidence is more than angle of
medium (glass), the angle of
refractlon.
( A on:
04. The angle of deviation depends 1
Inident
a. refractive index of
b. angle of incidence
prism s :
White c. Both a. and b.
Ligh
d. None of the above
Incident
Light Ans. (c) Both a. and b.
White More will be the refractive index, more wil be the angle of
index of
deviation and it also depends on the refractive
prism.
B
(iv) Q5. The rectangular surfaces ofa prism are known as:
a. reflecting surfaces b. dispersing surfaces
a ) b .(i) C.(ii) [Link])
[Link] surfaces d. None of these
Ans. (b) (i)
Ans. (c) refracting surfaces
Case Study 2 The refraction of light takes plae through rectangular

A prism is a transparent refracting medium bounded by

surfaces
two plane surfaces inclined to each other at a certain Case Study 3
angle. The refraction of light through a prism follows the Dispersion is the splitting up of white light into seven
laws of refraction. In the prism, refraction takes place on colours on passing through a transparent medium like a |
its refracting surface it means when the light enters the glass prism, When a white light beam is passed through a
prism and when the light leaves the prism. The refraction prism, a band of seven colours are formed is known as
through a prism is shown. Here, A is the angle of prism, Zi spectrum of white light as shown in below figure.
is the angle of incidence of the face AB and e is the angle When white light consisting of seven colours falls on a
of emergence at other face AC. transparent medium (glass prism), each colour in it is
refracted (or deviated) by a different angle, with the result
The incident ray suffers a
that seven colors are spread out to form a spectrum.
deviation or bending
hrough an angle ô due to
e refraction through
prism. This angle is called
angle of deviation as shown.
e -Red
orange
Yellow
Green
in figure. Blue
Indig
Li+Le=28+ LA White light
-Violett
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of :

Glass prism
the following questions:
Q1. The angle between the two refracting surfaces a prism is Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
of
called: the following questions:
a. angle of prism b. angle of incidence Q1. A beam of white light falls on a
glass prism. The colour of
C. angle of deviation

Ans. (a) angle of prism

s d. angle of emergence light which undergoes the least bending
through the glass prism is:
on passing9
The angle between the two refracting surfaces of a prism is a. violet red b.
[Link] d. blue
called angle of prism. Ans. (b) red
a2. The angle between the incident ray and the emergent ray Red coloured light undergoes the
is called: least bending on passing
through the glass prism.
a. angle of emergence b. angle of deviation Q 2.
The colour of white light which
C. angle of incidence d. None of these suffers the maximum
bending (or maximum refraction) on
Ans. (b) angle of deviation passing through a
glass prism is:
The angle between the incident ray and the emergent ray Is
called angle of deviation.
[Link] [Link] [Link] [Link]
Ans. (d) violet
 Class 10 Term 1 131
Science
is correct?
Violet coloured light
suffers the maxlmum bending or a3. Which of the following dispersion
maximum refraction on passing through
a glass prism.
a 3. Which of the following Blue
colour of white light is least Red
deviated by the prism? b.
Red
[Link] b. Violet C. Indigo d. Yellow white Blue White
Ans. (d) Yellow light
light
Yellow coloured light is least deviated by the prism among
the given colours of white light.
-Blue
a4. The colour of white light which Is deviated the maximum Bue d.
Green
on passing through the glass prism is: Violet
White White
[Link] b. indigo light
light
red d. orange
Ans. (6) indigo Ans. (a)
Indigo coloured light is deviated the maximum passing8
through the glass prism.
Red
Q5. The splitting up of white light into seven colours on White
Blue
passing through a glass prism is called: light
a. refraction b. deflection minimum for red.
The deviation is maximum for violet and
c dispersion d. scattering
so option (a) is correct.
Ans. (c) dispersion
Q4. Whena red light
passes through a prism, it:
Dispersion is the splitting up of white light into seven colours
on passing through a glass prism. a. will not split
b. will split into seven colours
Case Study 4 C. will split into white colour

When white light is incident on one refracting surface of d. will split into many different colours
the prism, the light splits up into constituent Ans. (a) will not split
The red light has a single wavelength and when
enters a
colours-violet, indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange and
other different colours.
red. The process of splitting of white light into its seven prism, it will not split into
constituent colours is called dispersion. When the Q5. The spectrum produced by the white light
by prism is a
dispersed white light is made to fall on a screen, we get the called:
band of seven colours is called the spectrum of white light. a. pure spectrum
b. impure spectrum
Red colour bends the least on passing through the prism
angle on C. monochromatic spectrum
and violet colour bends through maximum
d. None of the above
passing through the prism.
Ans. (b) impure spectrum
The boundaries of colours in the spectrum
produced by
prism are not sharp, so the spectrum is impure.

Case Study 5
Light of all the colour travel at the same speed in vacuum
for all wavelengths. But in any transparent medium (glass
light
White
or water) the light of different colours travel with different
Glass prism speeds for different wavelength that means that the
Sheet with pin hole White screen refractive index of a particular [Link] different for
different wavelength. As there is a difference in their
give the answer of speeds, the light of different colour bend, through different
Read the above passage carefully and
the following questions angles. The speed of violet colour is maximum and the
Q1. The splitting of white light
can be done by speed of red colour is minimum in glass so, the red light
b. prism deviates least and violet colour deviates most. Hence,
lens
a.
C. mirror
d. None of these higher the wavelength of a colour of light, smaller the
Ans. (b) prism refractive index and less is the bending of light.
a2. Which property of light
is used by prism to form a
a,>, and , <vAlso frequency, v=
spectrum?
a. Reflection
b. Refraction Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
d. Scattering
c. Dispersion the following questions:
Ans. (b) Refraction
132 I MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE UESTION DANK
decomposed in al
light is all
01. Which of the following statements is correct regarding the white colour. The
Violet, Indigo, Blue, Green,
he y
propagation of light of different colours of white light In component colours,
VIBGYOR. The banao
called as
air?
a. Red light moves fastest
Orange and Red,
coloured components
of a light
beam is eale
explained by thi
b. Blue light moves faster than green Ught. phenomenon can be inking
spectrum. The (different wavelengths
colours
C. All the colours of the white light move with
the same that light of different med
speed. while travelling in a
different velocities
[Link] light moves with the mean speed as that of the red
and the violet light. velocity of light observed when en he
Hence, the change in depends on the
Ans. (c) AlU the colours of the white light move with the same to the glass,
light passes from the air
speed. wavelength answe
02. Which of the following is the correct order of wavelength? Read the above
passage carefully and give the wer of
a. Red > Green» Yellow questions:
lne the following placed in differen
[Link]>Violet» Green Q1. A prism ABC (with BC as base) is
white light is incident
[Link]>Green> Violet norientations. A narrow beam of which, of the followin
in figure. In
d. Red> Yellow> Orange the prism as shown ton
Ans. (c) Yellow > Green > Violet cases, after dispersion, the third colour from the
sky?
The increasing order of wavelength of visible spectrum is corresponds to the colour of the
A
Violet Indigo « Blue <Green <Yellow <Orange <Red
[Link] correct order is t, ()
Yellow >Green> Violet
Q3. Which of the following is the correct order of speed of light
in glass?
a. Red> Green > Blue
t T r
b. Blue > Green > Red
CViolet> Red> Green
d. Green> Red>Blue (i) (
Ans. (b) Blue> Green > Red
The more will be the wavelength. more will be the speed.
4. Which colour has maximum frequency?
a. b.(i)
C. ii) d.(iv)
a. Red b. Violet
.
.Blue d. Green
Ans. (6) (i)
Generally, in case of a prism (), the formation of spectrumis
Ans. (d) Green shown below:
Frequencyis inversely proportional to the wavelength.
Violet has minimum wavelength among all these colours, so MN is the Incident white light
violet has maximum frequency.
Q5. Which of the following is the correct order of angle of :
Orange Red
Green
deviation? Sky
(Sky Coloun
t Blue
Indigo
Colour

a. Red>Green> Blue M Violet

b. Blue> Yellow>Orange
[Link] > Red> Green zu In the above figure, from top
the third colour is yellow. Bur
d. Blue> Green> Violet r. toe we can see that from bottom the third colour is blue (colour
Ans. (b) Blue>Yellow sOrange l
of sky). So, we can obtain the correct situation by inverting
the prism. Thus the required orientation can be foundin case
The angle of deviation is more for more refractive index. Gi).

CaseStudy 6
M Violet
The phenomenon of decomposition of the white light into Indigo
its seven component colours when passing through a Blue(Sky Colour)

prism or through a transparent object delimited by non

parallel surfaces is called dispersion of light. A beanm of
light containing all the visible spectrum of the light is
white, because the sum of all the colours generates the So, option (6) is correct
 Science Class 10|
Term 1 133
non-twinkling of planets is
02. Which of the following statements Is correct regarding the 04. Twinkling of stars and
propagation of light of different colours of white llght in accounted for by:
b. dispersion of lght
air? scattering of lght
a,
a. Red light moves fastest C. atmospherlc refraction d. None of these
[Link] light moves faster than green light Ans. (c) atmospherlc refraction is on account
[Link] the colours of the white light move wlth the same Twinkling of stars and non-twinkling of planets
speed of atmospherlc refractilon
[Link] light moves with the mean speed as that of the red Q5. In absence of atmosphere, the
colour of sky appears
and the violet light b. black [Link] d. yellow
a. blue
Ans.
(C) All the colours of
the white Ught move with the same Ans. (b) black
speed Due to no scattering of light.
Speed of light is same for all colours of white lIght in alr but
different colours have different wavelengths and Case Study 8
one medium to
frequencies. We know that when light goes from
optical densities, then
Q3. When white light is allowed to pass through a glass prism another medium having different
refraction of light rays (or bending of light rays) takes
colour deviates the least? we have air everywhere.
a. Violet b. Red Green d. Orange place. Now, in the atmosphere,
C.
is not at the same
Ans. (b) Red But all the air in the atmosphere
temperature. Some of the air layers of the atmosphere are
a4. When white light is allowed to pass through a glass prism, cold whereas other air layers of the atmosphere are
which colour deviates the most? comparatively warm (or hotter). Now the cooler air 1layers
d. Violet medium for
a. Indigo [Link] of the atmosphere behave as optically denser
c. Red
Ans. (d) Violet light rays whereas the warmer air layers (or hotter air
atmosphere behave as optically rarer
Q5. For a prism material, refractive index is highest for: layers) of the
a. Red b. Yellow [Link] [Link] medium for the light rays. So, in the same atmosphere we
And
Ans. (d) Violet have air layers having different optical densities.
when light rays pass through the atmosphere having air
Case Study7 it: layers of different optical densities, then refraction of
light
Atmospheric refraction is the phenomenon of bending of takes place. The refraction of light caused by the earth's
light on passing through Earth's atmosphere. As we move atmosphere (having air layers of varying optical densities)
above the surface of Earth, density of air goes on is called atmospheric refraction.
decreasing. Local conditions like temperature etc. also Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of
affect the optical density of Earth's atmosphere. On the following questions:
account of atmospheric refraction, stars seen appear a1. With respect to atmospheric refraction which
of the
hot air?
higher than they actual are; advanced sunrise; delayed following point distinguish between cold air and
sunset, oval appearance of the Sun at sunrise and sunset; a. Cold air denser
is than' hot air
stars twinkle, planets do not. b. Hot air is lighter than cold air
answer of
Read the above passage carefully and give the .Cold air has higher refractive
the following questions: d. All of the above

01. Due to atmospheric refraction, apparent length of

the day: Ans. (a) Cold air is denser than hot air
b. decreases Cold air Is denser than hot air (ighter). Also, cold air has
a. increases
d. Al of these higher refractive index than hot air. Hence, all are true.
C. remains the samne

Ans. (a) increases a2. What is the reason behind twinkling of stars?
length of the day a. Dispersion of star light
Due to atmospheric refraction, apparent
b. Reflection of star light
increases by 4 minutes.
appears raised due to: .Refractlon of star light
2, Apparent position of the star
d. All of the above
a. atmospheric refraction
b. scattering of light
Ans. (c) Refraction of star light
Twinkling of stars is due to refraction of star light.
C. both a. and
b.

d. None of the above Q3. Why sun appears flattened during sunrise and sunset?
a. Because sun is closer to Earth
Ans. (a) atmospheric refraction
appears raised due to b. Because Earth Is rotating
Apparent position of the star
atmospheric refraction. [Link] Earth is revolving
flattened due to: d. Because of atmospheric refraction
3. The Sun appears oval shaped or
b. scattering Ans. (d) Because of atmospheric refraction
a. dispersion
refraction d. cannot say The sun appears flattened because of atmospheric
C. atmospheric
Ans. (c) atmospheric refraction
. refraction.
134 MASTERMIND CHAPTERWISE OuESTION BANK

light, the stars seem higher th

thanthe
a4. How much time from sunrise to sunset is lengthened Due to refraction of
because of atmospheric refraction? actually are.
twinkle because of:
a. 4 hours b. 2 minutes
02. Stars appear torefraction
c.4 minutes d. 2 hours a. atmospheric
Ans. (c) 4 minutes b. movement of air
The time from sunrise to sunset is lengthened by 4 minutes. c. Both a, and b.
a5. When light rays from stars enter into Earth's atmosphere, d. None of the above
(c) Both a. and b.
it travels from: Ans.
refraction and movement of air,
a. denser to rarer medium Due to both atmospheric
b. rarer to denser medium stars appear to twinkle.
appears white as:
C. rarer medium to vacuum 03. At noon the Sun
d. denser medium to vacuum a. light is least scattered
Ans. (b) rarer to denser medium b. all the colours of the
white ight are scattered away
the most
When light rays from stars enter into Earth's atmosphere it cblue colour is scattered
travel from rarer to denser medium. scattered the most
d. red colour is
Ans. (a) ight is least scattered
Case Study 9 noon. the sum appears white
Light is least scattered, so at
The twinkling of a star is due to atmospheric refraction of of light is involvedin
Q4. Which of the following phenomena
starlight. The starlight on entering the Earth's atmosphere,
the formation of rainbow?
undergoes refraction continuously before it reaches the a. Reflection, refraction and
dispersion
Earth. The atmospheric refraction occurs in a medium of reflection
b. Refraction, dispersion and total internal
gradually changing refractive index. Since the atmosphere internal reflection
c Refraction, dispersion and
bends starlight towards the normal, the apparent position d. Dispersion, scattering and total internal
reflection
ofthe star is slightly different from its actual position. The3 Ans. (c) Refraction, dispersion and internal reflection
star appears slightly higher than its actual position when Refraction, dispersion and internal reflection are the
viewed near the horizon. Further this apparent position of phenomena involved in the formation of rainbow.
the star is not stationary, but keeps on changing sightly, Q5. Which of the following statments is correct regarding the
since the physical conditions of the Earth's atmosphere propagation of light of different colours of white light in
arenot stationary. Since the starsS are very distant they are air?
approximate point-sized source of light. As the path of a. Red light moves with the fastest speed
rays of light coming from the star goes on varying slightly, b. Blue light moves faster than green light
the apparent position of the star fluctuates and the amount [Link] the colours of the white light move with the same
of starlight entering the eye flickers the stars sometimes speed.
appear brighter and at some other time, fainter, which is [Link] light moves with the mean speed as that of the red
and the violet light.
the twinkling effect.
Ans. () All the colours of the white light move with the same
Star speed
Apparent Allthe colour of the white light move with the same speed
Ray path star position during propagation of light of different colours of white light
in air.
Refractive fndex
Increasing Case Study 10
The spreading of light by the air moleculès is called
scattering of light. The light having least wavelength
scatters more. The sun appears' red at sunrise and sunset,
appearance of blue sky it is due to
the scattering of lig
The colour of the scattered light depends
on the size o
particles. The smaller the molecules
in the atmospher
scatter smaller. wavelengths
of light. The amount o
scattering of light depends on
Read the above passage carefully and give the answer of the wavelength of lign
When light from sun enters
the following questions the Earth's atmosphere, it ge
scattered by the dust particles
Q1. The stars seem higher than they actually are due to:
and air molecules present
the atmosphere. the path
of sunlight entering in the a
a. reflection of light b. refraction of light room through a fine hole
is seen because of scattering
[Link] of light d. inference of light the sun light by the dust
(b)
particles present in its path ins
Ans. refraction of üght the room.
 Science Class 10 Term1 135
to the rest of
Read the above passage
carefully and give the answer violet, blue and indigo is small as compared
the following questions: the colours. So sky appears
bluce in colour.
answer of
a1. To an astronaut in a spaceship, the colour of earth appears: Read the above passage curefully and give the
a. red b,blue . the following questions
white d. black
Ans. (b) blue
a1. At noon the sun appears white as:
KNOWLEDGE BOOSTER a. light is least scattered
b. all the colours of the white light are scattered
away
71% of the earth's surface is covered with water. When sunlight
c. blue colour Is scáttered the most
reaches the water, the water absorbs lights
of all colours in the d. red colour is scattered the most
white light and reflects only blue light. Thus, the earth appears
Sol. (a) light is least scattered
blue from space.
The Sun appears white as little of the blue and violet colours
over
are scattered. At noon light from the Sun is directly
02. At the time of sunrise and sunset, the light from sun has to head and travel relatively shorter distance.
travel A and Bare X and Y.
a. longest distance of atmosphere a2. The wavelengths of two light sources
The ratio of light scattered from and B is:
A
b. shortest distance of atmosphere X
[Link] a. and b. dy
d. can't say
Sol. (6)
Ans. (a) longest distance of atmosphere
As the distance between us and Sun is more at the time of
Scattering
sunrise and sunset.
Q3. The colour of sky appears blue, it is due to the: Q3. The clear sky appears blue, because:
a. refraction of light through the atmosphere a. blue light gets absorbed in the atmosphere
b. dispersion of light by air molecules [Link] radiations are absorbed in the atmosphere
CScattering of light by air molecules [Link] light get scattered more
d. All of the above d. light of all other colours is scattered more than the
Ans.(c) scattering of light by air molecules violet and blue colour lights by the atmosphere
(¢) blue light get scattered more
Due to the more scattering of blue colour by molecules
air.
ofSol. The clear sky appears blue because the molecules in the air
4. At the time of sunrise and sunset: scatter blue light (smaller wavelength) from the Sun more
[Link] colour scattered and red colour reaches our eye than they scatter other colour (larger wavelength)
[Link] colour scattered and blue colour reaches our eye Q4. The danger signals installed at the top of tall buildings are
cgreen and blue scattered and orange reaches our eye red in colour. These can be easily seen from a distance
d. None of the above because among all other colours, the red light:
Ans. (a) blue colour scattered and red colour reaches our eye 7.6 a. is scattered the most by smoke or fog
b. is scattered the least by smoke or fog
red colour scattered and blue colour reaches our eye
C. is absorbed the most by amoke or fog
Red light being of largest wavelength blue scatter more, red
scattered least. d. moves fastest in air

Q5. The danger signs made red in colour, because: Sol. (b) is scattered the least by smoke or fog
a. the red light can be seen from farthest distance Scattering
b. the scattering of red light is least

[Link] a. and b. Q5. The bluish colour of water in deep sea is due to:
d. None of the above a. the presence of algae and other plants found in water
Ans. (c) Both a. and b. b. reflection of sky in water
Red colour is scattered the least by air molecules. So, it is scattering of light
able to travel the longest distance through the fog, rain etc. d. absorption of light by the
SoL (c) scattering of light
Case Study 11 The colour of water in deep sea looks blue because the red.
When sunlight enters the Earth atmosphere, air and water green, orange and yellow having longer wavelengths are
vapour molecules will absorb part of the light and absorbed more strongly by water than blue which has
reradiate it to all directions. This is called scattering. shorter wavelength. So, when white light from the Sun
According to Rayleigh's law of scattering the amount of enters the sea. it is mostly the blue that gets returned, while
so that the wavelength of other colours absorbed. Also, blue coloured light is
scattered light oc- scattered more by find particles in water
(wavelength)
 Books Corner
Official Group and Channel

Silent features:-
● Best/Premium books are available.
● Best material for exam cracking.
● Doubts solving live.
● We provide sample papers of all subjects.
● And many more things.

● Link of Channel:-
Click here
• Link of Discussion Group:-
Click here
Note: These all channels are of Telegram only.

•Join fast•